Home

PG Music Band in a Box - 2012 (Macintosh) User Guide

1. Alternate Drum Notes Select the Alternate Drum n Note type such as Open Alternate Play 0 High Hat or Bass Drum from the Alternate Note drop down menu When Alternate Note you exit the box you will see that the box has a border indicating that an alternate note is located there Alternate Velocity 0 Playing the Drum Patterns Play the drum pattern by pressing the PLAY button 154 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Stop playback by pressing the STOP button or the lt Spacebar gt Press the PLAY button again to hear the pattern again if you have made changes When the pattern is sounding like you want press the EXIT button Drum Pattern Options Drum Pattern Recorded Relative Weight Playback Bar Mask Drum Fill on Substyle Late Triplets Relative Weight USUAL SETTING 5 Relative Weight is the number that you assign to the pattern from 9 Numbers from 1 8 indicate how often you want the pattern to be played in relation to the other patterns on the same row A weight of 9 is a special setting that ensures that the pattern will ALWAYS be played Patterns assigned a weight of 9 usually have other options set which instruct the pattern to only be played at certain times bar after a drum fill for example Playback Bar Mask USUAL SETTING 0 Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars of the song the pattern will play The bar numbers are counted relative to the last
2. PlayBack Weight 5 C Embellish Pattern PlayBack Bar Mask 0 Transpose Down Limit PlayBack Beat Mask 0 Type Of Voice Leading Transpose Only z Chord Type Any Chord T W Transpose Root Pattern Interval Chord Half Octave Range Full Octave i oK Cancel Play Pattern Pushed how often g ticks to push pattern 120 ppq 0 Playback Weight Usual Setting 5 Set this number higher lower if you want the pattern to be played more less 160 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions often than the other patterns on the same row This number is also displayed on the main StyleMaker screen A setting of 9 always is a special setting that instructs the pattern to always be played instead of the other patterns on the same row These patterns always have other options set which specify the times that this pattern would be eligible to be played Playback Bar Mask Usual Setting 0 Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars of the song the pattern will play The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker and range from 1 8 Bar 1 is the first bar after a part marker for example Other bar mask settings pattern played at odd number bars only 1 3 5 7 9 pattern played at even bars only 2 4 6 8 10 pattern played on 3rd of 4 bar 3 7 11 15 pattern played on 4th of 4 4 8 12 16 20 pattern played on 5th of 8 5 13 21 pattern played on 6th of 8 6 14 22 pa
3. Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime CD Select Ports Instruments MIDI In Part amp Bass Port 2 lt set all ports to this gt Piano Part 2 Drums Part 5 Guitar Part 5 Soloist Part 5 Strings Port 5 Melody Port 7 Thru Port 7 GS Inst Port 4 f CoreMIDI Help ox gt Cancel 208 Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X This example shows Band in a Box configured to receive record from a MIDI keyboard on MIDI Interface Port 8 Band in a Box transmits tracks on an assortment of synthesizers connected to various MIDI Interface ports This scheme would be useful on a large MIDI setup if your best Drum sounds are on a Port 5 synthesizer best Piano is on a Port 2 synthesizer etc Your setup does not have to be so complex If you want all tracks to be played on a single synthesizer the most common situation set the desired destination in the Bass popup menu and then click the set all ports to this button to quickly set the destination for all tracks You can get excellent results with all instruments assigned to a General MIDI compatible device such as a Roland Sound Canvas module QuickTime Music and a Controller Keyboard If you have a small MIDI controller keyboard but you do not have any external MIDI Synthesizers Band in a Box can easily support this Select Ports Instruments MIDI In Part amp Bass f lt set all ports to this Piano Drums Guitar Soloist OT Music In
4. z Z0 Tenor Banjo Tenor Z0 Tenor Banjo The M button is for Melody Harmony in this case it s set to trumpet trombone 3rds harmony Whatever the melody plays will come out with trumpet trombone harmony in thirds Pressing the f button allows you to Chapter 5 The Main Screen 47 choose from a list of only your most frequently used harmonies Pressing the M button allows you to choose from the full list of harmonies The F10 key disables the Melody harmony The T button is for Thru harmony Whatever you play along on your MIDI keyboard while the song is playing will be auto harmonized in real time in this case using a Tenor Banjo type harmony Pressing the f button allows you to choose from a list of only your most frequently used harmonies Pressing the T button allows you to choose from the full list of harmonies The keystrokes Ctrl F10 disable the Thru harmony The Embellisher Click on the Embellisher checkbox to enable live embellishment of the Melody or Soloist part during playback When musicians see a lead sheet that has a melody written out they would almost never play it exactly as written They would change the timing to add syncopation change durations to achieve staccato or legato playing add grace notes slurs extra notes vibrato and other effects If you enable the Embellisher any Melody will get embellished as it is played so that you hear a livelier more realistic Melody and it s different e
5. Now let s make the ending drum pattern Endings are 2 bars long In the case of the drums this is done by 2 consecutive 1 bar patterns on the ending row Move to the Endings row Input a 1 bar pattern in the first column and then another 1 bar pattern in the 2nd These 2 patterns are the ending patterns so you should make the 2nd pattern an ending drum pattern typically with a crash cymbal on beat 3 for example Making Bass Patterns Bass patterns are recorded live from a MIDI keyboard If you can t play in real time or if you don t have a MIDI keyboard you ll have to import these instruments from other styles as we will be doing with the strings The Bass Screen If you re making a simple bass pattern you ll only need to record pattern s on the A 8 beat row the top row These patterns will be chosen for every chord regardless of the length But if you want the style to play different patterns when the song is encountering chords that last 1 2 3 or 4 notes you should record separate patterns on these rows Recording a Bass Pattern Move to the top row of the bass area in column 1 Press the REC button This will begin the recording of the bass pattern You will hear a 2 bar lead in and then you record a 2 bar bass pattern For your bass pattern you will play a 156 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions pattern based on a C7 chord You can use all 12 notes but should just play the pattern as you would if the ch
6. 19 The Jazz works Information press EDIT to change these Generate Bar Memo 20 J Pass fast plucked Patch is Jazz Guitar Range 0 frets 21 Guitarist 21 ms 80ms itai ChordTypes Best 100 OK 50 Adv 25 Edit Guitarist Maker Search Unusual 0 Barre O0Embellish 7th amp 9 No open v OK to change existing guitar chan OK Generate Guitar Chord Solo Cancel Here are the steps needed to generate your Chord Solo Create Chord Solo in a style similar to 1 Jazz Guitar 5 frets 2 Jazz Guitar single position 1 3 Jazz Guitar advanced chords Select the Guitarist to Use In the main list at the left of the Window you see the list of Guitarists that is already defined For example you can see that Guitarist 2 is called Jazz Guitar single position That will create chord solos that stick to a single position on the guitar neck whenever possible Track to use Melody i Select Melody or Soloist track You d normally want the Guitar Chord solo to be written to the Melody track but you can also select the Soloist track as the destination Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 121 122 Guitar Patch Jazz Electric Guitar W Confirm the Guitar Patch Selection The Guitarist that you pick see item 1 will already have chosen the guitar patch to use but you can override it with this setting Wi Auto Set set Range Ge nerate fe Whole 3 Part Select the Range of the song to
7. Cancel Include notes early by 120 PPQ 15 68 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Open Change 5 cd All Press the Open Change button and ee ee select the MIDI file to import Choose a preset and the Chord Wizard will interpret the chords in that style Press the INTERPRET CHORDS NOW button to see the chords written into the Band in a Box chordsheet Jazz Standard G7 F6 G7 F BbMaj7 Gm7 G7 FS G7 F6 G7 F BbMaj Gm7 G7 The dialog has options to read channels into the Melody and or Soloist tracks Read in Chords from a PG Music or Band in a Box MIDI file Many of PG Music s programs have MIDI files with the chords in them You can open these files in Band in a Box and the chords will be imported onto the chord sheet To import the chords from a PG Music MIDI file i e a MIDI file made by Band in a Box PowerTracks Pro or some other PG Music programs choose the menu item File Import Chords from MIDI File and select OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file The chords will then appear on the lead sheet starting at bar 1 overwriting any chords that were there previously Jazz Up the Chords Jazz Down the Chords When switching genres from Pop to Jazz or Jazz to Pop it s often necessary to change the chords from Pop Rock chords C to Jazz type chords Like CMaj7 Now you can quickly do this by new menu options called Jazz Up
8. Ibutton and select the bar from which to play With the song stopped type the letter x on the computer keyboard to restart from the current location of the highlight cell or Select Play From Bar from the Song menu or Press Ctrl f Double clicking on the spreadsheet or notation will start playback from that point without re generating the song unless needed due to a change in the song Replay plays a song without constructing it first To replay a song in Band in a Box Press the Ibutton or Select Replay Already Constructed Song from the File menu or Press the keystrokes r or Press the x key Pausing Songs There are several ways to pause a Band in a Box song Press the Ls Ibutton Select Hold Pause from the Song menu Press the delete key Stopping Songs To stop a Band in a Box song Press the L amp Ibutton or Select the Stop option from the Song menu or Press the esc key Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 73 Changing Volume Panning Reverb Chorus Bank To change the volume panning reverb chorus or bank of a part 1 Select the part by clicking on the desired part to change PA Guitar _Sol_ String IE 3 Clicking on the number in the box will change the value by 1 To increase the setting click on the upper half of the number Click on the lower half of the number to decrease the setting by 1 4 Clicking on the
9. If you prefer not to see these characters displayed then set this to false These characters won t show up on the printout regardless of this setting Show Rests in color If checked pushes are displayed in GREEN and rests are displayed in RED This only applies to the Chord Sheet not the notation Chapter 14 Reference Allow any Rests You can disable the rests feature You might want to do this if you ve got a song with a lot of rests in it and are then having difficulty recording a melody because you don t hear the drums providing the beat due to the drums resting If so you can temporarily disable the rests so that you can record and listen to the drums Allow any Pushes If for some reason you don t want a style or a song to have pushes you can uncheck this box Allow Style Pushes If for some reason you don t want a style to have pushes you can uncheck this box Chord Display Type This box allows for non standard display of chords on the chordsheet area The options here allow for Normal Standard Notation Roman Numeral Notation Nashville Notation and Solfeggio Notation Allow Lead In Bars People who use Band in a Box for soloing practice will likely turn the lead in off to allow endless looping uninterrupted by the lead in count Play Lead In even if Intro present If a song has an intro it s usually not necessary to play the 2 bar lead in count There s a new option to always omit the lead in i
10. Most GM modules have brushes available on patch 41 on the drums On some you need to load a GS sound font for this to occur On the Yamaha XG you likely need to send a GS mode on message from the GM menu in Band in a Box But if your module just doesn t have brushes available then you can set this option and the style will remap the notes to different drum instruments that don t have brushes For Roman Numerals in minor keys use relative major Option for minor keys base roman numerals on the relative major For example in key of Am Am is either the Im chord or the VIm chord Save Button on main screen works as Save As The Save button will launch the file dialog where the location and name of the file being saved can be changed Name MIDI files with MID extension This will append the file extension MID to MIDI files saved in Band in a Box rather than prefacing them with SMF Standard MIDI File Allow larger fonts on Chord Sheet Display larger fonts particularly with higher screen resolution Color for Chordsheet Area Make your choice from a list of colors for the chordsheet area The keystrokes Ctrl Shift C will toggle through the colors from the main screen without opening the Preferences 2 dialog Soloist Prefs Set the Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard to true if you want MIDI velocity information sent to the Soloing Wizard If you have a velocity sensitive MIDI device attached to your computer
11. The Harmony Maker The Harmony Maker editing module allows you to create or edit your own harmonies This can be used in the program to harmonize melodies solos or Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 167 live playing on the Thru channel Sophisticated options control usage of passing harmonies diatonic dominant approach and chromatic drop octave voicings e g drop 2 octave doubling patch selection and more An unlimited number of harmonies can be created and can be saved to disk as harmonies files Changes in harmonies can be heard live as a song 1s playing Harmony Maker 20 George Shearing Quint Yj Title George Shearing Quint Memo 4 part plano harmony Melody doubled by vibes and guitar octave down George Shearing Quintet Voice Chan Octave Low High O Double V Boost Kd mel M2 M3 4 5s W Mel2 W Mel3 o 127 6 Update m1 oo 127 15 Copy Paste o 127 15 Save Save As 127 15 Export Import o 127 15 Test Chord _18 lt none gt x More Cancel o 127 127 m m 4 4 ae l 4 D 127 gt LowRoot A 38 57 Patches Chan A Chan B Chan Vibraphone This screen allows you to design a harmony This harmony can be used in the future for the melody or the thru harmony part Each harmony can use up to 3 channels Harmony Channel A B and C If your harmony only has one instrument then
12. This lets you quickly load in styles that have been used your last few sessions with Band in a Box This will likely become your preferred method of choosing styles since your favorites are usually near the top of the list Click the Play When Chosen checkbox to have Band in a Box play your song immediately upon selecting a style Tip Click the Play When Chosen checkbox at the bottom of the window to have Band in a Box play your song immediately upon selection Types of Styles Built In Styles 70 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide The first 24 styles that we made were built in to the program and are still referred to as Built in Styles These styles are no longer built in to the program making them editable like all other Band in a Box styles The built in styles may be selected from the S pull down menu They are a convenient way to quickly apply a basic style to a song User Styles The other styles that we make are called user styles because they are editable The user styles may be selected by clicking on the Style button or from the Sty pull down menu or by selecting Load Style from Disk from the User menu or by pressing u Holding down control or option while clicking on the style load button will restrict the files to A K or L Z These instructions are given in a message if an overflow of too many files has occurred This works wherever you load in styles with a File O
13. b is usually used for the Bridge of the song and for soloing in the Middle Choruses All of the middle choruses of the song will automatically play in the b substyle This is great for Jazz songs allowing you to play swing throughout the middle soloing choruses and revert to the a substyle for the last chorus Note If you want to keep the same substyle in the middle choruses you would need to uncheck the Vary Style in Middle Choruses option in the Additional Song Settings option on the Song menu Placing Drum Fills A one bar drum fill will play in the bar preceding leading into a part marker just as a live drummer will play a fill to accent the transition between sections of a song If you want a drum fill to play in bar 7 of a song insert a part marker at bar 8 You can either retain the current substyle or change the substyle a or b when you place the part marker Edit Bar Settings After you have selected a bar press the F5 function key or the keystrokes Option B or select Bar Settings from the Edit menu to open the Edit Bar Settings dialog Settings such as number of beats per bar tempo changes style changes patch changes and harmony changes can be made in this dialog Edit Bar Settings beats this bar g Change Style to E Dea C swn C ear _ Relative Tempo Change Q W Send patches with style change Bass Soloist gt r Click On Piano Strings Me
14. no alias defined no alias defined W Allow Any Style Aliases no alias defined no alias defined _ Confirm Substitutions no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined n no alias defined Eo __ Cancel no alias defined Clear To make an alias click on the original style then select the style you would like to substitute in its place When you are using an alias you will notice that there will be a small arrowhead in the Title window on the main screen indicating that you have an alias loaded Aliases are stored in files called ALI J_DIZZY 5 TY Alias for ZZJAZZ STY indicated by the gt symbol Tip You can temporarily totally disable the Alias feature by unchecking the Allow Any Style Aliases checkbox found in the Style Aliases dialog You can also have confirmation of alias substitutions by checking the Confirm Substitutions checkbox Playing Pausing and Stopping Songs Playing Songs There are several ways to play a song in Band in a Box either starting from the beginning or from a specified place in the song To generate a new Band in a Box arrangement and play the song from the start you can either Press the LE _Ibutton or 7 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Press the keystrokes a or Press the F4 function key or Select the menu command Song Play To play a song in Band in a Box from a particular measure Press the E or
15. Allow Any Endings option To turn the song ending off for a single song select the Additional Song Settings option from the Song menu and uncheck Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Limit Screen size to Use this setting to choose the size of the screen you want to display Menu Limit Determines the number of items that can be listed in a menu OK to Load Harmony w songs If checked the harmony settings for each song will be loaded and saved with each song If set to NO the harmony setting won t be saved or loaded with the songs If you are using a certain harmony you should set this setting to NO otherwise you ll have to keep re selecting the harmony when you load in new songs Change Harmony w new chords Example If a harmony is played on bar on a C chord and then the note is held as the chord changes to a Fm7 chord 1f this setting checked the harmony notes will change so that they will be still be playing chord tones If they don t the harmony sounds dissonant Leave this setting checked unless you have a specific reason to disable it The harmony is changed by moving the voices to the nearest chord tone Har Volume Adjust Raise or lower the overall volume of the Harmony with a range of 128 to 128 OK to Load Style w songs Leave this unchecked to audition the same style with several different songs Use MSB for Bank Roland Band in a Box sends General MIDI bank changes These can be sent in two ways
16. Turn External Keyboard s Local On at end of session Normally while using Band in a Box the local off setting for your MIDI keyboard is best since the THRU part will be coming from Band in a Box and you don t want to hear your MIDI keyboard doubling the notes that are being played However when you exit Band in a Box you might want the local on setting for your synthesizer turned back on This option defaults to true OK to beep with messages Now that computers have better speaker systems a simple beep when an incorrect key is pressed can seem loud enough to wake your neighbors Setting the silent beep option allows Band in a Box to visually flash the window title bar to get your attention instead of generating an audible beep OK to prompt to reduce expand If a style is changed with a different feel 16th notes instead of 8th notes Band in a Box will automatically offer to expand or reduce the duration of the chords and change the tempo to accommodate the new style This also works as the song is playing Chapter 14 Reference 223 224 Lowest Bass Note E2 default Styles will normally play bass notes down to the low E if the pattern won t go below a low E note This happens with all styles automatically but there is also an option to set the lowest note that the bass can go real low so you can get a low C if you want to My soundcard or MIDI doesn t have brushes remap them
17. in the name of a style is a convention to indicate that the style is an intelligent guitar style This means that the patterns on the guitar part will play with correct guitar voicings on the fretboard poy Play the Freddie MGU song Open the Guitar window and click on the G button to view the Guitar track on the guitar fretboard As the song plays you ll see and hear the guitar played on the fretboard using correct Jazz voicings For some chords you ll notice that the guitar plays different voicings on each beat in a walking pattern For example on an F7 chord lasting 4 beats the guitar might play F7 Gm7 Abdim and F7 A with each chord lasting one beat just as a professional Jazz guitarist might do wv Show muted note of guitar style comping The Freddie MGU style uses 3 note chord voicings in order to emphasize the lower range and to enhance the percussive rhythm effect Since in these cases the guitarist is usually fingering the 4 note and muting it if you want to see what the 4 note of the voicing would be you can set this option by pressing the Settings button in the Guitar window and checking the box for Show muted note of guitar style comping in the Guitar Settings dialog Note Remember that for any style you see with an exclamation point in the style name an intelligent guitar style you can view and hear the guitar part played on the guitar fretboard as described above
18. to double the voice then use the Melody Doubling Voices For the Shearing Quintet harmony the only voice that needs a doubling like this is the Piano melody so we ll set this to 1 on mel the melody voice V Boost Velocity Boost This allows you to increase or decrease the velocity loudness of each voice to make the voice stand out more or less in the harmony Default 0 For the Shearing Harmony we set the Melody to a boost of 10 and the vibes and guitar to a negative boost of 5 and 20 This makes the piano stand out and the vibes and guitar quieter Patches Chan A Acoustic Plane x The Patches setting at the bottom allows you to assign a patch to the harmony If you set No Patch change the harmony won t change the patch This is a useful setting for making a generic harmony that doesn t change the patch of the Melody or Thru channel for example For the Shearing Quintet harmony we will set the patches as follows Channel A Piano Channel B Vibes Channel C Guitar hen we have made changes to the harmony we will hear these changes on the harmony channel Important note You need to press the UPDATE button after you ve made any changes for the changes to take effect You make Copy a Harmony to the ClipBoard and then move to a new harmony and PASTE the harmony to the new location For example if you want to make a harmony similar to the Shearing Quintet harmony choose Copy move to a
19. Most synths e g Roland Korg and Kawai use the Controller O for the bank This is the MSB Most Significant Byte method Check this option if you are using one of these synths Some synths use Controller 32 for the bank e g Peavey This is the LSB Least Significant Byte method If you have one of these synths then uncheck the Use MSB for Bank Roland There is also a patch change sent immediately after the bank change when you do bank changes from the main screen Tip If your synth requires both MSB and LSB bank changes use the button patches on higher banks Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 79 Pause Play till MIDI or Key Allows playback to be started from another keyboard or the computer keyboard The Band in a Box arrangement will be generated then the program will pause until the MIDI or keystroke signal is received Close window when not in BB Closes the Band in a Box window when the Finder or another program is chosen OMS FreeMIDI Playback in background FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band In A Box OS9 booted from Mac Classic Enables OMS or FreeMIDI playback in the background Include Patch Changes in MIDI files This will include the patch instrument changes Include 2 bar lead in in MIDI file If you don t want to create a MIDI file containing the first 2 bars of the 1 2 1 2 3 4 count in you can select this option and the MIDI file will begin directly at bar 1 witho
20. Patch information Send GS Mode On at startup For sound modules that are GS compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GS specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Note Many newer modules keyboards made by Roland and others can take advantage of the extra parameters and features found in the GS mode We recommend using this mode rather than the GM mode if your synth supports it Similarly many newer Yamaha modules keyboards support the XG specification If your synth supports this mode we recommend using it in order to access more parameters and patches than the GM standard provides Some Yamaha XG modules keyboards can also be set to work in GS mode if desired Send XG Mode On at startup For sound modules that are XG compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready to accept XG specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Turn External Keyboard s Local On at end of session Normally while using Band in a Box the local off setting for your MIDI keyboard is best since the THRU part will be coming from Band in a Box and you don t want to hear your MIDI keyboard doubling the notes that are being played However when you exit Band in a Box you might want the local on setting for your synthesizer turned back on This option defaults to true OK to beep with messages Now that computers have better speaker systems a simple
21. Pop l ths Pad Bell autoloads R_POP16S ST From 1 Melodist Maker instrument Pad Bell 7 C Choose Clear Harmony 0 lt no harmony gt Clear Write to Track Style R_POP16S STY Choose Clear Change Instrument None b Edit Fav Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 107 Once you launch the Melodist you will see the Generate Chords and or Melody dialog Let s explore the dialog screen The left of the screen has the list of the Melodists Create C amp M in a style similar to 1 Pop loths Pad Bell 2 Pop loths KennyG Sopr Sax 3 Pop loths LMays w soloist 4 Pop loths Calliope Lead 5 Pop loths Atmosphere 6 Pop loths Pad Bell 7 Pop Loths Voice 8vb 8 Pop loths Phil C 9 POP 16 Always transpose A 10 Pop loths Vibes 11 Swing Vibes 12 S5wing Jazz Trumpet 13 Swing Wes Groove 14 Swing Tenor octave below 15 swing Garner 16 Swing amp ths Sinatra 17 Swing Jazz Quintet In the example above the Swing Tenor is selected This Melodist will generate intro chords melody harmony style and solos using the group of settings preset with this Melodist For example Swing Tenor uses Jazz Easy Style J EASY STY and a Tenor Sax patch and the Melody and Chord settings in the Melody Maker Scroll down the list and pick a Melodist that you d like to use Once you have chosen a Melodist examine the group of settings called Chords and or Melody 108 Chapter 8 Autom
22. Similarly you can see the velocities of the notes displayed as vertical blue lines Note If you can t see these lines press the Opt button to ensure that you have set the Show Bar Beat Lines Show Note Durations and Show Velocity Lines to Yes This mode works like the Editable Notation you mouse click to insert a note and can drag notes horizontally or vertically and edit notes by pressing the Mouse while holding the option key Option key mouse drag of velocity or duration There is an additional function available in this mode Option Mouse Drag Hold down the option key then place the mouse cursor on the note head and drag it horizontally to the right to set the note s duration Use the same procedure to set velocity but drag the mouse vertically from the note head Notation Window Settings Dialog Box Notation Window Settings Resolution Tick Offset 12 Transpose 0 Clefs Split at FO Chord Vert Pos 5 Mi Minimize Rests W Show Key Signature Ww Engraver Spacing wi Show Bar Beat Lines Inserted Note Defaults Show Note Durations vi Snap to Grid Lines W Show Velocity Lines Duration 80 Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics Velocity 90 Scroll Ahead by Channel 1 Kil Play Inserted Notes Cancel Resolution Setting Band in a Box automatically sets the resolution whenever a Style is loaded Ifa style has a triplet feel such as Jazz Swin
23. button unless you want to save alternate MEL files and go beyond 256 Melodists 180 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions The Guitarist Maker eet The Edit button in the Guitarist Edit Guitarist Maker Selection window launches the Guitarist Editor where you ll see the options for making or editing Guitarists Guitarist Editor Num 2 jazz Guitar single position Title Jazz Guitar single position Memo Jazz Guitar plays within the position Guitar Patch hat nes ee Best Chords Frets to Move Force open position On new chord 50 ticks T30 1 Best Chords if nothing else Beat 1 iso ticks Good chords Beat 2 150 ticks Advanced Chords Beat 3 110 ticks Unusual Chords Beat 4 iso ticks Barre chords Passing Note 50 ticks Lenny B Chds Time threshold to get a chord ms CloseVoice Time to previous note Open Strings Time to the next note a0 OK to use chords with this notes Strumming 2 notes 100 4notes 100 Speed of strummed chords 0 ms 3 notes 100 5 notes 100 Delay start time of strum 0 Fi 6 notes 100 Plucked Strummed Embellish Chords Embellish how often 100 Embellish types fths 3ths lazz T Copy Import Paste J Export Save As j Cancel The Guitarist is selected from the Num field You can title the Guitarist using the Title field The Memo field allows a 100 character memo about the Guitarist Th
24. eight 3 Types of Subs to include All Show subs with _ Show substitutions only if Melody is Compatible W More Chords MW jazz substitutions Recompile vi Less Chords vi Pop Country Update vi Chords Each Beat Do Substitutions now 3 Close Cancel Defaults There are a number of substitutions that have been identified For example the first substitution replaces the two bars of F7 with a Cm7 F7 progression The program has also looked at the melody of this song which contains an a note and commented in the Memo that this a melody note is not compatible with the Cm7 so doesn t advise this substitution Choose one of the substitutions that you would like and press the Do Substitutions now button or double click on the substitution This will enter the substitution to the chordsheet and the dialog will show substitutions for that new progression Press Close if you are happy with the substitution or Restore to restore undo the substitution Press All to undo all of the substitutions that you have made 204 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards Chord Builder The Chord Builder is launched with the menu item User Chord Builder or with the keystrokes Ctrl Shift H Chords are previewed as they are built Chord Builder Types of Voicings Open Voicing hd 6 J69 v Enter chord when clicked Om9 Q mMaj7 Atbar 1 Beat 1 Bass Note Slash Root C O13 7b9 Clear Chord lt gt
25. you will hear the melody that you re overdubbing Click on the Filter button to open the Record Filter dialog This lets you choose which MIDI information you want to record and which you want to leave out This lets you eliminate unnecessary MIDI information Record Filter Record MIDI on THRU part of types wi Notes A Polyphonic Pressure Mi Sustain Pedal Controller 64 Bank Changes Controllers 0 and 32 Other Controllers _ Program Changes Channel Aftertouch ra Pitch Bend Defaults Click OK to return to the Record Track dialog and press the Record button or the letter r again to begin recording Tip If you re sure that the settings are correct just press r twice and you won t have to see the Record Track dialog When the recording is finished you have several options 110 Melody Notes recorded Options Copy 1st Chorus to Whole Song Overdub Underlying Notes _ Retain Past Last Recorded F j Take Again Cancel 126 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks OK Keep Take will save the take that was just recorded Copy Ist Chorus to Whole Song If you have recorded one chorus of the song checking this at the end of the recording will copy the same recording to all of the choruses Overdub Underlying Notes You have the option to merge the recording with existing melody If there is no underlying melody this option will be grayed out Retain Past
26. Bar W Erase Chords Num Bars to Erase Mi Erase Melody Chorus Kil Erase Soloist OK Cancel E C Lancer j As you can see you can erase a number of bars of chords and or melody and or soloist If you re erasing the melody and or soloist you need to specify which chorus you re erasing Support for Non Standard Chord display types 62 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide In addition to the Standard Notation window you can also enter or display chords in Roman Numeral Notation Nashville notation or Solfeggio Notation For example the chord Gm7 in the key of F would be displayed as II in Roman Numeral Notation 2 in Nashville Notation and Re in Solfeggio These systems are very useful for learning or analyzing tunes because they are independent of the key signature You can take an existing song and print it out in Roman Numeral Notation so you can study the chord progression You can also just type a chord in any of these systems like 4 which will enter the 4 chord in the current key and switch between systems without having to retype the chords To change to one of the non standard chord displays select the Preferences option from the Edit menu or press Option P Click on the Chord Display Type box and choose from the list of four options 1 Normal 2 Roman Numeral 3 Nashville Notation 4 Solfeggio Notation The Roman numeral and other non standard displays use superscript for the cho
27. Cancel none O7Sus Other Enter Chord CMaj Close Play You can now click on the root of the chord in the root group the extension Maj7 etc and also an alternate slash note root For example to make the chord F9 A you would click on the F root the 9 extension and the Slash Root of A As you click on them you ll hear the bass note played on the Bass part and the extension played on the Piano track If you are happy with the sound of the chord you can press the Enter Chord button That enters the chord at the bar and beat specified Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 205 Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X Tutorial Selecting a MIDI Driver Band in a Box for OS X offers two MIDI Output options QuickTime Music Instruments and CoreMIDI MIDI Settings CoreMIDI Audio MIDI Setup CoreMIDI choose ports Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime lt D Pa SE EEE MIDI Drivers Band In A Box has detected the following MIDI Drivers Please choose which you would prefer to use QuickTime Music Instruments built in Mac sounds fe MacOS X CoreMIDI f E Cancel QuickTime Music does not require a Mac MIDI Interface or external synthesizer The OS X version of QT Music has better fidelity and lower latency than the old Mac Classic QuickTime Music Synthesizer This QuickTime Music option is the simplest w
28. Hymn MGL Beautiful Dreamer MGH Beautiful River MG2 Blue Caberet MG9 Blue Hill Demo SGU Blues Even Demo Song SG7 Blues Even Demo SGU Blues Shuffle 2 Demo SCU Blues Shuffle Demo SG6 Blues Shuffle Demo SGU BLUHILL STYLE Demo SGU Bob Ballad Demo SGU Bossa Demo 1 SGU Bossa Demo 2 SGU Bossa Demo 3 SGU Macintosh HD Band in a Box OS X Folder Songs Find F Find Again G IFREDDIE STY 0 1 Joplin Style STY 2 Rhumba Style STY 3 Country 12 8 Style STY 4 Rock Ballad Style STY 5 New Age 1 Style STY 6 Lite Rock 2 Style STY ZZPOPBAL STY AFRICAN STY ZZJAZWAL STY ARPEGGIO STY ZZJAZZ STY ZZPOPBAL STY ZZJAZZ STY ZZIRISH STY ZZJAZWAL STY ZZCOUN12 STY ZZPOPBAL STY BLUHILL STY ZZBLUSTR STY ZZBLUSTR STY BLUSHF_2 STY ZZBLUSHF STY ZZBLUSHF STY BLUHILL STY BOBALLAD STY Z3BOSSA STY Z4BOSSA STY ZSBOSSA STY 25 The first time that you select the Song button Band in a Box automatically writes the song list From then on the song list opens when the Song button is selected Check Play when selected to automatically play the song selected For even more fun play along with the band Once you have selected a song youll see the chords in the chordsheet so it s easy to read and play along BDA mais in a Box distin MEU 3 28 a I Oa A O 2 A p of Replay JU Hold From J Rec Yi Lyrics Notation C IWC sty eei Selo Copy Print TE HL i f Song Violet Song E Me
29. In Jazz styles and other triplet feels the chord will be pushed by a triplet regardless if there is a single or double caret Chord Options Dialog Box There is an alternative to the various keystrokes to put in rests and pushes You can use the Chord Options dialog box instead To get to the dialog box select Chord Settings from the Edit menu or press Option Z 60 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Chord Settings Onl O O3 O4 Preview Builder Ab o Cpdae Chord Subs Pushes Rests No Push Rest Type Push by 1 16 _ Push by 1 8 hy F This allows you to select the various Breaks Rests Shots and Held Chords by clicking on the various settings You can change to different beats in the bar typing in new chords on the different beats Copying and Pasting a Section of Chords Copying a section of chords is done in a manner similar to copying text in a word processor Highlight the area you would like to affect and select the desired action s from the EDIT menu See below for additional details Copying chords to the clipboard Select the region to copy Place the mouse cursor at the bar to begin the selection Then holding down the mouse button drag the mouse over the region As you do this yov ll see that the region will be highlighted white on black When you have selected highlighted the proper region of chords to copy you can copy the selected region to the cl
30. Intro dialog where you can specify the characteristics of the intro you wish to generate Clear Lead sheet blanks the chordsheet and restores the default song settings Insert Measure s inserts a certain of bars into the chordsheet Delete Measure s removes a certain of bars from the chordsheet Shrink cuts chord durations by 50 e g 4beats gt gt 2beats 2beats gt gt 1 beat Expand doubles the durations of chords e g beat gt gt 2beats 2beats gt gt 4beats Unfold convert to 1 BIG chorus Choose this command to unfold a multi chorus song into one BIG chorus When selected Band in a Box will display all choruses and verses of a song without loops or repeats It is useful for instance when you have a song with 3 choruses and want to convert it to a single large chorus or to customize a song with the Edit Bar Settings feature to change meter tempo patches styles and or harmonies and generate a MIDI file for export Set Time Sig Of Scrap allows a new time signature to be selected for highlighted bars on the chordsheet Blank Lyrics removes the lyrics from a song Preferences This dialog box allows you to set various settings These are all saved in the Band in a Box folder in a file named INTRFACE BBW Chapter 14 Reference 217 Preferences Boost Vel of Pushes by 0 MI OK to Load Harmony w songs 218 vi Show Chords w RER aa wi Change Harmony w new chords p g Y vi
31. Last Recorded You have the option to keep or erase any melody after the last recorded note Step Edit Notes You can step edit a recorded track or create a new track in the Edit Note Time Etc dialog Select Step edit Notes from the MEL menu Edit Note Time Etc Bar Tick Duration Previous Event Delete Event fel Next Event es Insert Before Insert After This feature is very useful if you have recorded a good take with just a minor glitch Rather than lose the whole take you can use the step edit feature to fix the track and save the take Note Number The note is played out through the MIDI driver so you can hear it The note is also drawn on the Keyboard at the top of the screen so you can see it Input the MIDI Note Number There are 128 MIDI notes Every C note is a multiple of 12 which makes middle C called C5 for the 5m octave note number 60 For example C5 60 C 5 61 D5 62 etc In the example above therefore the note 64 would be 4 semitones above middle C an E Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 127 Velocity Type in a velocity to control the volume that the note is played at Change the velocity to zero to stop a note from being played Note that you can globally change the volume of a melody track from the melody pull down menu Time Represents the total time in ticks for the current event from the beginning
32. MAKER Edit Existing User Style Current Style JAZQUINT STY Style Information v OK to Load Styles w songs Mute Melody during middle choruses Kill Melody in Middle choruses Force song to choruses Auto Generate Song Title Jazz Up the Chords azz Down the Chords Chord Substitution Dialog Choose Your Own Auto Generate Chord Substitutions Chord Builder lt H Play Current Chord te Load Style From Disk Go to the file dialog and open a style from the Styles folder Load Favorite Styles Opens the favorites list of the most recent styles selections Save Style As Save a new style or and edited style or rename an existing style Make A New Style STYLE MAKER Launches the StyleMaker with a blank new style Edit Existing User Style Launches the StyleMaker with the current style selection loaded This allows you to edit an existing style STY from disk The resulting style can then be saved with the same name or a different name Chapter 14 Reference 23T Current Style This shows the file name of the current style in use Style Information Shows a summary of information about the current style OK to Load Styles w songs Normally this is checked so that songs load with the associated style But let s say we ve discovered a new style and want to try it out on many different songs In that case we would ensure that this item is NOT checked Then when a song is loaded i
33. MIDI Mode ON sets the external module to General MIDI mode This command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GM specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Send GS mode On Message Roland Send XG Mode On Yamaha Since the inception of the GM General MIDI standard there have been two major subsets extensions of this standard GS Roland and XG Yamaha Therefore in addition to the GM Mode on menu item feature there are additional commands to send a GS mode ON or a XG mode ON message at any time by accessing the GS menu Master Volume type allows you to set whether to use Roland GS Sysex Messages or Yamaha General MIDI messages for Master Volume controls Unless you have a Roland Sound Canvas synth or the Roland VSC you should select the Yamaha type Auto Send GM mode at start sends a General MIDI mode on message when the program boots up Auto Send GS mode at start sends a Roland GS system on message when the Band in a Box program boots up Auto Send XG mode at start sends a Yamaha XG system on message when the Band in a Box program boots up Use MIDI messages instead of GS XG Sysex should be set by all users except if you have a Roland GS synth i e Roland Sound Canvas or Roland VSC If set the Combo settings will allow Master Volume etc to work 250 Chapter 14 Reference Har Menu Melody Harmony 0 lt no harmo Thru Harmony 0 lt no harmony Favorite
34. MIDI file to save it first 96 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing You will notice the grid of vertical lines that indicates where the notes will be placed This song is in Jazz Swing so Band in a Box has automatically set the grid resolution to swing triplets 3 grid lines per beat This resolution can be changed in the Notation Window Settings dialog but Band in a Box should set it to the correct value based upon the style that is currently in use For example when a style is a Bossa Nova the division will be sixteenth notes since Bossa Nova is an even rhythm not a triplet feel rhythm To insert a new note Move the mouse to the location that you want If you want Beat 1 move to the first dotted line in the bar Click on the staff over the note that you want The Current Note box in the toolbar will give you the name of the note that you re on Click with the mouse button to insert the note To insert a SHARP hold down the SHIFT key as you click the note To insert a FLAT hold down the CONTROL key as you click the note To insert a NATURAL hold down the key as you click the note How long does the note last that I insert Band in a Box uses an intelligent auto duration feature to determine how long the note should be A note that is put in will initially have a duration of 2 bars 2 whole notes When the next note is put in say 2 beats later Band in a Box will shorten the duration of the previous note to just shorter t
35. Melody track you ll have to set the Melody channel to 10 using the M MIDI Settings menu item Chapter 10 Built in Drums 139 Drum Display All the General MIDI percussion instruments are shown Acoustic Bass Drum Acoustic Snare Low Floor Tom Pedal Hi Hat Low Mid Tom High Tom Ride Bell Cowbell Ride Cymbal Mute Hi Conga High Timbale Low Agogo Short Whistle Long Guiro Low Wood Block Mute Triangle Bass Drum 1 Hand Clap Closed Hi Hat Low Tom Hi Mid Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Tambourine Crash Cymbal 2 Hi Bongo Open Hi Conga Low Timbale Cabasa Long Whistle Claves Mute Cuica Open Triangle Side Stick Electric Snare High Floor Tom Open Hi Hat Crash Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vibraslap Low Bongo Low Conga High Agogo Maracas Short Guiro Hi Wood Block Open Cuica Some percussion instruments are triggered by multiple MIDI notes When controlled by more than one MIDI note a percussion instrument will show different behavior in response to the different notes For instance the Hi Hat responds differently to Close Hat Pedal Hat and Open Hat MIDI notes The on screen instruments may be played by mouse click or computer keys When playing by mouse click or computer keys the shift key adjusts velocity between two user specified levels Drums that you play show up in blue the computer played drums are red There is an option to display all the QWERTY names on the drums at the same time so that
36. Options If MIDI Thru is selected Default On the Guitar will display the music played on a MIDI keyboard If Current Track is selected Default On the current track will be displayed M Multi Channel Mode Base Channel 11 The guitar will display information on channels 11 to 16 on strings 1 to 6 if Multi Channel Mode is set to on default Channel 11 is referred to as the base channel Default 11 You can edit notes on the Notation to set the channels of the notes Guitar controllers will also record information in this manner so you can record on a MIDI guitar and see the display on the guitar fretboard The base channel is normally 11 but you can set it to any channel e g if set for channel 5 this would mean that channels 5 to 10 would be the guitar channels 196 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards Fretboard Color fe Brown The Fretboard color can be brown or black Default brown If you elect to not display note names you can select Use Inlays and a Guitar inlay will be displayed along the neck The inlays will only display if note names are not being displayed Send Notes to Editable Notation Window If Send Notes to Notation Window Default On is set when you click on the Guitar notes and the notation window is open in editable notation mode or note roll mode the note will be inserted at the current time line on the notation window Fretboard Octave Auto Set Octave You can set the
37. QWERTY keys In the Song menu toggle Wizard Uses Smart Notes Off unchecked to have the Wizard provide you access to a chromatic scale and toggle on to have Band in a Box provide you with notes based on the chord key of the song Soloist Wizard Additionally you will find another great Wizard feature in the Soloist menu the Solo Wizard Toggling this option on enables the Soloist Wizard As you play notes on the MIDI or QWERTY keyboard the program will play correct notes in the style of the current Soloist This means that you can play a perfect solo every time simply by pressing any key on your MIDI keyboard or QWERTY keys Beyond impressing your friends with your newfound improvisational prowess this feature has practical implications as well For example you can concentrate on practicing your solo phrasing and playing in time without concerning yourself with which notes to play Band in a Box will supply the correct notes see the next section for details Recording Using the Wizard To record the Wizard press the Rec button to record and play the Wizard This will be recorded You can use the feature of recording the Wizard to enter 44 Chapter 5 The Main Screen music without a MIDI keyboard that doesn t sound as stiff as most music entered in step time This is how it works Press Rec to record As the song plays play the melody that you want on any Wizard key using the s
38. S Menu v Jazz Swing Country Triplet Feel Country Sixteenth Feel Bossa Nova Ethnic Blues Shuffle Blues Even Waltz Pop Ballad Shuffle Rock Light Rock Medium Rock Heavy Rock Miami Sound Latin Milly Pop Funk Jazz Waltz Rhumba Cha Cha Bouncy 12 8 Irish Pop Ballad 12 8 Country 12 8 Old Reggae Use this list for a quick pick from the list of 24 original Band in a Box styles You either can pick a musical style before or after you have entered the chords to a song Once you load a style the song will be played back using your chosen style All style files have a STY extension Besides these built in styles there are many more styles available for use with the Band in a Box Here are other ways to access styles Pressing the STY button will bring up the StylePicker window with information on all the styles found in your Band in a Box folder The f button brings up the Favorite Styles dialog where the 150 most recently used styles are listed 230 Chapter 14 Reference MIDI Menu MIDI Settings CoreMID Audio MIDI Setup CoreMIDI choose ports Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime Make General MIDI Patch Map Set Favorite Patches Combos Edit Drum Kit Note values Save MIDI Setup Drum Kit Load MIDI Setup Drum Kit Send Sys Ex File Style Aliases Choose Patch from Higher Bank Insert current MIDI chord Output chords to external device Thru Transpose Set
39. Show Note Name Lo Velocity no shift key gg vi Show MIDI Note Number Randomize Range 20 M Show Computer Key _ Display Querty Chars On Drums Show Show All Instruments Cancel Y Show Used Instruments Note If your computer video is in 256 color mode the colors in the Drums window may sometimes appear strange To display the drum window at its best use Thousands of colors 16 bit or millions of colors 24 bit video modes Velocity When playing drums with a mouse or computer keys the shift key toggles between two levels of note velocity The default velocity is 90 with a default shift key velocity of 127 The two velocity levels can be set any way desired For instance if you want the shift key to send quiet notes program the shift velocity lower than the non shift velocity Randomize Enables the Randomize checkbox to send random velocity levels when playing by mouse or computer keyboard Range Control the amount of velocity randomization Usually a small range works best around 10 to 30 If velocity is set to 127 and the random range is set to 20 notes would randomly vary between a maximum velocity of 127 and a minimum velocity of 102 Instrument Hints Customize appearance of the Hint line with Note Name MIDI Note Number and Computer Key Show Show All Instruments shows all instruments in the drum window Show Used Instruments displays the basic trap kit but does not display
40. Show Rests in color Har Volume Adjust 0 W Allow any Rests wi OK to Load Style w songs W Allow any Pushes Fal Use MSB for Bank Roland W Allow Style Pushes Pause Play till MIDI or key Chord Display Type _ Close window when not in BB OMS FreeMIDI Playback in background Mi Allow Lead In Bars rd Play Lead In even if Intro present Mi Include Patch Changes in MIDI files Lead in Type W Include 2 bar lead in in MIDI file M Audible Lead In Volume 64 Mi include Controllers Reverb Chorus pan Instrument Include Forced Channel Meta Event Side stick 3 7 Default _ Write Chords Part Markers META event a Pattern Include Guitar Position Controller 1 3 1234 Y Write Soloist part on channel 5 a a Smart Lead In M Write Harmony to MIDI file C Lead in Drum count if drums muted M MIDI file Harmony sep tracks C Metronome During Recording Write Guitar part on 6 channels i Allow Any Endings Limit Screen size to Unlimited Y Eo _ Cancel Preferences dialog Boost Vel of Pushes by The pushes in Band in a Box are the chords that get played before the beat Typically pushes are played a little louder than other patterns You can leave this setting at 0 or set it to between O and 10 Show Chords with push rest chars The push character is the caret symbol So aC chord with a push is displayed as NC The rest character is a period so C shows a C chord with a rest
41. Solo for how many bars 3 OK to solo for an extra beat Overwrite existing solo in range Tip You can have these values preset to the values you d like by first selecting the range of bars that you d like from the Chordsheet screen and then clicking on the Soloist button Usually soloists end a little after a bar end i e they play a couple of extra notes Setting the OK to solo for an extra beat will allow this If you want to overdub a solo and have multiple solo tracks going at once de select Overwrite existing solo in range Once you press the Generate Solo Now button the portion of the solo that you have selected will be generated The song will then start playing two bars before the new part so you can quickly hear the new solo Remember that the custom solo generation can be used with different soloists so you can use a Tenor Sax Jazz soloist for a few bars and then insert a custom Bluegrass Banjo soloist for four bars and so on Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 119 Soloing over Slash Chords The Soloist analyzes slash chords like C Bb to determine the best scale type to use e g Bb Lydian There s nothing you need to do this function happens automatically behind the scenes Fours Soloing Band in a Box can generate the first four or the second four bars Trading fours refers to a solo lasting four bars usually followed by a different melodic solo or drum solo for the
42. Standard MIDI Files You can save a Standard MIDI File to disk as a file with a prefix SMF or to the Macintosh clipboard The STY button allows you to choose from styles in any folder that contains Band in a Box style files Press the Melodist button or use the keystrokes Shift F5 to launch the Melodist The Solo button launches the Select Soloist dialog box allowing you to choose a Soloist for your song The Copy button allows you to copy particular bars and or melody to another area in the song The Print button launches the Print Options dialog box on the Notation window to print Lead Sheets CF d Song y User Rhumba Demo d Mema y CF d Style j 2 Rhumba Style STY F t 135 1 32 3 46 Chapter 5 The Main Screen In the Title window you can create a Song Title change the Style of the song change the Key Signature the song is using define the Tempo of the song define where the Chorus begins and ends and how many Choruses the song has To change these settings click on the setting you wish to change Favorite songs button l Song JUser Rhumba Demo i ai Style 2 Rhumba Style STY button gt aac ic The favorite songs button F activates a list of your most recently played 150 songs This allows you to quickly load songs that have been used in your last sessions with Band in a Box You will find this to be the best way to load songs into Band in a Box since the list generated will give
43. This Bar Most songs will have a single tempo throughout but if you want to change the tempo at a certain bar of the song then use this dialog box to type in the new tempo in beats per minute Or type in a relative tempo change in a range of 90 to 100 A setting of 50 halves the tempo a setting of 100 doubles it Tempo can also be set by clicking on the metronome button Clicking on this button 4 times will set the tempo to your tapped in value The tempo change takes effect at the beginning of the bar and remains until a new tempo change at another bar is inserted Patch Changes at any Bar This setting allows you to insert a patch change at the beginning of any bar Type the number of the patch change in the appropriate box i e Bass Soloist etc that you want to affect Note To save a song with patch changes at the beginning of the song you should use the Edit Save Song with Patches dialog instead of this one Harmony Change At Any Bar Beat You can insert harmony changes into the song at any bar and beat For example start the song with no harmony then have SuperSax come in on the bridge then Shearing on the next chorus etc This is also effective when used with the Soloist on the Thru part With this setting you can have multiple types of horn section solos i e Brass Sax etc or harmonized distortion guitar effects for guitar solos Chord Preview Builder You can instantly hear ho
44. a style to have pushes you can uncheck this box Chord Display Type This box allows for non standard display of chords on the chordsheet area The options here allow for Normal Standard Notation Roman Numeral Notation Nashville Notation and Solfeggio Notation Allow Lead In Bars People who use Band in a Box for soloing practice will likely turn the lead in off to allow endless looping uninterrupted by the lead in count Play Lead In even if Intro present If a song has an intro it s usually not necessary to play the 2 bar lead in count There s a new option to always omit the lead in if an intro is present If you would like the lead in bars to be played even if an intro is present in the song set this feature to On Play Lead In even if Intro present Audible Lead In Volume Use these settings for the audible drum count in You can select any drum instrument for the count in You can choose different count in rhythms e g Tap on 2 and 4 instead of 1 2 3 4 Instrument Side Stick 37 Pattern l 3 1254 7 Smart Lead In Smart Lead ins can also be set here A smart lead in avoids playing the count in drum sound during a Melody pickup Metronome During Recording Select this to hear the metronome while recording 78 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Allow Any Endings Song endings can be turned off for all songs or on a song by song basis To turn song endings off for all songs uncheck the
45. all of a MIDI file or selected channels and a specific range of bars Use one of the following two commands 1 MEL Import Melody from MIDI File to select a MIDI file from disk using the file dialog 2 MEL Import Melody from Clipboard when the MIDI data is already copied from another program to the clipboard Once chosen the Import MIDI File dialog box opens Import MIDI File Import which Channels MMMM MMMM MMMM MMM ew l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 All None bars to offset from start How Many bars to import blank b to insert at beginning 0 Include notes early by 120ppq is I Include continuous controllers and pitch bend Mi include Patch changes Cancel C Merge with existing data on Track Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 129 Import Which Channel s You ll need to know which channel s of your MIDI file the melody is on You then select these channels for Band in a Box to read in If you select all of the channels Band in a Box will read all of the channels and merge them to the Melody track You can import and play the complete file on the Melody track if the Track Type is set to Multi 16 Channel in the MEL menu If you have such a MIDI guitar part that was recorded with separate pitch bend information on 6 channels you can import the 6 channels into Band in a Box Set the Melody track to be a guitar track WEL Track Type and then use the Guitar Settings dialog in the Gui
46. an intro to your song Go to Edit Intro Bars Auto Generate or press Ctrl Shift B to access the Generate Chords for Intro dialog Generate Chords for Intro or Remove Intro This will create a chord progression that Chord Types YP Jazz gets inserted as an intro to the song Intro Length bars 4 Bars Medium Tempos Y Press the Re Generate button to auto Starting chord after intro is Ab generate chords for an intro Pedal Bass lt No Fedal Eass gt in the key of Remove Intro Mi Use Maj instead of Maj Re Generate Intro Chords Selecting Bars To Begin And End The Chorus Old Folks at Home GARNER STY Ab t 185 1 32 3 Chorus Chorus Of Begins Ends Choruses 1 Bar number for Chorus to begin Click on the chorus begin number in the Title window or select the Chorus begins at option on the Song menu or press b The message Click on a Bar will start to blink in the toolbar Mouse click on the bar number to begin the chorus The bar number that you select will then be displayed 32 Bar number for Chorus to end Click on the chorus end number in the Title window or select the Chorus ends at option on the Song menu or press e The message Click on a Bar will start to blink in the toolbar Mouse click on the bar number to end the chorus The bar number that you select will then be displayed 3A Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 3 Number of choruses to play Cl
47. any other MAC programs then you ll need to select a printer in the Chooser This launches a dialog box that lets you set options for printing These are described elsewhere Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 93 Current Note This box displays the name of the note that the mouse is currently over This is helpful to know what note will be inserted when you click to insert a note Note or Rest Checkbox These determine whether a Note or a Rest will Note t RE St be inserted when a mouse is clicked Mono Mode When this checkbox is selected the notation is entered as monophonic one note only This is useful for melodies that only have one note playing at a time Mono mode is a faster way to enter notes because the Notation Window will automatically delete a note that is present at the same location that you are putting a new note on So if you have mistakenly put a B note on as a C you just click on the B note and if in mono mode the C will be deleted automatically Clean Notation When music has been played in from a MIDI keyboard there Ei Clean are frequently effects like grace notes glitches and notes played off time The Clean Notation mode is an intelligent feature that Cleans Up The Notation for you It does this by eliminating the display of grace notes and glitches and also simplifies the Notation display so it is more readable Clean Notation doesn t affect the actual content of the track just how it is d
48. any song This feature will show the chords that are playing on the virtual guitar fretboard in your choice of a Jazz Pop or Folk perspective The Guitar Tutor is a fun way to learn about new guitar chords while playing along with your favorite Band in a Box tune The Guitar Tutor is most useful on styles that aren t guitar styles This would apply to styles that don t have an exclamation point in the file name This is because the guitar styles already have a guitar part that you can learn from on the Guitar part Using the Guitar Tutor you can see and optionally hear guitar chords played on the guitar fretboard This teaches you how to play the chords on guitar 198 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards isplayed is Guitar Guit To turn the Guitar Tutor on launch eee Ss eee the Guitar window and press the Tutor button Guitar Tutor Mi Enable Chord Tutor Display on fretboard Ei Play chords through MIDI Guitar Patch Type of chords to display When Guitar Chord Tutor is enabled guitar chords will display on fretboard and optionally will be heard through MIDI on the THRU part M Show muted high note of 3 note comping Copy to Melody Track Copy to Soloist Track Cancel Enable the Chord Tutor display by setting that checkbox This will silently display the chords on the guitar fretboard If you would also like to hear the notes select the Play chords through MIDI
49. balloon help and then you ll see balloon help for main screen items menu items and more Balloon Help is present only in Band In A Box OS9 Band In A Box OS X version uses the new Help Tags which give equivalent but better functionality Overall description of program An introduction to Band in a Box and its operation Version new features The new features in this version Setting up MIDI Drums and Synth Additional instructions for special setups Entering and Saving songs A quick guide to making music with Band in a Box Playing Songs The different ways to plays songs in Band in a Box Chord List Often there is more than one way to name a chord This list of Valid Chords gives the chord names recognized by Band in a Box Keyboard Commands Once learned keyboard commands are often the quickest and easiest way to operate the program This is a comprehensive reference list Miscellaneous Tips Check here for the latest tips at the time of this release Tech Support Contact information for PG Music s Technical Support Panic All Notes Off This sends a sweep of all MIDI notes Off select this if you have notes that are stuck On Visit web site www pgmusic com 236 Chapter 14 Reference Launches your Internet browser and loads the PG Music Inc home page User Menu Load Style From Disk Load Favorite Styles Save Style As Make A New Style STYLE
50. bd C Change Prototype Style 7 l Selected Style Defaults to Current Style OK v Prototype Style Defaults to Current Style Soloist patch Cancel Category List Use the Category list on the left to select a style category Jazz Pop etc or a style set Click on the list to choose Style List Once chosen you ll see the list of styles available in that category or style set You ll see the name of the style and the file name for the style Memo and Examples Click on a style to see a memo for the song a list of songs that could be played using that style and the suggested tempo range Double click on the style name to exit the dialog and load the style Re Build ra k Search 3 Frame the song 36 If you have added new styles to Band in a Box then you can re build this list This allows you to print the styles list It copies the list to the clipboard Then you open up your favorite word processor like Word for Mac or BB Edit Inside your word processor select File Print and print the list The Search button helps you find data in any of the fields Here we have selected bar one to be the first bar of the chorus and bar 32 to be the last The chorus will repeat three times before proceeding to the two bar ending Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Set the Tempo Let s set the tempo to 160 beats per minute The tempo is displayed in the song title windo
51. be a number in place of the indicating the weight of the pattern The 4 rows are for the different types of patterns a substyle b substyle Fills and 2 bar Endings Drum Pattern Entry Drum Pattern Entry screen is where the Drum patterns are made To enter the Drum Editor With the highlight bar on a pattern on the drum area of the StyleMaker screen press the REC button to record the pattern in Step Time OFEN SHAKER f CLOSER SHAKER 103 ol Yl TT HAND CLAPS 67 65 84 Vis TAMBOURINE i od TIMBALE 65 65 6 65 You ll now be in the Drum Pattern Entry screen There are 16 rows across indicating 4 beats with 4 divisions per beat Changing Timebase of Drum Pattern Change the timebase to 12 by clicking the mouse on the Timebase button This allows for drum patterns in 3 4 time The program will ignore the 4th column of each beat Timebase 12 will then be displayed in the timebase button Moving around the Drum Editor Screen Move around the screen with cursor keys or mouse click The black flashing highlight bar indicates where you are The different drum instruments are named along the left side and the 4 beats are displayed along the top Tempo Changes t I Tempo changes are done using the TEMPO button or press the and keys from the main Stylemaker screen Entering notes onto the drum editor screen Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 153 A typical patt
52. beep when an incorrect key is pressed can seem loud enough to wake your neighbors Setting the silent beep option allows Band in a Box to visually flash the window title bar to get your attention instead of generating an audible beep OK to prompt to reduce expand If a style is changed with a different feel 16th notes instead of 8th notes Band in a Box will automatically offer to expand or reduce the duration of the chords and change the tempo to accommodate the new style This also works as the song is playing Lowest Bass Note E2 default Styles will normally play bass notes down to the low E if the pattern won t go below a low E This happens with all styles automatically but there is also an option to set the lowest bass note real low so you can get a low C if you want to My soundcard or MIDI doesn t have brushes remap them 82 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Most GM modules have brushes available on patch 41 on the drums On some you need to load a GS sound font for this to occur On the Yamaha XG you likely need to send a GS mode on message from the GM menu in Band in a Box But if your module just doesn t have brushes available then you can set this option and the style will remap the notes to different drum instruments that don t have brushes For Roman Numerals in minor keys use relative major Option for minor keys base roman numerals on the relative major For example in k
53. below the Memo button Audio Memo When a song has a Video memo a Video Memo Memo a button appears on screen below the Memo button Video Memo Technical notes To add an audio memo to a song called My Song MGU put the memo as a MP3 in the same folder as the song naming it My Song_AudioMemo MP3 To add a video memo to a song called My Song MGU put the memo as a MOV in the same folder as the song naming it My Song_VideoMemo_3 MP3 Soloist Note Density option Now you can control the maximum number of notes per quarter note that the soloist will use For example you can set a Rock Guitar Soloist to use nothing shorter than 16th notes This will produce fewer guitar hero solos with bursts of 32nd notes etc Or you could create a jazz solo that uses only quarter notes or longer to help with your sight reading or student study We ve already modified many of the soloists using this new setting so your solos will already sound better without you having to change this setting 20 Chapter 3 Summary of New Features For example Soloist 188 is edited so that it will play at most 5 notes per beat Dedicated menu items added on GM Menu Turn Local OFF external MIDI keyboard Turn Local ON external MIDI keyboard v When program quits turn Local ON Dedicated menu items added on GM Menu for Turn Local On Turn Local Off and When program qui
54. drum fills or patterns play for the 2 bars Lead in Type Count in rd Audible Lead In b substyle fills a substyle fills Instrum b pattern then fill _ Side stick 37 0 a pattern then fill Patter 72 bars b pattern bars a pattern To set this choose Prefs Countin and set Lead in Type to one of b substyle fills a substyle fills or fill pattern or pattern pattern combinations Harmony Low Root Feature The Harmony Edit dialog now has settings for low root harmony which adds a voice that plays the root of the chord This is useful for a cappella or baritone sax harmonies where the lowest voice is playing the bass roots You can set the low high range The root played will always be at least one octave from the melody note assuming it can still be inside the set low high range We include many harmonies that are preset to use this low root harmony feature They are in the range starting at harmony 153 vi LowRoot The Harmony Edit dialog now has settings for low root harmony which adds a voice that plays the root of the chord This is useful for a cappella harmonies where the lowest voice is playing the bass roots You can set the low high range The root played will always be at least one octave from the melody note assuming it can still be inside the set low high range You can edit any harmony to add a low root harmony by pressing Edit Harmony on the Harmony select
55. fretboard octave For example if the music is very low and you need to boost the octave to display it on the guitar set the guitar octave to 1 or 2 There is an auto octave setting discussed elsewhere If selected the Guitar Octave will get set automatically rd Use Index Finger Position Use Index Finger position If set the scale will use the index finger to play notes that are one fret outside of the normal position instead of the little finger W Show out of range notes Show out of range notes If set any note will be displayed on the guitar regardless if it is the range of the guitar or not Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 197 iv Show Notes at Aeolian Position Show Notes at Phrygian Position Note Names The note names will get displayed in up to two positions depending on the settings for Show Notes at Aeolian Position and Show Notes at Phrygian Position Default True Guitar Width def 550 TTE Guitar Height def 80 136 P a P a P The Guitar can be sized using the Guitar Width and Guitar Height setting or the preset buttons that set the size The Auto Switch position setting allows the program to automatically switch the display of the guitar when a new track is loaded in This auto chooses the best position to display the track Set to Defaults The Set to Defaults button sets the Guitar window to factory defaults Guitar Tutor Use the new Guitar Tutor to analyze
56. identified as they all begin with MEL The Patch change area of the Melodist Maker screen allows you to select a Patch instrument Harmony and Change Instrument setting each chorus You can also Change Style for the Melodist and specify the feel for the style in the STY is box Patch change Harmony OQ lt noharmony gt Change Instrument Change Style SINATRA STY STY y 4 Clear STY is swing amp th notes i Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 177 Legato Boost Increase lateness by 120 ppg Increase 8th note spacing by 120 ppq Increase velocity by 127 127 The Legato Boost changes the legato length of the notes generated Instruments like Saxophone have longer legato phrasing Lateness refers to how much after the beat the notes are played This is normally left at zero for Melodists note spacing is usually left at zero If set to a non zero value the 8 notes will be farther apart units of 120ppq Increase velocity is used to increase or decrease the volume of the Melodist Unique Themes Unusual Placed Phrases Simple lst 2nd endings Choose Unusual chord Force Long Phrases Mix Minor and Major Chord Progs Chord Substitutions Thruout Form Number of Variations to Choose From Tempo Range 1320 to Transpose A2 section Anticipation in Phrases rd Generate 64 bar form The next section of the Melodist Maker allows you to select options that c
57. in MIDI file 2 Key Tempo 120 TimeSig 4 4 v Import Complete song Presets Defaults Pop w 7ths Jazz Standard Insert to BB starting at bar 1 How many bars to import 32 Rock _Pop no 7th _ Jazz Modern M Auto interpret settings from MIDI file ace le a a Part Options Chord Options A import Chords Chord Resolution Bass part is on channel s 2 Include Slash Chords Some Slash Chords x Chording track is on channel s 3 Bass Part is mainly Walking Bass Fewest Chords OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file Allow Sus chords suspended v Open to Melody Soloist tracks Mi Allow 7th seventh chords e g C7 Import Options Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes import to Melody from channel s 4 M Lowest bass note is delayed v Import to Soloist from channel s 8 Method Jazz Leadsheet sd Write chord summary notes to Soloist Track v Include Continuous controllers and pitch bend Include notes early by 120 PPQ 15 Chord Wizard Dialog When the Chord Wizard dialog opens press the Open Change button to choose the MIDI file that you want Band in a Box to interpret the chords from To help Band in a Box interpret the chords better you can choose a preset for the song Choose from among such genres as Pop Rock or Jazz Standard Loading an existing Band in a Box format song i f Song J Press the song button The first time you use this button Band
58. in a Box will offer to build a song list for you We ve included many demo songs for you to use and they are listed in the song list You could also load a pre existing song by using the File Open song menu item or by pressing the F3 function key which will launch the familiar Macintosh file dialog Note that most songs will automatically load a Style which we ll learn about in the next section Going to the next step Now that you have chords on your chordsheet you are ready to move on to step number two 10 Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial Step 2 Choosing a Style Band in a Box creates backing arrangements based on the chords you type in applied to a particular Style What s a Style A style is a set of rules that determine how Band in a Box creates music using your chords By adjusting the rules we have created hundreds of styles that are appropriate for everything from Country to Bebop Some style examples would be Jazz Swing Blues Shuffle Hip Hop Country 4 4 Pop Ballad Waltz and Medium Rock to name just a few If you don t find a pre made style that suits your tastes create one from scratch using the StyleMaker Making custom styles with the StyleMaker is explained in detail in the full documentation Four Fast ways to Open a Style Method 1 From Disk To open a user style from disk you can just type the F9 key You will be presented with the familiar Macintosh file dialog from which you c
59. is left at zero the strum will end at the original time of the melody note If you set it to 50 delay the strum will be in its midpoint at the original start time of the Melody note and if it s set to 100 the strum won t start until the time of the original note The most musical setting is about 50 delay A delay of 0 also sounds good and has the added advantage that it doesn t shift the actual time of the Melody note relevant if you keep regenerating the solo on the Melody track The Plucked or Strummed button sets these settings to preset values Chord Types to Include You can decide which types of chords should be included in the chord solo Chord Types Best Good Advanced Unusual Barre Open Strings Best chords are the most commonly played chords by pro guitarists Good chords are popular alternate chords Advanced chords are chords that are difficult to play or have advanced voicings Unusual chords are voicings that should be avoided in most cases but have some uses Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 183 Barre chords are chords that require the index finger to be played in a Barre position Include Open Strings can be set to Never Sometimes Favor If set to Never no chords that require and open string will be played If set to Favor it will play open strings whenever possible and sometimes is a middle ground setting Chord types to include Best Chords Best Chords i
60. is playing half notes on the bass Allow Pushes in Middle Choruses Default This is used if you have put pushes into a song but don t want the pushes to play in the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing so you may not want the pushes to play Allow Rests in First Chorus Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but don t want the rests to play in the first chorus Allow Rests in Middle Choruses Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but don t want the rests to play in the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing so you may not want the rests to play Allow Rests in Last Chorus Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but don t want the rests to play in the last chorus Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses Default This determines whether Pedal Bass effect will be allowed in middle choruses Allow Embellishment of Chords Default The Jazz styles include embellishment of chords This means that if you type a C7 chord the piano player may play a C13 or a C7b9 This makes the arrangement sound more authentic Tip If you are hearing flat 9 and flat 13 embellishments on a C7 chord that is clashing with the melody you should rename the chord C9 or C13 which will ensure natural 9 and 13 embellishments To disable the embellishment for a certain song uncheck this option There are very few situations that you wouldn t want i
61. may be entered To enter a chord type its name using standard chord symbols like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13 9 E and press the return key The chord name s you have typed will be entered in the chordsheet at the current location of the highlight cell Each time the return key is pressed the highlight cell advances 2 beats or 2 a measure Note To view a list of Band in a Box chord names please refer to the online Help To start typing in chords Go to the top bar 1 of the chordsheet by clicking on measure 1 Blank the chordsheet by selecting the New option from the File menu or with the keystrokes 4n The highlight cell will be at the start of bar 1 reposition it if desired When you have the highlight cell positioned where you want to enter a chord type the name of the chord you would like For example type c6 to get the C6 chord You should never have to use the shift key as Band in a Box will sort this out for you Here are some other tips for easy chord entry Use b fora flat e g Bb7 It is not necessary to type upper or lower case the program will sort this out for you Use or 3 for a sharp e g F 7 is the uppercase symbol of 3 so you can actually type F37 to get F 7 Band in a Box will sort out the case saving you the effort of using lt SHIFT gt 3 to type the symbol Use for slash chords with alternate Roots such as C7 E C7 with E bass Use a comma to enter 2 chord
62. new harmony and choose Paste Then 170 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions rename that harmony Shearing modified and you can make changes to it such as using different instruments Save As Save F You should never have to press these Save buttons since the harmony is saved automatically for you All of the 256 harmonies are saved in a single har file called default har If you have run out of harmonies you can start a new harmonies file by pressing the SaveAs For example if you want to make a disk of add on harmonies you can make one and save it as MyName HAR Then you could share it with other Band in a Box users who could load in your bank of harmonies from the Harl Edit a Harmonies File without disrupting their own existing default har file Export Import gt As stated above each har file has 256 harmonies so you probably need only 1 file default har for all your harmonies But if you ve made a great harmony and want to give it to your friend for example you can export a single harmony as a hl file Your friend can then import this harmony into their har file Or you could upload some h1 files that you ve created to your favorite web site for other Band in a Box users to enjoy by importing them into their default har harmonies file TEECNO Test Chord to develop a harmony is to hear it as it s playing The preferred way to do this is to have a song playing tha
63. next four bars It s fun to solo along with Band in a Box in 4 s mode letting the computer solo for four bars followed by your solo G Trade 4 s Trade 4 s 1st a A In the Select Soloist dialog you can click on the button beside the Trade 4 s radio control to select whether you want the first four bars or the second four bars If set to 1 the soloist will take bars 1 4 9 12 etc And if set to 2 it will solo on bars 5 8 13 16 etc The fours are based on the beginning of the chorus not the first bar of the song You can generate four bars trading off with each other in two ways The easiest way is to choose the Normal Solo mode and select the Change Instrument Every 4 bars option This results in different instruments taking four bar solos Change Instrument Every 4 bars Another method is to choose the trade 4 s option generate 4 s using the first setting and then choose SOL Edit Soloist Track Swap Melody and Soloist Track and then generate a solo again using the second set of four bars This will result in 4 s with one track on Melody and the other on the Soloist track Automatic Guitar Chord Solos The Guitarist With Band in a Box you can generate a guitar chord solo for any melody Band in a Box will intelligently arrange the melody into a guitar chord solo by inserting real guitar voicings throughout the piece You can select from among many Guitarists to create your arran
64. part marker Bar 1 is the first bar after a part marker for example Bar mask setting of 0 is the default This lets the pattern be played at any time Other bar mask settings pattern played at odd number bars only 1 3 5 7 9 pattern played at even bars only 2 4 6 8 10 pattern played on 3rd of 4 bar 3 7 11 15 pattern played on 4th of 4 4 8 12 16 20 pattern played on 5th of 8 5 13 21 pattern played on 6th of 8 6 14 22 pattern played on 7th of 8 7 15 23 pattern played on 8th of 8 8 16 24 Se eo a a a Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 155 9 PRE FILL special value refers to the bar before a fill 10 FILL refers to the bar of a fill not applicable to drums because there is a special row for drum fills 11 POST FILL refers to the bar after a fill same as the first bar after a part marker Drum Fill on Substyle USUAL SETTING Any This setting is only relevant on the Drum Fills line It lets you specify if you want the drum fill to be used on the a substyle the b substyle or either The default setting is Any Late Triplets USUAL SETTING 0 This is only relevant in drum patterns with timebase 12 triplet feel If you want the 3rd triplet to be played late as is usually done in slow jazz style then set a number from 0 11 Default is O not late at all A typical setting for a slow triplet style is triplets late 5 the units are 120 beat
65. quits turn Local ON Set Panning to Mono Set Panning To Stereo Note Most of the items on these sub menus have hotkeys and it is easier to access them quickly using the hotkeys New Hot Keys These hotkeys are slightly different than previous versions and are now the same as the Windows version Ctrl Shift Q and Ctrl Shift W change the volume of the current part Chapter 3 Summary of New Features 21 Ctrl Shift and E R change the Reverb Ctrl Shift T Y changes the Chorus Ctrl Shift U I changes the Pan Ctrl Shift O P changes the Bank Configuration Files Band in a Box stores its preferences files in the main Band in a Box folder These are the configuration files for the OS X version The names in brackets are the names of the same files under OS9 It is possible to run the Band in a Box OS 9 version from the same folder as the OS X version so the configuration file names are slightly different These configuration files have different names in OS X than previous version of Band in a Box e 6 Intrface_OS X BBW OS9 name was Intrface BBW This file stores the many Band in a Box program preferences e Band in a Box Preferences_OS X OS9 name was Band in a Box Preferences This file stores the name and information of the currently selected MIDI Driver e g QuickTime or CoreMIDI e BBM LST in OS9 was BBW LST This text file stores the styles list for the StylePicker e Default_OS X SOL OS9 nam
66. screen is full of patterns mostly empty indicated by a period When a pattern has been recorded there is a number in place of the period for example 5 These numbers indicate whether a pattern has been recorded at the location 146 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions A period indicates no pattern and a number from 9 indicates that a pattern has been recorded with the actual value corresponding to the desired weight the pattern is to be given relative to other similar patterns Patterns that you don t want to hear very often in the style are given low weights Usually you will use weights in the range of 0 8 where 0 no pattern recorded 1 8 pattern recorded 9 special weight that is really given a much higher weight internally by the program A pattern with a weight of 9 will always be played if not masked out by other options a and b refer to the 2 substyles available in the Band in a Box program Explanation of the pattern lengths 8 4 2 and 1 beat You may ask Why would I need to have different pattern lengths in a style Whenever Band in a Box encounters a chord change in a song it will begin to playback a new pattern starting at the beginning of the pattern It firsts scans the chord to see how long that chord is going to last without a chord change For example let s look at these chords 1 Dm7 12 G7 C6 13 FMAJ7 14 These chords are in substyle a When Band in a Box is play
67. send it the appropriate chord information automatically as your song is playing e g root position triads Then you can sing along to any Band in a Box file and the Vocalist will harmonize your voice according to the root position chords that Band in a Box is sending to it For any other devices you will need to know a little more information as to what your external device needs to see for it to function correctly such as channel velocity chord type etc Then type the appropriate values in the spaces provided in the Output Chords To External Device window shown above The JukeBox Overview of the Jukebox The Jukebox will Load and Play an entire folder of songs Songs play continuously one after the other The Jukebox will continue to play while you move to other programs so you can use the Jukebox to provide background music for your Macintosh Press the button the J keys or choose Juke Box Play from the Song menu to open the Juke Box Options dialog 90 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Make your choices of options as described below and then click on the Play Juke Box button to start the Jukebox playing Press the H and H arrows onscreen or the or 4 keys to select the Previous Juke Song or the Next Juke Song respectively or choose these options from the Song menu Jukebox Options Include Songs without Melodies If checked the program plays songs with and without melodies that is
68. snare and hi hat sounds are on the lowest keyboard row The lower middle row contains toms and cymbals The upper middle row contains Latin drums and the top row contains Latin hand percussion The numeric keypad keys contain the remainder of the Latin hand percussion plus the electronic tones Drum Kit Main Window The Drums main window can be resized to tile with other Macintosh of interest On 256 color displays the image does not look its best The window looks its best if the computer is in Thousands of colors 16 bit or Millions of Colors 24 bit video mode Drum Transport Controls Scare ere Pee eee eae a n Place the mouse cursor on each control to see its function Record Place Band in a Box in Record mode so drum instruments can be recorded Play Start Band in a Box song playback Rewind Stop and return to song start Stop Stop Band in a Box playback Size Buttons 1 1 1 2 1 4 Preset the window to full size half size or quarter size If the window has been changed to a size different from these by dragging a window border none of the size buttons will be down Settings Dialog Adjust program behavior 142 Chapter 10 Built in Drums Drum Window Settings Press the Settings button to the left of Rewind button to adjust Drum Window Settings Drum Window Settings Note Velocity Instrument Hints High Velocity shift key 127 MI
69. songs within the Songs folder If not checked the Jukebox will include only songs with the MG extension Audible lead in While listening to the Jukebox you might not want to hear the count in click If not checked you won t hear the count in click Vary Melody Instrument Hearing a song after a song is played with the same melody instrument would get a little monotonous If you check this option the program will randomly change the melody instrument between your favorites Use Tap in click to start This option is used to control when the next song starts and allows you to control the tempo of the song See options below Set Cue Tap Options Hide Song Name This feature is used to play the Guess the Song game When checked the titles are hidden until you click the title When someone guesses the Song Title you can click in the Title box to verify if he she is correct You ll probably want to restrict the Jukebox to only songs with melodies unless you can guess songs without melodies Random Play Alphabetical If set to Random the songs will be played in random order without repeating songs If set to Alphabetical the songs will be played in alphabetical order from the Songs folder Change Harmony w each song If selected a harmony will be automatically selected for each song that plays in the Jukebox Use the Harmony range settings to choose from a particular section of the Harmony list Generate S
70. the C Vibrato Vibrato can be added according to the additional vibrato settings available in the More dialog The vibrato can t be seen on the notation window but you can examine the events in the Event List Hote Ay 57 Uel 16068 Dur 0 Hote Fy 53 Yel 91 Dur 32 Hote C 4 48 Yel 168 Dur 2 1 Modulation Wheel Uibrato Data 15 1 Modulation Wheel Uibrato Data 30 1 Modulation Wheel Uibrato Data 4 Hote F 4 C53 Yel 86 Dur 65 Hote Ay 57 Yel 94 Dur 58 Hote D 5 fH Dur of There are additional settings in the Embellisher Additional Settings dialog box Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 137 Embellish Additi Vibrato Rate 0 127 Vibrato Depth 0 127 Only use vibrato if note is this many ticks 140 Duration of Grace Notes Milleseconds 60 Legato setting 55 75 default 65 60 Adjust octave method Adjust to Best Octave T Dynamic Range 20 100 defauly 40 AQ Legato Setting 55 75 default 65 65 Defaults Update Live Embellishment This allows you to set advanced settings for the Embellisher These include Vibrato Depth This is the amplitude of the vibrato ranging from 0 127 Vibrato Speed This is the speed of the vibrato slow fast range O 127 Only use Vibrato if Note is this many ticks e g If set to 120 ticks one quarter note then only notes of at least that duration will get vibrato Start the Vibrato after this many ticks For notes that will get
71. the current key of the previous song Generate The next section of the Melodist Screen allows you to select whether you want to H Whole Son q generate the Whole Song or just part of the song If you select part of the song you can specify which bar and chorus to start at and how many bars to generate An easy way to set the range of bars is to select the bars by dragging the mouse over the chord area prior to launching the Melodist dialog Rar Then the Generate form will be automatically set to Part of Song and the range of bars will be set to the selected area Part of Song Set Range Chorus Bars If you were generating a song from scratch you d want to set Generate Whole Song After you listen to the song you might want to improve on a certain section of the song say bars 5 and 6 of the first A section To do this from the chordsheet window select bars 5 and 6 and press the Melodist button again You ll notice that the Generate Part of Song radio button is set with the range set to bar 5 and 6 Pressing OK at this point will cause only bars 5 and 6 to be regenerated preserving the rest of the song This allows you to repeatedly generate re generate parts of the melody and or chords until you get the Melody Chord progression that you re looking for Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 111 Replace Thru Form i If you have set the Melodist to Generate Part of Song this
72. to go into a 3 hole binder for example Auto Fit onto 1 page Band in a Box will set the staves per page for you This will be set when you enter the Print Dialog box or change the range that you want to print first last chorus or whole song This will be done to try to fit your printing onto 1 page If you re printing the whole song it is unlikely that it will fit onto 1 page so Band in a Box will set to the default 10 staves per page You can over ride this setting by typing in the staves per page that you would like Note Remember that the title on page 1 takes up 1 stave so if you choose 10 staves you will get the title 9 staves on page 1 and 10 staves on page 2 104 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing Print Options Dialog Box Print Options Include Print Page M Chords M Treble Clef vi Notes Bass Clef First Chorus i Bar s below by 1 Clefssplit F0 Last Chorus _ Clef Sign Every Line Whole Song Include Lead In Bar yrics Below By 2 _ Key Sig Every Line Staves per page 10 Title Wiolet Seng o a r Style Jazz Quintet Composer Tempo CT Tempo 120 Composer Copyright Left Margin 0 25 Music Font Size def 24 24 Right Margin 0 25 f OK Print Setup C Close Cancel Include Chords If selected this will include the chords of the song on the lead sheet Remember that you can set the height of the chords relative to the staff in the Notatio
73. transfer the program you must either transfer all copies whether in printed or machine readable form to the same party or destroy all copies not transferred This includes all modifications and or portions of the program merged into other programs C You may receive the program in more than one media Regardless of the type or size of media you receive you may install or use the media on a single machine The program including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the program is owned by PG Music Inc or its suppliers and is protected by international copyright laws and international treaty provisions You may not use copy or transfer the program or any copy modification or merged portion of the program in whole or in part except as expressly provided for in this license If you transfer possession of any copy modification or merged portion of the program to another party your license is automatically terminated LIMITATION OF REMEDIES PG Music Inc s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be A The replacement of any media not meeting PG Music Inc s Limited Warranty which are returned to PG Music Inc or an authorized PG Music Inc dealer with a copy of your receipt B If PG Music Inc or the authorized dealer is unable to deliver replacement media that is free of defects in materials or workmanship you may terminate this agreement and you
74. use You can either generate a chord solo for the whole song or just a region of the song In either case remember that you need to have an existing melody to work with You can use the Melodist to generate a melody if you don t have one Preferred Fret Position Sth W Auto Set Se L Pane Select the Main Guitar Position to use Band in a Box has a setting called Auto Set that will set the main guitar position for the solo for you based on the key signature For example in the key of C Band in a Box will choose the 5 position as the best position for the chord solo to be played You can override this For example if you wanted the solo to be in the 12 position you could de select the Auto Set and then set the guitar position to 12 position Mi OK to change existing guitar chan Change Guitar channel In case you already have a guitar track that has guitar channels for example if it was already played on a guitar controller as a single string guitar part then you might want to tell Band in a Box not to change the guitar positions of the notes that it finds Normally you d want to set OK to change existing guitar channels to true Press OK to generate the Guitar Chord Solo Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features You ll now see a message box confirming that a chord solo has been added Message Guitar Chord Solo written successfully There were 279 notes on the track and with the chord solo ther
75. window but selecting an instrument with the choose button also fills in the note range information specific to that instrument You ll notice that the correct range for tenor saxophone has been filled in to the Note Range settings 10 Modify if required the phrase length space length and outside range parameters Change the Legato Boost to 10 This will add 10 to the duration of the notes Increase the Lateness by 5 This will play the notes more on the beat than other jazz soloists Increase the 8th Note spacing by 5 This will play the 8th notes in a more even feel than other Jazz soloists If your screen looks something like the one below press OK Then give Band in a Box a few moments to load its knowledgebase of solo ideas and new parameters and an additional few moments to analyze the chords Playback will then begin automatically Enjoy the solo 174 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions i Soloist Editor Num 1 Bebop Saxophone Title Bebop saxophone Memo Easic bebop Sax solo will work with most swing styles Check Double Time 7 if tempo is slower Choose ST2 Datab ira o 1 Choose 5T2 Database E ___ Phrase Length 4 to 20 beats i r A eits Insert Spaces between phrases 25 STA style is SWING ST2 Estey Defaults Space Length 9 to 5 beats 212 is swing amp th notes YI Outside Range 1 to 7 1 in 9 out i Patch Change Legato Boost 5 Note Range 44 to 75 Choose Increas
76. would in the example above generate only bars 5 and 6 of the song form in the A section of an AABA form If the form of the song were AABA you d normally want the regenerated section to be repeated throughout the form in all of the a sections The Replace Thru form will set the Melodist to copy the generated bars 5 and 6 to the other a sections bars 13 14 and 29 30 If you d like to remove the current Intro Melody or Soloist Track press the Kull Intro Kill Melody or Kill Soloist button You can press the Search button and then type in part of a Melodist name memo style name or other text associated with a Melodist This will then cause the Go To Melodist selection to change to the next item c containing the text Similarly you can type in a number of a Melodist and press the Go To button Search Memo Database MEL1 ST 2 swing Tenor octave below 45 anticipate autoloads J EASY STY Mo transpose on znd 4 The Memo area displays a Memo for the current Melodist as well as the name of the database e g MEL1 ST2 that the Melodist is based on Instrument Choose Clear Harmony 120 Generic Vol 20 Octave below Clear Style J EASY STY Choose Clear Change Instrument Every Part Marker bd Melodists can store patch and harmony settings and these are displayed in the patch area of the Melodist selection screen You can also set the inst
77. you instant access to the songs you are most likely to be playing with regardless of where the song is located on your hard drive Check OK To Add recent files to allow your recently loaded songs to be added to this list File Open Favorite Songs or Shift F3 also opens this window Press the song button or Ctrl F3 to launch the Select song by Title window described in full elsewhere in this manual Tip Click the Play when selected checkbox at the bottom of the song list window to have Band in a Box play your song immediately upon selection Like the favorite songs button the favorite styles button f activates a window with a list of the 150 styles you have used most recently This lets you quickly load in styles that have been used your last few sessions with Band in a Box This will likely become your preferred method of choosing styles in Band in a Box since your favorite styles are usually near the top of the list Click the Play When Chosen checkbox to have Band in a Box play your song immediately upon selecting a style User Open Favorite Styles or Shift F9 also opens this window You get to the StylePicker window by pressing the STY button or with the keystrokes Ctrl F9 This feature is explained in full elsewhere in this manual Harmony Area The Harmony area displays the current Melody and Thru Harmony 14 14 trumpet trombone rds f trombone 14 trumpet trombone rds
78. 025 100 VintJz Lush 5 s 5t 8 MOR w strs 50w25 World Styles JILUSHZ 100 VintJz Lush2 St8 MOR RSecOnly So 275 te165 140 188 About Time 38 JILUSH3 100 VintJz Lush3 St amp MOR no pno Sos75 Requested 2 39 JILUSHS amp 100 VintJz Lush4 St amp MOR no strs gui S0S25 Styles Disk 25 Rnythn amp Blues J MANCN2 4 8 88 Jazz Mancni2 Slow pop bal var SO8 lt S Examples More Smooth Ja IMANCNI 8O Joz7 Mancni Slow pop sw bal S825 Crossover 42 J1N_ORL amp 185 VintJz New Orleans Sw amp St8 mix Sow25 Requested 3 43 JIN_ORL2 amp 185 VintJz New Orleans2 Sw amp St mix sow2s ic JINAT sw amp 175 VintJzz Nat piano Trio no drs 025 _ Play when chosen _ Preview on Double Click Stylepicker Filtered to Styles Disk25 Re Build Print Search Open NIGHT 1 SKY 1 SKY2 1 TEDY2 J ALHIRT JILUSH Seo oa Ge p ppa Up a Lazy River Blue Moon Change Prototype Style Show Styles Melody Patch Vocal Oohs Selected Style Defaults to Current Style Oi Soloist vw Prototype Style Defaults to Current Style Cancel Upd Acoustic Prono d There is a new filter to display only the styles of a certain Styles Set number as well as displaying the name of the Styles Set To select this open the StylePicker and choose Only Show Styles Set When you pick Styles Set you can then see only that Styles Set listed regardless of the category you are in The limit of number of styles in the StylePicker has been i
79. 248 Blues Rock Organ 249 Fusion Swing 16ths 250 Fusion Swing 16ths Synth 251 Waltz Older Pop Accordian 252 Andy LaVerne Piano Trio 253 Andy LaVerne Mainstr Med 254 Andy LaVerne Mainstr Fast 255 Andy LaVerne Mainstr Slow 256 Andy LaVerne Mainstr Ballad 257 Andy LaVerne Cookin 4ths 258 Andy LaVerne Pentatonic Med 259 Andy LaVerne Pentatonic Fast 260 Andy LaVerne Pentatonic Slow 261 Andy LaVerne Pent Ballad T Maximum Number of Soloists increased to 1 024 from 256 and new Soloists added The previous limit of soloists was 256 and we had already defined 253 of them We ve now increased this limit to 1 024 and have added new soloists The default Soloist file for the OS X version of Band in a Box is now called Default OS X SOL the OS9 version is called DEFAULT SOL Chapter 3 Summary of New Features 15 New Count In Options Count in can be Drum Patterns instead of 1 2 1234 There is a new option in Preferences to select count in type You can specify to have Band in a Box play 2 bars of a drum pattern instead of the count in You may prefer hearing the drum beat to a simple count in since it provides more information about the upcoming groove If you re playing with Band in a Box live on a dance floor this setting is a great way to avoid dead air between songs and keep the drumbeat going Includes options to have a or b
80. 4 alias substitutions 72 Chord Substitution Wizard 201 alternate root 67 auto substitution 201 anticipations 136 comments 201 Apple Audio MIDI Setup 207 chord substitutions 201 203 Audio memos 20 range of bars 203 Auto Chord Substitution dialog 202 undo 202 settings 203 Chord Substitutions Dialog 202 auto substitution 201 types 202 Band in a Box chord tones 101 guitar chord solo 120 Chord tutor 199 bar settings 37 Chord Wizard 10 33 68 186 Bar Beat settings 68 chord options 189 bass Sths 18 dialog 186 Bass part type 190 summary 193 build chords 67 Chords Builder button 204 Copy and Paste 61 Carbonized 14 Typing in how to 55 change patches 27 chordsheet 203 change style 65 Chordsheet 48 Channels chord entry 48 Setting 87 color 83 Chase volumes 18 font size 83 chord 66 chorus outputting to external device 90 unfolding 84 Chord Builder 9 66 205 Clipboard 129 Index 259 comping See Concert Pitch adjust 88 Configuration files new 22 copy chords 35 Copyright 258 CoreMIDI 206 custom chord shortcuts 57 pgshortc txt 57 shortcut txt 57 customize patches 45 De Strauss convert 3 4 to 4 4 17 Digitech Vocalist 89 doubled notes 136 Drum count in 19 Drum Kit Window 139 Drum window enhancements 140 Drums 139 Computer QWERTY Keys 141 Multi Note Instruments 141 Sizing Window 142 Transport Controls 142 editable notation 30 Embellisher checkbox 48 Embellishment 54 228 Endings 55 Expand 84 extension 67 68 205 extra
81. 44 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Next interval masks Only when next chord of song is certain interval e g up a fourth But the StyleMaker is loaded with options and features that allow your styles to grow in complexity and number of patterns For example it is possible to input up to 600 patterns in a given style In addition patterns can be classified by many ways allowing them to be played only at appropriate times For example patterns can be given varying lengths or can be assigned to certain types of chords or only to be played on even or odd number bars and many others We believe that the StyleMaker satisfies both the need to create simple styles with repetitive patterns and the ability to create complex styles intelligently To create a style you will be creating Bass Piano Guitar Strings patterns in the key of C and Drum patterns Once made the styles are saved to disk and are then ready to be used by the program for playing any song in the selected User style Styles end up as files with a STY extension different from song files which have a SG or a MG extension The StyleMaker has been designed to be as flexible as possible A simple style would consist of three patterns one each for bass drums and piano but more complex styles are created by using more patterns The styles consist of two substyles a and b Typically the A sub style would be the more laid back portio
82. 7 Cmaj7 a list of substitutions including the tritone substitution Dm7 Db7b5 Cmaj7 would be offered to you for use in your song There are also helpful comments associated with each substitution showing you why a given substitution might work in each case e g is the melody compatible with the substitution etc Or you can enable the Auto Substitution feature and the substitutions will be selected according to the general preset preferences There are 2 ways to get chord substitutions you can let Band in a Box show you a list of possible substitutions to pick from yourself User Chord Substitution Dialog or you can let Band in a Box pick them automatically User Auto Substitutions Chord Substitutions Dialog Chord Substitutions Y For this 4 bar chord progression Bar gt F7 Bb6 Bdim Here are possible substitutions Cm F7 EE Cmr F7b Pr m7 G9 Cm7 F7b9 J Fe Cm7 G Abdim F7 A F9 Emy Fi Cm7 On the Gm chord only use if Melody doesn t have these notes E Works for Jazz chords eight 3 Types of Subs to include All Y Show subs with _ Show substitutions only if Melody is Compatible M More Chords Mi jazz substitutions Recompile Kd Less Chords M Pop Country Update W Chords Each Beat Do Substitutions now Close Cancel Defaults Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 201 The appearance
83. BAND AIN A BOX Version 12 for Macintosh OS X MEL SOL Har MIDI GS Windows Help A A C 100 Wed 7 13 PM Band in a Box Playback Blue Caberet MG9 2 46 p Cob Bass Pino rum Her ea Jere Curer Fe MINN CH J Pan banc vou i IR Guitar Sol String EMH Thru Fr Yea es Tena TTT 2o oJ Ez of oop H Mwz Drums bedhead dbe db b MELLL ALA CHE SWE ee Ry EH bodboedbddbeddbed ddd bebo Band in a Box File Edit Song S User Play Stop Replay _Hold_ _ From amp M Open _ Save MID STY _ Melodist Gin o F CSong Blue Caberet G CF Style 2ZPOPBAL STY Fm t 75 1 16 Opt CN Print gt Note Q Rest Mono m FMaj7 5 FMaj9 A7 a ki Guitar 8th Position Key of Fm Track Displayed is Melody PB OR aces EME s A lt Pos gt J ch solo Bt Tutor Cab 8 F 5 XK Ab EOE A Copyright 1989 2004 PG Music Inc All rights reserved PG Music Inc License Agreement CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE USAGE OF THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSE A The program may only be used on a single machine B You may transfer the program and license to another party if the other party agrees to accept the terms of this Agreement If you
84. Beate 1 Cancel Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 37 Record a Melody Band in a Box has 2 built in sequencer tracks so you can record and edit your own melodies or solos These tracks are recorded from a MIDI keyboard or other MIDI controller connected to Band in a Box by your MIDI driver ol Press the Rec button to begin recording This launches Rec the Record Track dialog box Record Track Record From Start of Song FromBar 1 Chorus 1 lag ze End Overdub Underlying Notes You can punch in overdub and record directly to the ending or the tag and use the filter to choose which MIDI events are recorded Pressing the Record button will start Band in a Box recording what you play on the Thru track An audible count is played in prior to recording 110 Melody Notes recorded Options _ Copy 1st Chorus to Whole Song Overdub Underlying Notes _ Retain Past Last Recorded Once you have completed recording your melody Band in a Box will ask you if you would like to keep the take and if you would like to copy the recorded chorus to the whole song 38 Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Tip Looking for inspiration At the click of a button the Band in a Box Melodist will write completely new songs from scratch complete with Chords Intro Melody Solo Ending and even an original Title Or you can enter your own chord changes and let the Melodist create a new mel
85. Choruses Normal If no melody x If no melody x v Mute melody in middle First O Fills 60 Middle Around Melody Last O Trade 4 s ist Solo Wizard Allsolo Mel amp Solo Custom Edit Soloist Maker More Improved Solo but slower creation Mi Auto Suggest Suggest _ Force choruses 5 4 Use Large soloist files ST3 v Load Set w songs C Save set w songs Eo Cancel v Create Long Phrases Use the preset Soloist settings or choose your own Solo Mode and the Choruses where you want a solo The Soloist Maker Edit button gives access to the advanced settings in the Soloist Editor where you can edit existing profiles or create new Soloists of your own To see the Soloist part play in standard music notation open the Notation window and press the S button at the far right of the instrument buttons Notation window showing Soloist part View and Print Notation will see standard notation on the grand staff Standard Notation Window Click on the instrument buttons to see the notation for the different parts the Melody M or the Soloist S Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 29 Print MNote ORest Mono M Clean C L Scrn Band in a Box Standard Notation window The Standard Notation window is for notation display and the entry of chords Just type a chord name and it will be inserted at the current time line location The t
86. DI Clear Cables Specific details of your Audio MIDI Setup screen will differ from this example depending on your MIDI interface and your connected external MIDI devices Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X 207 If your MIDI Interface has been properly installed the picture of your MIDI Interface will automatically appear in the AMS window showing input output pins for each MIDI input and output socket on your MIDI Interface You need to inform Audio MIDI Setup about your external devices keyboards synthesizers drum machines mixers etc Click the Add Device button for each of your external devices and then double click each new device to set Manufacturer Model number of Send Receive MIDI channels and other relevant information After your external devices have been created and configured the last step is to wire them up to the picture of your MIDI interface For instance in the above illustration the KX 88 keyboard controller is connected to MIDI input output pair 8 on the MTPII MIDI Interface Click on an input output pin on the picture of your MIDI Interface and drag to an output input pin of the picture of an external device After supplying this information CoreMIDI will know what devices are on the other side of your MIDI interface s Band in a Box MIDI Port Selection for External Devices MIDI Settings CoreMID Audio MIDI Setup CoreMIDI choose ports
87. Features 14 Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 25 L adime and Playe SONES soc tact ocngsssedsadentasesoniateadavlaauansteeModentacssnath 25 View dnd Print Notation sc 29 Play the JUKE BOX asic Sc ccsnsceceeeed atin tin ccc cancca i eeowdaabeeneaaeeeeeanetees 31 Automatic Songs The Melodist ccccccssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaas 32 Make Our Wie SONES eiela anton calunins shavsheiesteantnalamebate cas 34 Have Pun ies ondsacedesydseas bad bacteccntipaseod pasteauveteaseedancmecussants daa beacaeastes ante 39 Chapter 5 The Main Screen 40 Overview of the Main Screen cccccccccccccececceeeeeseseeseseeeeceeeeeeeeeaaas 40 Synth Window Piano Keyboard cccccccccceeecceceeeaeeesseeseseseeeeeees 42 Tool B OK se vinonaies inocadeitaes satayaubalensaizaiadensa A 45 Te Wido Wesen a a R A ANE A eens 46 Chordshect Area pcnre A E 48 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 50 SONS SeNi S anora teeta eaten estas 50 Mie CHOrds heeten E au ales ie iain 55 Table of Contents 3 Chord Preview BU el sicdicst ieee rates A A 66 INI tle Chord Wizard Arste a A AARE 68 APPIN DESVIOS a L E A teaiinds 70 Playing Pausing and Stopping SONGS cc seseesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees T2 Changing Volume Panning Reverb Chorus Bank 00sssnnnesessssss 74 SEAI OM OS ANA EINA E A T NE T ONT 74 Other Edit PUnCuOms iaa a nee 76 More Preferences Preferences 2Zosrmiuireai nee ean 81 INVITES CU pas aii ei
88. G Melody Harmony H Insert x bars in the highlighted chord area 3 Erase Kill entire Melody K Set the number of choruses in a song L Display and edit the MIDI Settings M Erase current song New N Open song from disk O Print current song P Quit the program Q Replay already constructed song R Save already open song to disk 2S Thru Harmony T Edit the current user style U Paste the scrap contents at current position eV Set the number of lead in bars a W Cut bars to the scrap X Load a SETUP DK file from disk Y Additional Hot Keys Press 4 times to set tempo and play a song 254 Chapter 14 Reference Press to just set the tempo Records a melody to the currently loaded song Plays the song from the current cursor position x Enters lyrics in the Lyrics window l Moves the cursor to the right tab Moves the cursor to the left Shift Tab Help F1 Shift 1 Ctrl F1 Save song F2 Save song with patches F2 Load song F3 Load favorite song Shift F3 Load songs with melodies 3 F3 Play song F4 Select Soloist Shift F4 Quit end program F4 Edit current bar options F5 Melodist Generate Chords Melody Shift F5 Save MIDI file F6 Open filtered by style F7 Refresh Soloist Shift F7 Jukebox start stop F8 Load next song Shift 8 Choose a user style F9 Choose a favorite style Shift F9 Edit user style F9 Allow Melody harmony F10 Select Melody harmony Shift F10 Allow Thru har
89. Harmony with this song Toggle this option On to allow Band in a Box to embed the harmony settings for the currently open song so that they may be recalled automatically later Change Harmony with new chord Toggle this option On to allow the program to vary the harmony characteristics 1 e inversions each time a new chord is encountered in the song Allow Melody Harmony Toggle this option On to allow the Melody MIDI channels to utilize the harmony features Allow Thru Harmony Toggle this option On to allow the Thru MIDI channels to utilize the harmony features Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Toggle this option On to allow the Thru MIDI channels to utilize the harmony features for the Soloist track Convert Harmony to Melody Track This converts a single line Melody track to include the current harmony selection Convert Harmony to Soloist Track This converts a single line Soloist track to include the current harmony selection On the Thru harmony Use Passing harmonies for THRU When you play along on a MIDI keyboard or the wizard and use a Thru harmony you can use passing harmonies For example on a C7 chord with an Ab note the harmony might be a B diminished chord which is a passing harmony 252 Chapter 14 Reference Windows Menu Notation Window Drum Window Window Wal Switch to Next Track Switch to Previous Track Notation Window toggles between the
90. I file Violet MID JOnce you ve selected the file you can press the INTERPRET CHORDS NOW button When you do that the chords will be interpreted from the MIDI file and written onto the chord sheet Prior to pressing the button you might want to make some custom settings Wi Auto interpret settings from MIDI file When you load in the MIDI file Band in a Box interprets many things from the MIDI file for you automatically Normally you d want this to happen but if for some reason you d prefer to make the settings yourself you can set Auto Interpret settings from MIDI file to false The settings that are determined automatically for you are The key signature of the song MIDI file Some MIDI files contain a special event that states the key signature of the file but most don t For the ones that don t Band in a Box analyzes the tracks and makes a best guess at the correct key signature for the song It usually gets it right but if it s wrong it s likely out by a 4th or 5th interval Tempo time signature The channels used for the Bass part Piano comping parts The channels used for the Melody parts The number of bars in the song to import including the number of lead in bars in the song Once you have loaded in the MIDI file by pressing the Open Change button and assuming that you have the Auto Interpret set to true you ll see that the dialog displays the se
91. Jazz Down Choose the menu item User Jazz Up or User Jazz Down to do this Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 69 Jazz Up This function simply converts triads to 7 chords producing a lead sheet more suitable for Jazz If you have a song with triad chords like C or Dm you can choose to Jazz Up the chords When you do this you get an option of whether you d like to see Maj7 Maj6 or Dominant 7 for the major triads Jazz Down This function converts 7th chords to triads for a lead sheet more suited to Pop music Applying Styles There are many styles available for use with the Band in a Box program For the purposes of this program styles refer to styles of music 1 e Jazz Swing Tango Blues Pop Ballad etc Either before or after you have entered the chords to a song you will have to pick one of these styles Once a style is loaded the song will be played back in that style Current Style Window Current Style Selection GARNER STY Ab t 190 1 32 3 The name of the current style appears under the name of the song in the Title window It is also displayed under User Current Style and information on the current style can be viewed by selecting Style Information from the User menu The favorite styles button F activates a window that keeps a list of the 150 styles you have used most recently User Open Favorite Styles or Shift F9 also opens this window
92. Melody Harmonies Favorite Thru Harmonies Start a New Harmonies File Edit a Harmonies File Edit Current Harmonies File OK to Load Harm w songs Save Harmony with this song Y Change Harmony with new chord y Allow Melody Harmony yt Allow Thru Harmony Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Convert Harmony to Melody Track Convert Harmony to Soloist Track Use Passing harmonies for THRU Melody Harmony Shows the current Melody harmony selection Click to open the Select Melody Harmony dialog Thru Harmony Shows the current Thru harmony selection Click to open the Select Thru Harmony dialog Favorite Melody Harmonies This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles based on recent usage and allows you to choose one to use on the Melody track Favorite Thru Harmonies This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles based on recent usage and allows you to choose one to use on the Thru track Start a New Harmonies File allows you to make and edit Harmony styles saved under the filename of your choice Chapter 14 Reference 251 Edit a Harmonies File allows you to edit a Harmony file that is in your bb directory Edit Current Harmonies File allows you to edit the Harmony file that is currently loaded on your system OK to Load Harm w songs Toggle this option On if you want to load any harmony settings that were saved embedded in a given song Save
93. Melody is changed to the best octave for the current Melody instrument For example if the instrument were a Piccolo the octave would be raised to the best range for a piccolo There is an additional setting for the octave in the More settings dialog Anticipation An anticipated note is played early or ahead of the beat as in this example Unembellished notes Less Anticipation This is the opposite of anticipation This finds notes that are anticipated and embellishes them by playing them later on the beat Grace Notes The grace notes are brief notes played just before and a semi tone below the original note The grace notes intentionally don t show on the notation so that it will remain easily readable They can be heard Doubled Notes Melody notes are doubled with the same pitch Unembellished C quarter note is Embellished doubled to 2 eighth 136 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks Extra Notes Extra notes are added between melody notes Unembellished In this before and With Extra Notes added after example an Eb and E note are added between the D and F Note Turns With a note turn a single note is replaced by a group of notes that includes the original note and the semitone or scale tones above and below Unembellished In this before and Embellished with turn after example the C note is replaced by a turn of 3 notes with a note a scale tone above
94. PG Music are in a file named pgshortc txt which should be used only by PG Music If you find a chord that Band in a Box won t accept like Csus2 when it expects C2 instead you can enter this as a single line in shortcut txt sus2 2 without the quotes Band in a Box will then enter the chord C2 if you type in Csus2 in other words you can type in Csus2 and the program will accept it You can also use it for shortcuts just as maj7 lets you type Cj for CMajy7 See the file pgshortc txt for examples of shortcuts MIDI Chord Recognition Another way of entering chords is through MIDI chord recognition Play any chord on your external MIDI keyboard or MIDI guitar controller and Band in a Box will recognize it instantly and insert it onto the chordsheet This allows you to enter an entire song without having to type any of the chords It s also a good way to find the right name for a chord To use this feature select the menu command M Insert current MIDI chord or press the Ctrl Return keys The last chord you played on your MIDI keyboard controller will be automatically inserted into your song chordsheet or notation view at the current cursor location Then Band in a Box is ready for the next chord You can insert up to two chords per bar in this fashion Erase Chords To erase chords place the highlight cell over top of the chords you would like to erase Press the spacebar once Then move your cursor to the right or left
95. Please choose which you would prefer to use QuickTime Music Instruments built in Mac sounds fe MacOS X CoreMID Cancel Make General MIDI Patch Map This opens the GS Patch Numbers dialog where you can make a customized General MIDI patch map for your non GM instrument Type in the patch number that your synth uses for each instrument listed For example suppose that your sound source has Acoustic Piano at patch location 41 In the General MIDI Patch Edit dialog select the box to the left of Acoustic Piano and type 41 Do the same for all of the instruments in the General MIDI patch list If your synth doesn t have an exact match use a close sounding patch that it does have Once you have made a patch map in this way whenever Band in a Box encounters Acoustic Piano which is General MIDI instrument 1 it will look up this Patch Map Location and then send out Patch 41 to your synth sound module Furthermore you will never have to refer to instruments in Band in a Box by your synth s number Instead you ll use the General MIDI instrument numbering e g Acoustic Piano 1 So if you are Saving a Song with Patches or Assigning favorite instruments or combos you will still type 1 to tell Band in a Box that the patch is Acoustic Piano Set Favorite Patches Combos For each of the 8 parts Bass Piano Drums Guitar Strings Melody Soloist and Thru you can assign up to 10 favorite instruments Onc
96. You can export your Band in a Box files and import them into Apple s GarageBand program for further processing And we include a great QuickTime video tutorial showing you all the newest features in version 12 The styles have been greatly enhanced we ve edited the existing styles and made many more styles using the newest features This automatically makes your existing songs sound better New Soloists Melodists and Harmonies are now included making this the best sounding Band in a Box ever The user interface has been enhanced with improved menus and other enhancements giving Band in a Box a much better look in the OS X environment Improved OS X 128X128 high resolution program and file icons are also included with this upgrade to enhance the user experience Timing has been improved to microsecond accuracy for tighter playback MIDI support for Band in a Box 12 for Macintosh now includes CoreMIDI for support of external MIDI devices as well as improved support for QuickTime Music synthesizers making it work and sound much better in OS X Additional MIDI driver enhancements allow users with controller keyboards such as the M Audio Oxygen 8 or the Edirol PCR 1 to play thru the QuickTime Music synthesizer from their MIDI keyboard Other enhanced features include odd time signature support 7 8 11 8 etc maximum number of Soloists increased from 256 to 1024 count in types now include choice of drum pattern or regular co
97. a Box PowerGuide Chapter 7 Notation and Printing Notation Opening and Closing the Notation Window m oe Baas Notation gt To get to the Notation inside Band in a Box you need to open the Notation window You can do this by pressing the Notation button You can also open the Notation window from the menu File Notation Window or by pressing w The Notation window covers the previous window the chordsheet and is fixed not movable Close the Notation window by pressing the Notation button again Print Gs Note ORest Mono M Clean L Sen BOD Notation Window Toolbar The toolbar at the top of the Notation Window gives you access to most of the functions n r Track Notation Mode Notation Editable Notation Piano Roll Bass Drums Piano Guitar Options Clean Notation i Print Options Current Note Mono Mode Strings Melody and Solo Opt CN Print Note ORest Mono MClean jLScrn B D P G S GMCS Notation Mode f f This is an important button It is the Notation Mode button This _ toggles between the 3 modes of the Notation window Standard Notation mode Editable Notation mode and Staff Roll mode You can toggle through the 3 modes by clicking the mouse on the button Print Options f Print Press this button to Print the Notation to any standard n printer supported by the Macintosh If you haven t set up your printer to work with
98. a Box to indicate strings to 6 of a guitar It uses the current position marker on the guitar for this command There is a Utilities sub menu that has utility functions to eliminate note overlap and transpose the Solo Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops Transpose One Octave DOWN 46 3 Transpose One Octave UP ob 4 Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops opens a Choose Range dialog to select the range of bars where note overlap will be eliminated while double stops are either preserved or eliminated Transpose One Octave DOWN Transpose One Octave UP transposes the Soloist part one octave in either direction This is often useful if the Soloist instrument has been changed Transposing can be done while the song plays Track Type Normally you d leave the track type set to Single but you can set it to Chapter 14 Reference 247 248 Guitar Channels 11 to 16 will display on the guitar as strings 11 to 16 TAB will show the notation will be up an octave and the MIDI file will contain the channels preserved Multi All channels are preserved and output on the channels This would be useful for importing an entire MIDI file and playing it from the Melody channel using a silent style Piano In this mode channels 8 and 9 are treated as the left and right hand of a piano part Chapter 14 Re
99. a faster method to enter a song into Band in a Box is to COPY and PASTE the repeating chords Highlight a section of chords by dragging the mouse over them while holding the left mouse button The area will be blackened highlighted Press Cmd C or select the Edit Copy menu item The highlighted area will be copied to the clipboard It can then be pasted back into the chordsheet at any location and reused as many times as you like Move the highlight cell to the bar that you want to paste the chords into using the arrow keys or the mouse 13 14 Paste the copied section with press Cmd V command or select the Edit Paste menu item The chords will then appear at the new location Choose a Style The Style Picker window allows easy selection of Styles by Category Full Style Title Memo and examples of songs that work in that style This list may be printed out For example you can select Jazz styles and see all the Jazz styles in Band in a Box displayed Then you can select a style such as GARNER STY and see a full title description of the style and examples of songs appropriate to the style You won t have to go hunting for the style you want any more This information may be printed out You get to the StylePicker window by pressing the STY button or Ctrl F9 This launches the StylePicker window Show Styles Bate ee eae If Feel Matches Prototype If Feel and Tempo Match Prototype Ch
100. ale beginning on the 6 of the scale in the key of F this is up at the 10 position and is called the Aeolian Position There are note names displayed in color with ellipses around the notes that are in the scale The root note of the scale is highlighted in red the third and fifth of the scale are in purple and the rest of the scale tones are circled in gray 194 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards Automatic Settings for Guitar Display Band in a Box does many things automatically on the guitar window to insure that the notes are displayed intelligently on a guitar fretboard These include Automatically setting the 2 positions that will display the note names based on the key Auto Scanning the track to be played and adjusting the display octave on the guitar fretboard to insure that the best octave is picked to minimize the number of notes that will be outside of the current position displayed on the fretboard After Auto scanning the track the best position for displaying the music on the guitar is determined This is always one of the 2 positions Aeolian or Phrygian as discussed above though you may over ride this by clicking on any fret position Color coding note displays In addition to the note names being outlined in the colors as discussed above when the note is played it is highlighted in green if it is a scale note and yellow if it is an out of scale note Guitar Window Toolbar At the bottom of the Guita
101. ame key for each note in the rhythm of the melody The Wizard notes won t be the exact melody but don t worry about that as you record When youre finished go to the Notation window You now have the notes with the correct durations and times but the wrong pitches One by one drag the notes up to the correct melody note holding down the shift control and key for sharps flats and naturals respectively You ll then have entered a melody that sounds like it was recorded from a keyboard without the stiff sound of a melody entered in step time Note If you have the wizard on the SPACEBAR won t stop playback You need to press ESCAPE to stop playback if the Wizard is on This is because people mistakenly hit the spacebar while playing the wizard which would stop the song inadvertently moe Bank Patches The button on the instrument selection panel will give you easy access to patches on higher banks These are selected from a PAT file that corresponds to your synth or sound module We have included many PAT files in the Synth Kits folder Press the button to launch the Patches on Higher Banks dialog To narrow your search you can do one or all of the following Open the Patch list and select an instrument i e Electric Bass Acoustic Piano etc Click on the Include Family checkbox to have other offerings of similar type shown i e all Bass family patches all keyboard family patches
102. an a certain duration In the example of Garner we set the threshold to 200ms notes shorter than that will not be harmonized OK to make new harmony with chord This option is for how the program fixes the harmony when chord changes occur during a sustained note harmony Most harmonies have a feature that changes the pitch of the harmony voices under the Melody note when the chord changes if the underlying voice wouldn t be a chord tone This sounds unrealistic for certain types of harmonies like Garner or Guitar harmonies since it would be unrealistic for those instruments to change the inner voicings in this manner If you de select the option to Make new harmony with new chord the voices that would conflict with the new chord merely stop playing instead of changing to new notes Use Guitar Harmony Voicings This harmony type uses real guitar chord voicings that display correctly on the guitar fretboard Setting the Use Guitar Harmony Voicings checkbox means that guitar chord voicings will be used instead of any other voicings specified in the Harmony Maker Check out Harmony 32 J Pass for an example of this The Soloist Maker This module allows you to define your own soloists For example let s say you want to create a soloist in a style similar to John Coltrane the great Jazz saxophonist The Soloist Maker allows you to define the parameters essential to a soloist s playing such as instrument range i e t
103. an select a specific style from the Styles folder Method 2 The StylePicker You can use the StylePicker window to select your style Select the Style button above the chordsheet or type Ctrl F9 on your computer keyboard Select Style Prototype Style ZZJAZZ STY Category Styles Preview Stop t 120 Update Reduce Expand ee All A J BYRDDUO 140 Byrd Duo Bossa Guitar amp Bass D SD 24 Cl Prompt w preview ALL K Z BYRDQRT 140 Byrd Quartet Bossa quartet SD 24 Jazz BYRDSOL 140 Byrd Solo Nylon Guitar Bossa SD 24 Pop Rock 1BYRDTRI 140 Byrd Trio Bossa Guitar Trio w SD 24 Duo Bossa Nylon Country Folk 1 CAMPGIT 135 Campfire swing Guitars SD 24 Guitar ala CByrd amp ac Latin CAMPST8 Campfire st 8 ac guitars SD 24 Bass only Guitar Uses Waltzes FREDDIE 175 Freddie solo FrGreen Rhy guitar SD 24 intelligent voicings Classical A CHETBR 220 ChetBrushes UpTempo sw Travis g SD 24 using typical Bossa Ethnic Misc 1280RK 70 Orchestral 12 8 SD 11 syncopation T 130 Utility 128ROK1 70 12 8 Power Rock Ballad SD 36 W Fretboards 128ROK2 65 12 8 Loud Rock feel SD 36 Country Rock 31 12ST amp BAN 125 12 String Guitar amp Banjo SD 30 Alt Rock 32 3GIT_16 100 3 Guitars 16ths SD 19 Chicago Blues 60_ROK8 123 60 s Brit Rock 8 No Brushes SD 22 World Styles 34 60_STRUM 135 60 s Brit Strum guitars Pop Ro SD 22 t 140 120 160 Requested Jazz 60 ROK8 123 60 s Brit Rock 8 Blues Train SD 22 Styl
104. ana ENA Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards MIDI FUS Chord WiZ d sts cis ccnss sedsates inom ished Seems na STS UCAS Cites card a hee tsiasle Miser a eTa Guitar TUOT aasa ant eadsngucestatiad E enna esaaceuies Chord Substitution Wizard ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees Chord UilGer sasias reeeinaecdne tsa ea eines Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X Tutorial Chapter 14 Reference Band in a Box Menu Descriptions cccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeees SOS Ve Ia tase te adtanctenbe hie saloaaten stata unawmcdusaaawleaabaaa toads OVI a acces hess net aeeaateas sake ET Keystroke Commands Hot Keys cccccceceeseeeeeeees PG Music Inc Index Registration Form HOw TORCE iii Giitenatioe es Geriatr secre Chapter 1 Introduction The latest version of Band in a Box for Macintosh is built for OS X and adds many new features This exciting new version of Band in a Box for Macintosh runs Native in OS X Jaguar or Panther version 10 2 or higher recommended and includes many new and enhanced features Band in a Box version 12 is fully Mac OS X carbonized We have a huge number of new and improved Styles Soloist Harmonies and Song Demos making your Band in a Box program sound better than ever Program operations are much faster including up to 3 times faster notation redraws song and soloing generation Playback timing is improved and rock solid with Mac OS X
105. and a Db7 beat 2 type Ab Db7 i e 2 chords separated by a comma Note You can also use Option Z or select Chord Settings option from the Edit menu to enter chords This pops up a dialog box that lets you type in the chords and also sets options like pushes rests and shots Convert Harmony Part to Notation track Previously if you added a harmony the harmony parts wouldn t be seen on the notation you would only see the lead part Now you can write the harmony part directly to the notation track so you can see it and print it out just like any other part Note These features are all described for the Melody track but apply equally to the Soloist or THRU part To convert a melody or Soloist track to a Harmony do the following ae fos 17 SuperSax 441 1 D a Select the Harmony that you want to use 2 Choose the menu item MEL Convert Harmony to Melody Track 3 Your harmony will now be written to the track and you ll get a confirmation dialog Message The harmony may be removed from the track at any time even after you ve saved and re loaded the song This is done Harmony conversion completed successfully There were 280 notes on the track and with harmony there are now i 1 420 from the menu item MEL Remove Harmony or guitar solo from Melody Track Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 103 Printing Lead Sheet Style Printing Your created songs can be printed out in the sty
106. and in a Box as it looks after you load in a song 1 The Status Bar is used to show the program running status i e playback paused etc and the name of the song at the top of the screen 2 The Synth Window is the area between the Status Bar and the Piano Keyboard where instrument patches are set and levels are adjusted This area also includes buttons for Band in a Box plug ins 3 The Tool Bar area under the piano keyboard has buttons for program controls and for direct access to important program features and menus 4 The Title Window displays song information including the title tempo style key chorus and harmony settings 5 The Chordsheet area occupies the lower part of the screen Chord changes for the song are typed into the numbered bars cells in the sheet a and b part markers are entered here to switch between the a and b Band in a Box substyles 40 Chapter 5 The Main Screen Status Bar The first thing to note is that the name of the song that is open is identified in the window title at the top of the screen This feature is handy when you want to know the status and the title of your song at a glance You ll also see the length of the song in minutes and seconds this updates if you change the tempo and press the Play button Plug ins To launch the Drums Window click the Drums button or choose the GM Drum Kit Window option Once you do that the Drums Window will di
107. and you want to control the dynamics of the Soloist you should enable this feature Set the Trigger Playback Early to true to enable song playback to start before the Soloist has actually completed composing a solo Setting this setting to false disabled will instruct Band in a Box to completely compose a solo before song playback begins Set the Soloist Prefer Long phrases checkbox to true enabled if you would like the Soloist to use the longest musical phrases it Chapter 14 Reference knows Note This option may also increase Soloist creation times Disable this feature if you are using a slower or low memory equipped computer The Soloist Melodist Velocity Adjust box allows you to quickly boost or reduce the volume of the Soloist or Melodist part relative to the other instrument parts For a realistic mix they are set slightly louder than the other instruments parts in a song The default is 5 Slide Tracks This allows you to move any of the Bass Drums Piano Guitar Strings Melody or Soloist tracks ahead or behind by a certain amount You could for example slide the Bass track so it plays a little ahead of the rest of the band This has the effect of making the bass player drive the band and is useful in Jazz styles to make the music sound more exciting Chord Settings This launches the Chord Options dialog box where you can put in rests and pushes You can la
108. any extra instruments unless they are used in a song The drum window is cleared each time Play or Stop is pressed Chapter 10 Built in Drums 143 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions The StyleMaker Overview of the StyleMaker The StyleMaker is the section of the program that allows you to create brand new styles or edit existing styles This is done by recording patterns for each of the Drums Bass Piano Guitar and Strings parts If you don t want an instrument in a style you don t need to record any patterns for it A Pattern E Pattern Fills Endings Beat 4 Beat 2 Beat 1 Beat 8 Beat 4 Beat 2 Beat 1 Beat Endings Beat 4 Beat 2 Beat n A Ey TENT SAVE er es a ea ed The simplest style consists of 1 pattern each for the instruments that you want in the style If you like you can use options available to you called masks Masks are options that you set for a pattern to specify when you want the pattern to be played There is a list of masks below Masks Available for Patterns Complex styles can be made allowing patterns to be recorded that are played only at certain times These are referred to as masks Substyle masks Substyle A or Substyle B Chord duration masks On chords lasting 1 2 4 or 8 beats Bar masks On certain bar numbers Beat masks On certain beat numbers Chord masks On certain types of chords Roman Numeral masks On certain Roman numerals e g II chord 1
109. ar lead in will remain in the file Other Edit Functions In addition to the edit functions described elsewhere the Edit menu has many special options for configuring the program These are found in the Preferences and Preferences 2 dialogs Preferences Select Preferences from the Edit menu or press Option P This dialog box allows you to set various settings These are all saved in the Band in a Box folder in a file named Intrface BBW 76 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Preferences Boost Vel of Pushes by 0 vi Show Chords w push rest chars vi Show Rests in color Mi Allow any Rests W Allow any Pushes W Allow Style Pushes Chord Display Type W Allow Lead In Bars Ti Play Lead In even if Intro present W Audible Lead In Volume 64 Instrument Side Stick 37 Pattern C Smart Lead In Metronome During Recording W Allow Any Endings Limit Screen size to Unlimited id Menu Limit 30 100 1000 Boost Vel of Pushes by vi OK to Load Harmony w songs rd Change Harmony w new chords Har Volume Adjust oo vi OK to Load Style w songs wi Use MSB for Bank Roland Pause Play till MIDI or key Close window when not in BB i OMS FreeMIDI Playback in background Mi include Patch Changes in MIDI files vi include 2 bar lead in in MIDI file M include Controllers Reverb Chorus pan _ Include Forced Channel Meta Event Write Chords Part Markers META event _ Include Gui
110. are Shift F8 and Ctrl Shift F8 Auto rename IBM songs will rename all song files in a folder using the song title as the name 214 Chapter 14 Reference Rename any Song on Disk or Rename Current Song on disk allows you to rename files Delete a Song from Disk deletes a song file without exiting the program Nuke it delete current song from disk deletes the current song Load Previous Style Load Next Style This function analogous to the Load Next Song function loads in the previous or next style in alphabetical order of the file name To load the next style in alphabetical order choose the menu item File File Utilities Load Next Style or use the hot key Command Shift F8 Control Command Shift F8 for the previous style Play Song generates an accompaniment and starts playback of the current song Replay Already Constructed Song plays an existing song arrangement from the beginning without regenerating a new arrangement Notation Window opens the Notation Page Setup takes you to the setup dialog for your printer Print opens the Print Options dialog Lyric Window opens a lyric entry line above the Notation Toolbar where lyrics can be typed in line by line Use the esc key to exit from the Lyric window Quit exits the program entirely Chapter 14 Reference 215 Edit Menu Undo Song Settings Z Cut AX Copy C Paste deW Copy From To XC Copy Rests Erase From To XK Intro Ba
111. ases you can also view the guitar on those tracks The styles can be set to use different types of voicings for guitar For example there are Jazz Pop and Folk open position voicings Also some of the styles allow the guitar to play advanced chords and inversions Some of the styles play chord patterns so the chord in the song might be F7 but the guitar plays a walking chord pattern of F7 Cm7 G Abdim F7 A on each beat There can be finger picking styles that have a lowest note alternate between root and 5 Guitar parts use channels 11 to 16 for the notes corresponding to strings 1 to 6 of the guitar When the notes are output to MIDI they are re channeled to the Guitar channel so that it only uses 1 channel When you make a MIDI file the notes will all be written on the single guitar channel Some other sequencers 166 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions e g PowerTracks Pro for Windows will recognize guitar parts on all 6 channels so if you want to write the MIDI file from an intelligent guitar style you can set Band in a Box to do this from the Edit Preferences Write Guitar part on 6 channels option As previously mentioned you don t need to be aware of the details of how this is done you just play the styles as usual Let s Examine the Intelligent Guitar Styles Load in the song Freddie MGU from the Songs folder This is a demo song for the style Freddie STY The exclamation point
112. ass Part is mainly Walking Bass Fewest Chords Y Bass Part Type You can set this to Root only Root third and 5 or Walking bass If you choose Root Only the Chord Wizard will assume that any bass note is the root of the chord Choosing Root 3 5 will cause the Chord Wizard to assume that the bass pattern is mainly on the root 3 5 of the chord If you choose Walking bass it will assume that the bass notes can be changing and can include many notes beside the root Setting the Walking bass line will likely result in fewer chords overall than setting the Root only option MI Allow Sus chords suspended MI Allow 7th seventh chords e g C7 Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes Chords Allowed The setting for Allow Sus chords determines if chords like Csus or Bbsus7 will be included The Allow 7 chords specifies if 7 chords like C7 or Bbm7 would be allowed Simple Rock songs might not have 7 chords or SUS chords Allowing chords with no thirds should be set in a hard rock song or similar song with power chords that might not contain the 3 of the chords C Lowest bass note is delayed Bass Delay Usually a bass player plays the root of the chord at or near the time when the chord changes But in solo piano playing or some bass styles the bass doesn t state the root until later on and this setting should be set to delayed in a solo piano style of
113. at is controlled with the bottom two rows your computer s QWERTY keyboard The bottom row of keys plays chord tones the second row plays passing tones you play any key in either row and never make a mistake Add a Solo That s right Band in a Box can solo like a pro in over 200 styles f ol Use the Solo button on the main screen to open the Select _ Soloist dialog box and choose from over 200 Soloist profiles 28 Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Select Soloist Soloist Type Swing 8th notes X Mall Fav Search Go to Solo in a Style similar to 1 Bebop Saxophone 2 Bebop Piano 3 J Henderson Tenor Sax 4 Jazz Swing Vibes 5 Jazz Sw Quartet 4 Inst 6 Jazz Waltz Piano 7 Jazz Waltz Trumpet 8 Jazz Waltz Quartet Vibes Memo Database J_SWING ST3 Basic bebop Piano solo will work with most swing styles Check Double Time if tempo is slower __ Double Time Instrument Choose _ Clear_ No Change Harmony Clear Style Choose Clear Change Instrument 9 Even 8ths Bosa Rock Trumpet 10 Even 8ths Bosa Rok Guitar 11 Even 8ths Bossa Rock Vibes 12 Even 8ths Bosa Rok DistGit 13 Blues Acc Piano 14 Charlie P Swing 16ths 15 Blues Jazz Guitar 16 Blues Rock Organ 17 Blues Quartet Even 8ths 18 Charlie P Swing 16ths 19 Blues Even 8ths Jz Guitar 20 Blues Even 8ths Organ Solo Mode Solo Which
114. atic Music Features Chords and or Melody Ei Generate Chords Wi Auto Titles Wi Generate Intro d Kill Intro Mi insert Bass Pedals C KillPedal W Generate Melody Kill Mel M Solo in Middle Ch Kill Solo IM Allow Style Changes F g he Fi Chords Melody Chords amp Mel Form AABA 32 Bars Y choruses 2 Defaults Tempo 95 V AutoTempo A2 transpose v This section determines what aspects of the song are going to be generated Ifyou want to generate Chords Melody and an Intro make sure that these items are selected If you d like a Pedal Bass figure during the intro and at the end of sections select the Insert Bass Pedals option Selecting Solo in Middle Ch will generate an improvisation in the middle choruses of the song If you d like Band in a Box to generate a title for your song select the Auto Titles option The Allow Style Changes checkbox if set allows a Melodist to load in the style associated with it If you don t want Melodists to change the current style that you have loaded then deselect this option The Auto Titles option will generate a new title for the song Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 109 The Form selection box allows you to choose between a song generated with a specific form AABA 32 bars or no form The AABA defaults to 32 bar form which is the most popular song form Note Melodists may alternatively be set to 64 bars e g Me
115. ault To prevent any changes of volume inside Band in a Box uncheck this box Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 87 Style Volume Changes Default LE Styles occasionally come with volume changes To prevent these uncheck this box Extra Note Offs Default Leave this box unchecked unless you are having trouble with stuck notes when you press Stop If you check this box Band in a Box will send a sweep of all notes off Concert Pitch Adjust Default 0 This is useful for non concert instruments such as Saxophone or Trumpet The output is transposed so that you see the music in one key and it plays in another Trumpet players and other Bb instruments should set Concert Pitch Adjust to 2 i e minus 2 Alto Sax and other Eb instruments should set Concert Pitch Adjust to 3 Here s an example of an Alto player using Band in a Box by setting the concert pitch adjust to 3 If the song is in the concert key of C transpose the song to A using the key signature box on the main screen The song will display in the key of A but with the Concert Pitch Adjust set to 3 it will play 3 semitones higher in the key of C So the Alto player can read the music in the transposed key while hearing it in the concert key The song can also be printed out in the key of A The View GS Map button opens a list of General MIDI patch numbers for quick reference View GS Map a Press the Harmony button to launch the Harmon
116. ave an infinite MIDI feedback loop that can hang up your Mac Launch Rax go to its Preferences MIDI window and select IAC as the Input port Hint These same principles would apply for communicating with other CoreMIDI applications via Panther IAC On Non GS Synthesizers Avoid GS Commands Reset Sound Canvas to Factory Reset Sound Canvas And Send BB vY Master Volume uses MIDI messages instead of GS GM Sysex Master Combo Volume Adjust Roland GS Master Volume Message Reverb Type v General MIDI Master Volume Message Chorus Type GS is a Roland authored set of SysEx commands GS is recognized by many but not all Roland synthesizers GS is also recognized by some non Roland synthesizers In a perfect world the worst that would happen to a non GS synthesizer is that the synthesizer would simply ignore GS messages and therefore GS parameters like Master Volume or Reverb would not work However there are many synthesizers available especially amateur written softsynths It is possible that you may find occasional devices that can get confused and malfunction if presented with GS messages In order to make sure you get the control response you expect and avoid possible malfunctions on some synthesizers Unless you know that your synthesizer understands GS messages make sure to specify MIDI control messages 212 Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X Chapter 14 Reference Band in a Box Me
117. ay play along Play button play from play from any bar playing songs plug ins possible substitutions PowerTracks Pro Preview button preview chords Program hints QuickTime Rax read in chords record melody Recording ReFresh Soloist Registration Form re harmonizing replay Replay button Roland RA root Save MIDI file select MIDI file Select Ports Instruments sequencers 264 42 80 73 69 87 13 26 12 73 73 25 l2 41 204 167 203 67 23 206 210 69 28 38 125 118 267 201 73 73 89 67 205 76 187 210 166 Index settings soloist song shortcut txt Shrink slash note Slide tracks Smart Notes solo around melody Soloist 10 steps custom solo demo harmony note density phrasing selecting slash chords style technical notes using wizard Wizard Soloists number increased solos Song entering chords save settings song endings option song list song memo Songs Embelleshment 116 76 85 84 68 205 84 44 118 174 119 91 116 20 173 116 120 116 117 117 44 116 28 76 55 26 84 228 Embellishment framing Intros loading Patches Allowing save options saving Substyles Changing Tempo Change at bar spacing standard MIDI file standard notation Status bar step enter Stereo Stop button stopping songs STY button Style Changing Loading Style Change StyleMaker Bass Making Patterns Beat Mask Chord playback Chord Type Drum Fill On Substyle D
118. ay the song without regenerating the parts Edited instrument parts can be permanently saved to a MIDI file with the MID button The Melody and Soloist tracks aren t affected only the instrument parts generated by the program Play the Jukebox Use the Jukebox for continuous playback of a list of Band in a Box songs Click the Juke button to open the Juke Box Options dialog You ll see a list of options that lets you control how the songs in the chosen directory are played When you have chosen the options you want click PLAY JUKE BOX to play all the songs in the selected directory folder Juke Box Options Mi include Songs without Melodies M Audible lead in Mi Vary Melody Instrument Use Tap in click to start Hide Song Name Random Play C Alphabetical Change Harmony w each song Harmony range Q to 100 Generate Solos Wi Auto Choose Soloists wv Change Soloist w each chorus Preview Switch to next song after Te Bars enter 99 bars for 1 chorus Cancel Set Cue Tap Options Use the Preview feature to automatically audition a complete directory of songs by playing a part of each song and then moving on to the next one or use the lt and gt cursor buttons to navigate manually through the list of juke box songs Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 31 Automatic Songs The Melodist Feel like composing a brand new song With Band in a Box you can compose a new song in th
119. ay to quickly make Music with Band in a Box For best results get the latest QuickTime download update from www quicktime com CoreMIDI is the OS X standard MIDI driver method CoreMIDI facilitates communication with external MIDI devices and it also enables inter application piping of MIDI data between MIDI applications 206 Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X CoreMIDI requires some setup but is not terribly complicated CoreMIDI with a MIDI Interface and External Synthesizers If you have not done so already follow the manufacturer s instructions to install your MIDI interface Installation details may vary depending on the manufacturer and the model of your MIDI Interface Hint It is helpful to occasionally check your manufacturer s web site and download install MIDI Interface driver updates which might become available Apple Audio MIDI Setup Application Audio MIDI Setup is usually found in your Applications folder It can be helpful to locate Audio MIDI Setup in the Finder then drag its icon to the Dock so it will be easy to launch the program from the Dock when necessary Audio MIDI Setup can also be launched from Band in a Box 1 i MIDI Settings M CoreMIDI Audio MIDI Setup CoreMIDI choose ports Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime CD Audio MIDI Setup Audio Devices View Icon Size Configuration Add Device Remove Device Show Info Rescan MI
120. c is normally notated Chord Vert Pos The chord vertical position affects the printout not the display it controls how high the chords will be printed above the staff If set to 5 the chords will be written 5 notes above the top of the Staff i e 5 notes above the F at high D If your piece contains a lot of high notes then set the chord position to a high setting If you re using a big font e g 32 point music font size you should set the chord height to a low value 1 or 2 so it won t be too high and encroach on the staff above Default 5 Range 1 to 10 Ae Gb FY Chord Display Height 10 Ab 7 F7 Chord Display Height 1 Show Key Signature If turned off you won t have the key signature box displayed on the Notation screen which will save some space on the screen Usually set it to true Show Bar Beats Lines Show Note Durations Show Velocity Lines These options are for the Staff Roll mode and determine which lines will show up Normally you ll want all of them displayed 100 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics Band in a Box ill automatically use the chord tones 1 3 5 and 7 in choosing its enharmonics If Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics is checked Band in a Box will also use the enharmonics for the passing tones of the chord scale Enharmonics for Chord Tones are automatically based on the chord as shown For example on an F 7 chord in the key of Eb the Ab note
121. checkbox The Tutor part uses the MIDI Thru part to playback on You can control volume panning etc by using the Thru settings at the top of the main Band in a Box screen You can select the patch in the Tutor dialog The tutor will display Jazz Pop and Folk voicings in easy medium and advanced forms The advanced forms use inversions and changing patterns of chords while the easy ones just stick to the common campfire chords Show muted high note of 3 note comping One of the tutors uses 3 note Jazz voicings to simulate the famous Big Band chord guitar comping styles If you use this you ll only see 3 notes in the chords of course Since it sometimes helps to see the entire 4 chord voicing in this case there is the option to show the muted note as well Note This applies to the Guitar Tutor There is also the option to show this for the Guitar Styles This option is present in the Guitar Options Dialog Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 199 The Guitar Tutor stays enabled until you change the Guitar track to another track for example to change it to the Bass track You can easily re enable it by clicking on the Tutor button again Using the Guitar Tutor By enabling the Tutor you ll see and optionally hear guitar chords played on the guitar along to any song Load in a Jazz song and start it playing e g Old Folks MGU You ll notice that the associated style GARNER STY doesn t have any guitar ch
122. chord it will determine the fret position that it s most possible to play that chord with Otherwise if it s a single note it will play it at the current position at the guitar neck If you want to convert an existing melody to a customized Guitar part this command is a good starting point and you can edit the track further to achieve a better result Utilities A Utilities sub menu has utility functions to eliminate note overlap and transpose the Melody Chapter 14 Reference 243 Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops Transpose One Octave DOWN 3 1 Transpose One Octave UP tb Transform Waltz Melody amp Soloist to 4 4 Transform 4 4 Melody amp Soloist to Waltz Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops eliminates note overlap while double stops are either preserved or eliminated Transpose One Octave DOWN Transpose One Octave UP transposes the Melody part one octave in either direction This is often useful if the Melody instrument has been changed Transposing can be done while the song plays SOL Menu Generate and Play a Solo Start a Soloists File Edit a Soloists File Edit Current Soloists file Refresh Soloist F7 v OK to Load Soloists w song y Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Edit Soloist Track Track Type Generate and Play a Solo opens the Select Soloist dialog where a pre
123. clef with ledger lines instead of on the treble clef If the split point is above middle C and a note in the music is high enough that any of the ledger lines above the bass clef would overwrite the treble clef the note will be placed on the treble clef Inserted Note Defaults Ifthe Snap to Grid Lines checkbox is checked the inserted note will be lined up with the closest grid line quantized So you don t have to click exactly on the beat to have the note inserted exactly on the beat Duration is the duration that will be assigned For example if a whole note is inserted with a duration of 80 the note would last 4 80 3 2 beats The Channel and Velocity settings determine the MIDI channel and velocity of inserted notes Play Inserted Notes If the Play Inserted Notes checkbox is checked notes that you insert will sound briefly as they are inserted This lets you hear that the note you inserted sounds correct Entering Chords Using the Notation Window This is identical to the operation of the chordsheet You use the Current Time Indicator time bar to see where you are in the bar Then type in the chords as you do in Band in a Box 102 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing This is the Current Time Indicator le Click on this line to change the time Ab Gb F Bb7 To type the Ab that you see here type Ab Then to move to the Gb7 that is on beat 3 press the RIGHT CURSOR Key To enter an Ab chord on beat 1
124. ctual chord names or any music theory This feature also illustrates the differences between various chord types 238 Chapter 14 Reference Play Current Chord Click on any chord and use this command or press Shift Return to instantly hear how it sounds MEL Menu Import Melody from MIDI File Import Melody from Clipboard Record Melody Record Melody From Bar Step edit Notes Quantize Melody Humanize w straight feel Humanize w swing feel Humanize Melody Transpose Melody Copy 1st chorus to all song Kill entire melody Kill Melody Choruses Adjust Level of Melody TimeShift Melody ticks Insert Beats In Melody Delete Beats in Melody Copy to Soloist Track Move To Soloist Track Swap Melody and Soloist Track Melodist Generate Chords and Mel Melody Maker Track Type Ww Embellish Melody during playback SSE Embellish Melody Dialog wii Convert Harmony to Melody Track Remove Harmony or guitar solo from Melody Track Generate Guitar Chord Solo Rechannel to Guitar Display Utilities Chapter 14 Reference 239 Import Melody from MIDI File allows you to import MIDI data from a file MID into the Melody track Import Melody from Clipboard allows you to import MIDI data that has been pasted into the clipboard e g from a sequencer Record Melody launches the Record Tracks dialog to record a MIDI melody Record Melody From Bar lets you click on any bar to start recordi
125. d C2 if you type in Csus2 These allow someone to type in Csus2 and the program will accept it You can also use it for shortcuts like if you entered maj7 Band in a Box would let you type Cj for CMaj7 See the file pgshortc txt in the Band in a Box folder for examples of shortcuts Refresh Chord Shortcuts After editing chord shortcuts in the SHORTCUT TXT file you must use this command to save the changes MIDI Setup Connecting to MIDI Here is an illustration of the connections for a MIDI system using a MIDI Interface to connect to an external MIDI synthesizer Band R Midi p Midi p Midi p Speakers In Driver Interface Synthesizer Box oo The Band in a Box program running on your computer sends a stream of MIDI data via the MIDI Driver to your MIDI interface The MIDI interface transmits information between the computer and your synthesizer The Synthesizer or Sound Module e g Roland Sound Canvas produces the musical instrument sounds Band in a Box tells it what notes to play and how to play them Stereo Speakers or Headphones are connected to your synthesizer so that you may hear the music Your MIDI setup could also be configured to use the built in sounds of QuickTime Musical Instruments or a virtual software synthesizer such as the Roland VSC Virtual Sound Canvas There are also MIDI systems such as OMS and FreeMIDI that can be configured by the user FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band In A B
126. d but you want to record with a live feel Use the Wizard to record notes from the computer s QWERTY keyboard for a track that s more natural than step time Here s how it works Enable the Wizard checkbox 2 Press r key to record 128 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 3 As the song plays play the melody on any keys on the bottom two rows of the QWERTY keyboard in the rhythm of the melody The wizard notes won t be the correct melody of course but don t worry about that as you record When you re finished look in the Notation window You ll see notes in the right places and with the correct durations but with the wrong pitches 4 Drag the notes with the mouse and drop them on the correct place on the staff You ll hear the notes play as you drop them and the names will show in the note name box For sharps flats and naturals hold down the shift key control key or key respectively You ll end up with a melody that sounds like it was recorded live without the rigid feel of tracks entered in step time Tip If you have the wizard On the spacebar won t stop playback You need to press Esc key to stop playback when the Wizard is on This is to prevent stopping the song inadvertently if you mistakenly hit the spacebar while playing the wizard Importing Pre Recorded MIDI Data Standard MIDI files can be read in to the Melody or Soloist tracks from MIDI files or from the clipboard You can read in
127. d in 66 99 blue and there will be a letter a or b indicating the part marker Notation Modes There are 3 modes to the Notation window 1 Notation Mode To display or print notation 2 Editable Notation Mode To enter or edit notation 3 Staff Roll Mode To enter edit notation in Staff Roll format fN Y You can toggle between each of the modes by pressing the Notation Mode button on the Notation toolbar Shift click on the N button will back up one notation mode Standard Notation Window The Standard Notation window is for display entry of melodies and chords or any track You see the melody chords on screen just as you would in a lead sheet You can even display the Bass Drums Guitar Piano or Strings tracks in notation Handles Jazz eighth notes and triplet figures correctly Automatic options like auto durations clean notation mono display minimize rests and engraver spacing produce very musical and readable notation Notes can be entered in step time clicking with the mouse on the staff or on the onscreen piano or in real time from a MIDI keyboard Editable Notation Mode This allows you to enter or edit notation Usually the Melody and Soloist tracks are the only ones you ll want to edit 99 66 99 66 Note Although you could edit the other tracks e g Bass track your edits would be lost when the song is re composed when you press Play unless you make a
128. d numbered bars insert a beats per bar 3 and on even bars insert of beats per bar 2 This needs to be done for every bar Style Changes at any Bar You can specify a new style at any bar of the song so that you can use many styles within the same song To change styles at any bar Move the cursor highlight bar to the bar for the style change Press the F5 key to open the Edit Bar Settings dialog or choose the Edit Bar Settings menu command or use the keystrokes Option B Edit Bar Settings beats this bar 4 Change Style to Tempo Change STY Relative Tempo Change Q i Send patches with style change Use the Change Style to button to select a style change for that bar If you prefer use the STY button to select a style using the StylePicker dialog To remove the style change at this bar press the Clear button Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 65 You should select a style that is present in the Styles folder in Band in a Box or the same folder where the song resides Note If you want to mix styles with 3 4 and 4 4 time signatures you should make the main style used in the song a 4 4 style You could then change back to 3 4 at bar 1 if you want When you select a style change you ll notice that there is a red frame drawn around the bar line This indicates that there is a style change or other change at that bar found in the Edit Bar Settings dialog Tempo Change At
129. e Allowing Changes 87 Changes 74 window title 41 Wizard 43 instrument 44 playing 44 recording 44 smart notes 44 Wizard play along 28 Registration Form Please register your program Registering your PG Music software entitles you to free unlimited technical support advance notice of product upgrades and news about new product releases If you haven t registered your PG Music software yet please take a few moments and do so now How to Register Mail to PG Music Inc 29 Cadillac Avenue Victoria BC V8Z 1T3 Canada Fax to 1 250 475 2937 or toll free to 1 877 475 1444 On line at www pgmusic com Telephone 1 250 475 2874 toll free in North America at 1 800 268 6272 or 800 4746 8742 where Universal International Freephone Service is available Name Address City State Province Zip Postal Code Country Telephone number Fax number E mail address Computer check IBM MAC Model Operating system e g Windows 9x XP Macintosh OS X _ What MIDI interface are you using What primary synth sound card do you use Favorite Styles Jazz __ Rock ____ Pop ____ Country ____ Other Purchased from Date of purchase Comments Sug gestions Registration Form 267
130. e song complete with intro chords melodies full 5 part instrument arrangement pedal bass figures solo improvisations and even an automatic title You can customize the song to your liking regenerate any of the elements chords melody etc or any part of the song until you get it right Either way the end product is a complete song What a great compositional and educational tool Sight Reading You can put the Band in a Box Melodist in Jukebox mode so that it is continually generating and playing new songs in succession By displaying the Melody track in Notation you can then sight read along with the Melody Since the melodies are unique this is the Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 113 ideal type of sight reading practice playing along to music that you haven t heard before Ear Training Play along with the Melodies and chords that the program is generating without looking at the music Since Band in a Box is always using intelligent chord progressions and melody phrasing that a professional would actually use you are learning to recognize chord progressions and melody phrases that you will encounter in real playing situations Guitarists can extend the Sight Reading concept by just watching the on screen guitar fretboard play the melody notes If a student were watching his teacher reading music he would watch the guitar not the sheet music This is because guitar 1s a very visual instrument Similarly yo
131. e Generation The Melodist will optionally give a title to the songs it writes Song titles can also be generated on demand with the User Auto Generate Song Title menu command Ctrl Shift S The song title will appear in the Title window Visit to Kenya J_WYNT_E STY Repeat the Auto Generate Song Title command until the program comes up with a suitable title for your song Band in a Box will keep generating new titles for as long as it takes to get the right one Automatic Solo Generation The Soloist Pick any song or chords in any style and choose a Soloist Band in a Box then creates and plays a professional quality solo in the style of your choice In addition to great Band in a Box accompaniment you can hear sensational solos as well showing you exactly what notes are played Choose from soloists in a style similar to great Jazz musicians such as Django Reinhardt John Coltrane Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 115 Country Pop soloists and others or create your own soloists using the Soloist Maker Select a Soloist To select a pre made Soloist click on the Solo button on the toolbar press Shift F4 or choose SOL Generate and Play a Solo This will launch the Select Soloist dialog Select Soloist Soloist Type Swing 8th notes v Mai Memo Database JjJ_SWING ST3 Basic bebop Sax solo will work with most swing styles Solo in a Style similar to Check Double Time i
132. e Guitar Patch is selected using the Guitar Patch field Frets To Move field If set to zero the guitar chord solo will be limited to chords that can be played within the current position If set to 5 for Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 181 example the chords will be limited to chords that can be played within the current position and up to 5 frets away from the current position Force Open Position forces all of the guitar voicings to the open position The exception is when the melody notes are so high that they can t be played using open position voicings If the melody is in a high range and you want a forced open position you should likely transpose the melody to a lower octave prior to generating the solo Onnew chord 50 ticks 90 5 Beat 1 co ticks 90 Beat 3 110 ticks 70 9 Beat 2 150 ticks 70 g of Beat 4 150 ticks 70 Passing Note 50 ticks 0 ri The settings for Note duration thresholds to get a chord refer to the length that a note must be before a chord will be generated Looking at the settings above for Guitarist 2 these would be interpreted as follows Ifa note occurs and it is the First Note of a New Chord and the note is not followed by another note for at least 50 ticks 120 ticks 1 quarter note then a chord will get voiced 90 of the time Ifa note occurs not the first note of a chord that is on Beat 1 of a bar and the note is not followed by anothe
133. e Lateness by 120ppq 0 Harmony Increase amp th note spacing by 120ppq 0 Change Instrument Set Increase Velocity by 100 100 0 Change Style to sTy Clear Maximum notes in 1 beat 255 ATY is Swing 8th notes SILER Ma Ms Mic Mop Copy Paste Import Export Save As oK Cancel Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 175 The Melodist Maker In addition to the 50 Melodists supplied with the program this module lets you define or edit your own melodists You can choose the parameters to control the type of chords melody and intro to be generated as well as a number of settings controlling song form theme continuity endings type anticipations feel style harmony soloist patch changes and more Launching the Melodist Maker Melodist Maker The Melodist Maker is launched from the Melodist Selection dialog Press the Melodist Maker Edit Edit button to launch the Melodist Editor dialog Melodist Editor Dialog Melodist Editor Num 18 Swing 64 bar ColeP Title Swing 64 bar ColeP Memo Swing 64 bar ColeP autoloads SINATRA STY Melodist is Even l6 th notes Unique Themes Choose 5T2 Database Unusual Placed Phrases ST2 style MELPOP1 S sT2 Default Simple 1st 2nd endings ST2 is Choose Unusual chord Patch change Force Long Phrases Choose Mix Minor and Major Chord Progs Harmony O lt noharmony gt pwCho
134. e a Soloist and attach a Harmony such as Big Band Brass to create phenomenally quick and interesting Big Band Arrangements automatically Generate a standard MIDI file or print them out for you and your friends Have the Soloist play a solo according to your accompaniment and arrangement Trade 4 s with the Soloist you solo for 4 bars BB solos for 4 bars etc Concentrate separately on different aspects of your playing with assistance from the Wizard From soloing with proper phrasing and feel and the best notes to accompanying a soloist with confidence and authority Use the Soloist track to record another part in addition to the Melody and other parts provided by Band in a Box Generate a Soloist on chords keys that you would like to practice For example if you want to work on your II V7 I progressions you can just type the chords you want and generate a solo to play over those changes As the solo plays you see the notation you can sight read along Pressing the Loop Screen checkbox on the notation will loop the notation the screen so you can master each 4 bar phrase II V I and then move ahead to the next one A Few Technical Notes on the Soloist 1 The Soloist has its own separate channel and settings But when the Soloist uses a Harmony it becomes linked to the Thru Harmony channels and settings Since we are already using 12 of the available 16 MIDI channels in Band in a Box we didn t want to u
135. e are now 643 Playing the Guitar Chord Solo The playback will begin automatically and you ll see the guitar voicings on the guitar neck For example at Bar 8 the chord is a C dim and Band in a Box has voiced a Bb melody note with a 4 note guitar voicing of Bb E C and G Guitar 5th Position Key of Am Track Displayed is Melody 2 O O ch Solo B C This particular solo will be played in a single position because those are the parameters of this particular guitarist Other Guitarists will play in a range of positions e g Guitarist 1 or in open position e g Guitarist 8 As you listen to the solo you ll notice the following 1 Some of the notes are left as melody and some are assigned to chords 2 Wide varieties of guitar chords are used including some advanced chords All of them are popular chords played by real guitarists there are no theoretical chords Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 123 3 The chords are strummed to simulate a real guitar player 4 The Track Type for the Melody has been set to Guitar and the MIDI file will be saved with the Guitar Channels 11 16 preserved which preserves the fret positions Note All of these items can be customized in the Guitarist Maker which is launched by the Edit button in the Select Guitarist dialog Redo Part of the Solo Let s redo part of the solo at a higher fret position This particular song GIT_TEST MGU has 6 choruses and the la
136. e assigned these instruments can be quickly and easily set Use General MIDI instrument numbers If you use a custom patch map it will handle the conversion to your synth s non GM patch numbers always enter GM patch numbers for the favorite instruments A Favorite Combo is a group of patch changes 1 for each part that are sent out as a batch when you send one of the combos Chapter 14 Reference 233 Favorite Instruments 7 Faronte Instruments _ g Faronte Combos _ Bass BEE 4 35 26 27 38 39 40 59 68 33 33 34 34 36 33 38 29 40 40 Fiano 1 ze fmm dbname fis ome ie Pomme owe fm a 1 S S j a e 4 19 Drums 1 m Gy 2a Aa ee C eE Len Sele mee e Le E e Guitar Ap ee aaea a a a a A a aa aS Soloist 1 a ee ie oe Oe ee pe non te siring 21 324 34 34 55 56 89 11149 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 34 Melody 1 5 25 27 49 63 60 67 74 91 1 25 27 57 58 66 67 72 74 53 Thru 1 3 25 27 49 63 60 67 74 FI O OF O O oO oO O O O ODO Use General Midi Instrument s TT E I not your synth patch s Ee Edit Drum Kit Note Values If you have been unable to find a preset drum map that matches your synth s drum notes then you may need to type in the drum notes that your sound source uses To do this you need to hook your MIDI controller up to play the Drum sounds from the Keyboard Play up and down the keyboard to hear all the drum sounds Locate note 36 as a starting point Type the MIDI note numbers for th
137. e style of your choice complete with intro chords melody arrangement and improvisations all created by the program All you have to do is pick from one of the Melodists and press OK the program then automatically generates the intro chords melody and arrangement in the chosen style It even auto generates a title You can go from nothing to a completed song in less than 1 second Once the song is generated the chords and melody are part of the regular Band in Box tracks so may be edited printed and saved as with any other song You can also auto regenerate any part of a song and modify it to suit you The Melodist will also generate a melody over an existing chord progression A Melodist Juke Box mode creates and performs new compositions in succession Aside from the compositional values of the Melodist the features can be used as a powerful practicing aid improving sight reading by reading the melodies generated in various keys and ear training improving your ear by playing along with the chord progressions in the generated songs Launching the Melodist Melodist To launch the Melodist press the Melodist button on the main screen or use the Shift F5 hot keys Generate Chords and or Melody Create C amp M in a style similar to Chords and or Melody Key 1 Pop 16ths Pad Bell 0 M Generate Chords Mi Auto Titles Any Key v 2 Pop 16ths KennyG Sopr Sax 3 Pop 16ths LMays w soloist v Gen
138. e the embellished notes When Stop is pressed the notation reverts to the original unembellished melody The embellishment changes timing of notes durations velocities legato as well as adding grace notes additional notes and turns Here is a before and after example that shows a typical embellishment of a melody Original unembellished Melody As you can see in the notation examples the embellished melody adds anticipation in bar 9 and in bar 10 adds extra notes and timing changes to spice up the melody Using the Embellisher If you disable the Embellisher by de selecting the Embellisher checkbox the melody or solo will play as normal with no changes There is a Melody Embellisher dialog This allows you to Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 133 Customize the settings of the Embellisher Choose Embellisher type from presets Make a particular embellishment permanent The Melody Embellisher dialog is launched from the MEL Embellish Melody Dialog menu item control option l or the Embellisher grace note button on the main screen Melody Embellisher Mi Live Auto embellish during every playback Settings Preset iM Humanize Vels Durs timing Memo Total Notes 481 Trumpet Octave adj 0 av pitch 67 ideal 70 Extra Notes 1 Turns 5 Doubled Notes 1 Grace Notes 5 Anticipated Notes 42 Reduced Antic Mi Less Anticipations 13 Vibrato Notes 27 vi Adjust Octave Mi Antici
139. e various instruments as you find them on your drum machine or keyboard Save Load MIDI Setup Drum Kit Allows you to save different custom MIDI setups or load in preset or custom setups Send Sys Ex File is a command that sends SysEx information to your MIDI device Style Aliases Let s say you ve got a new style for jazz called Dizzy You can create an alias so that when Band in a Box looks for a Jazz Swing style it will load in Dizzy instead so you don t have to make changes to all your songs And when you have found a new favorite style just change the alias You can also load or save sets of Alias files and share them with others To make an alias click on the original style then select the style you would like to load substitute in its place If you want to type in a style name that you don t have use the Custom button When you have successfully made an alias you will notice that there will be a small arrow in the Styles box on the main screen indicating that you have an alias loaded 234 Chapter 14 Reference Style Aliases List of Style Aliases Original Style Substitution ZZJAZZ 5TY gt J DIZZY STY 0 ZZJAZZ STY J DIZZY STY no alias defined n m no alias defined Choose Choose no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined W Allow Any Style Aliases no alias defi
140. e was Default SOL This stores the Soloist names These configuration files have the same names in OS X as they did in previous versions of Band in a Box e Default HAR Default GIT Default MEL same names in OS9 These store the Harmony Guitar and Melodist names e MySetup DK Same name in OS9 This file stores the drum kit patch map information e DefaultM Ali Same name in OS9 This file stores the names of style aliases used If you want to reset Band in a Box to default settings you can erase the 3 files Intrface_OS X BBW Band in a Box Preferences_OS X and MySetup DK It is easy to find these files from the Finder sort by date and they will likely be the most recently written files to the Band in a Box folder About Hot Key Names on the Menus When hotkeys are listed on the menus we now use the OS X recommended symbols For example the picture shown here is from the Finder menu 22 Chapter 3 Summary of New Features Finder About Finder Preferences dh 3 This represents the command key Empty Trash CEA ia me up arrow is for the ca key Secure Empty Trash co This represents the Option Key The caret symbol represents the Services p Control key Hide Finder a6H Hide Others aH Show All New Program Hints Added Band in a Box supports the OS X style hint tags yellow windows that appear when you hold your mouse over a button menu item or dialog item In addition if you hold the Com
141. eMIDI and QuickTime OS X Rax will now receive MIDI from Band in a Box For testing purposes you can select the Apple DLS Music Device in the Rax Main Window Hint The Apple DLS Music Device is an Audio Unit softsynth which has properties very similar to the QuickTime Music Synthesizer Additional Music Device soft synthesizers are available from other manufacturers If you install additional third party Music Device softsynths they should show up in the Rax track selector Virtual Ports can be used to pipe Band in a Box playback into most CoreMIDI compatible sequencers and other MIDI software 0086 RaxTestSetup Si i Tempo 120 CPU Load E RAK nseri a2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Maser D Effects Pressel management MIDI Ghz DLSMusicDev mong en save Controis anya instruments Rax Program Window with the Apple DLS Music Device selected on Mixer Slot 1 Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X 211 Inter Application Communication with IAC Panther only With OS X 10 3 Panther or later you can also pipe MIDI between applications using an IAC bus Open Audio MIDI Setup enable the IAC driver and add one IAC port Hint Some IAC versions have a bug if using more than one IAC bus Go to the Band in a Box CoreMIDI Choose Ports dialog and select IAC on all output ports Hint Make sure IAC is NOT selected as the Band in a Box Input source or you can h
142. efault If checked the song will play in substyle B throughout the Middle Choruses The Middle Choruses include all choruses except the first and last If not checked the middle choruses will play a and b substyles as set in the chordsheet with part markers For example in Jazz Swing since the B substyle is Swing all of the middle choruses will have swing bass The A substyle is playing half Chapter 14 Reference Dod 228 notes on the bass Allow Pushes in Middle Choruses Default This is used if you have put pushes into a song but don t want the pushes to play in the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing so you may not want the pushes to play Allow Rests in First Chorus Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but don t want the rests to play in the first chorus Allow Rests in Middle Choruses Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but don t want the rests to play in the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing so you may not want the rests to play Allow Rests in Last Chorus Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but don t want the rests to play in the last chorus Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses Default This determines whether Pedal Bass effect will be allowed in middle choruses Allow Embellishment of Chords Default The Jazz styles include embellishment of chords This means
143. eived Close window when not in BB Closes the Band in a Box window when the Finder or another program is chosen OMS FreeMIDI Playback in background FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band In A Box OS9 booted from Mac Classic Enables OMS or FreeMIDI playback in the background Include Patch Changes in MIDI files This will include the patch instrument changes Include 2 bar lead in in MIDI file If you don t want to create a MIDI file containing the first 2 bars of the 2 1 2 3 4 count in you can select this option and the MIDI file will begin directly at bar 1 without the count in If there is a Melody pickup then the 2 bar lead in will remain in the file Include Controllers Reverb Chorus pan This will include the reverb chorus and panning settings Include Forced Channel Meta Event This will include the forced channel META event It is recognized by PowerTracks Pro Audio and other PG Music programs only Write Chords Part Markers META event Writes the chords and part markers to the MIDI file Include Guitar Position Controller This will insert a controller 84 which PG Music uses to indicate the fret position Since some synths also use this for Portamento Control you should use this setting with caution Write Soloist Part on channel 5 Normally the program writes the Soloist part on channel 8 Since that could also mean the left hand of a piano track using the convention of channel 8 9 for p
144. ell to an unused Bass pattern If you re recording a pattern lasting 8 beats record this on the top line A 8 beat This pattern will be used when the song has chords lasting 8 beats or more without a chord change Press the REC button to record the bass pattern You will need to wait during a 2 bar lead in Then you record the 2 bar pattern Play the pattern on a C7 chord You can use all 12 notes just play a pattern that you would have normally played in the song if the song were on a C7 chord C E G Bb When you re finished recording the pattern you ll see a dialog box listing all of the options available Just accept all of the defaults by pressing the OK button Press the SAVE button to save your new style Press the EXIT button to close the StyleMaker window and exit Make sure that you have saved the style first otherwise edits will be lost Creating New Styles Making Drum Patterns There are 2 screens in the StyleMaker associated with making drum patterns 1 The StyleMaker screen with drum patterns 2 The Drum Pattern Editor allowing step editing of patterns 1 The StyleMaker screen with drum patterns looks like this 152 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions iH A Pattern E Pattern The screen will look like this The solid box indicates the currently selected pattern Empty patterns are indicated by a 1 e patterns that have not been recorded yet If a pattern has been recorded there will
145. enor saxophone extra legato playing playing more on top of the beat than most jazz musicians and playing straighter 8th notes than usual swing 8th notes In addition you can set phrasing options such as how long the phrase should be and how much space to leave between phrases You can also set how outside the playing should be In the case of a John Coltrane style you set that to the maximum Then turn it loose and hear the soloist play over any song Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 173 10 easy steps to make a Soloist l Bring up the Soloist window by pressing the Solo Button or Shift F4 Select a blank spot in your list of soloists and press the Soloist Maker Edit button Insert the title of your soloist and any memo note you wish to add The Num field will be filled in for you Call this one Bebop Saxophone For the memo you can put in information like Basic bebop Sax solo will work with most swing styles Check Double Time if tempo is slower Choose the type of soloist 1 e Swing 8th notes Even 8th notes Swing 16th notes etc This should be set to Swing 8ths This style uses the default ST2 database JLISWING ST2 Another choice could be made from the Soloists folder by clicking on the ST2 button Press the Choose button to select the instrument the soloist should play i e Tenor Saxophone Note You may also select an instrument from the Patch Change
146. erate Intro Kill intro min key 20 4 Pop 16ths Calliope Lead 5 Pop 16ths Atmosphere 7 Pop 16ths Voice 8vb E Generate Melo y O Whole Song 8 Pop 16ths Phil C M Solo in Middle Ch Kill Solo gt Part of Song 9 POP 16 Always transpose A2 10 Pop 16ths Vibes Allow Style Changes Set Range 11 Swing Vibes 12 Swing Jazz Trumpet p 13 Swing Wes Groove Chords Melody Chords amp Mel Chorus 14 Swing Tenor octave below lt lt 15 Swing Garner Bars 16 Swing 8ths Sinatra Form AABA 32 Bars choruses 3 17 Swing Jazz Quintet TTT i wing J Quin Defaults Tempo 90 Mi AutoTempo Search Memo Database MELPOP1 ST v Insert Bass Pedals Kill Pedal Generate All Bar Melodist Juke Box Juke Songs Now v Change Melodists GoTo Pop 16ths Pad Bell autoloads R POP165S STY Instrument Pad Bell 7 Choose Clear Harmony Clear_ Write to Track Melody v Style R_POP16S STY Choose Clear Change Instrument From 1 To 50 Melodist Maker Edit Fav a2 Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Import A MIDI File With the amazing Band in a Box Chord Wizard you can convert any MIDI file into a Band in a Box song complete with Melody and Solo parts MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard Many people who play music by ear think of songs in terms of Chords and Melody How
147. ern may look like this CLOZED HI HAT 30 50 0 WOT 50 BO TO 0 30 TO so SHARE DRUM oo ae ee M a da a 2 Gl we TEE BA DRUM wo n gt 2 30 15 ao TB This pattern is in a timebase of 12 you see 4 beats with 4 divisions per beat In a Timebase 12 only the first three divisions of each beat are accessible The numbers are velocities Move around the Drum Pattern screen and type in the numbers as above These are velocities and should range between 0 and 127 The fastest way to put the numbers onto the screen is to use the hot keys on the bottom row of the typewriter keyboard XCVBNM or the velocity buttons 0 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 and 127 at the bottom right of the Drum Pattern Entry screen Using Alternate Drum Notes What are alternate notes Alternate notes can be entered for any note This tells Band in a Box to randomly choose a different note to the one specified For example you might want a note to be a closed high hat 80 of the time and an open high hat 20 of the time you might want a note to be high conga 60 and low conga 40 of the time or high tom 30 of the time and NO note the other 70 This allows one drum pattern to sound like many because it will be played different ways depending on which of the notes are picked How to put in an alternate note EDIT From the Drum Pattern Entry screen press the EDIT button This displays the Alternate Drum Notes dialog box
148. erns that will only work on certain types of chords For example you can record a specific riff that will only work on a minor 7th chord You then play the pattern on a Cmin 7 not a C7 There are chord types for most types of chords Interval Next Chord Usual Setting Any Interval This setting allows you to restrict the pattern to be played only if the next chord is a certain interval away For example you can record a bass pattern that is walking up a fourth and then assign an Interval of Up 4th so that the pattern would only be played if you re going up a 4th Half Octave Range Usual Setting Full Octave This is a new setting in the StyleMaker Usually a pattern will be picked on any of the 12 roots You can select a smaller range either A to D or Eb to Ab In this case the pattern would only be picked if the chord in the song is in that range 158 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Play Pushed how often Usual Setting 0 ticks to push pattern Usual Setting 0 Pushed patterns are patterns that are played before the chord begins Jazz styles typically use pushed patterns for the piano Patterns are recorded in the normal way non pushed and then you assign the of time and amount in ticks 120 ticks 1 beat to push the pattern The pattern only plays pushed in the song not in the StyleMaker Ok To Use Macro Notes Bass Usual Setting No Bass Macros are special notes that you record When they are played bac
149. es Disk 24 Rock On 36 60S44ROK 140 60 s Brit 4 4 Pop Rock SD 22 Examples 6 SBLUES 118 60 s Brit Rock Honky tonk Blues SD 22 6 SPOP16 114 60 s Brit Pop 16 SD 22 G SRKBAL 16 77 60 s Brit Rock Ballad SD 22 6 8_FAST 8 95 6 8 Fast Tempo SD 8 v Memo 00 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 Q0 Q0 O0 0 o Meditation Wave Play when chosen Preview on Double Click Re Build Print Search Open Auto Change MEL SOL Net Neen Nee O meeen eee Melody Patch 1 Show Styles Show All Styl ial se a iar a aaia kani y ie Y_ Rhodes Electric Piano hd l Selected Style Defaults to Current Style Cok Soloist patch Cancel The StylePicker v Prototype Style Defaults to Current Style Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial 11 Selecting a Style using the StylePicker This window shows styles listed by Styles Set number and by genre Select a Set or genre from the left pane and choose the specific style on the right pane There are memos and examples for each of the styles Styles with a similar feel and tempo range to the current selection prototype are marked with an asterisk These styles are possible substitutes for the prototype Styles marked with a caret symbol are similar in feel but have a different tempo range The style of your song can be changed at any bar by pressing the F5 key to launch the Edit Bar Settings dialog Method 3 Favorites Styles that you ve used previous
150. etc Find a patch by keyword by clicking the Search button and typing some letters that you know are in the name e g mando will find your mandolin patch and any others containing mando Note You can open a new patch file by pressing the Open PAT button You can also customize the names and descriptions of the patch file list to suit your tastes by pressing the Edit button and editing a small text file Press the Update button for your changes to take effect You can also open this window by selecting the M Choose Patch from Higher Bank menu item at the bottom of the menu Tool Bar Chapter 5 The Main Screen 45 The Play button starts generation and playback of a song The Stop button is to stop a song that is currently playing The Replay button allows you to replay a song without reconstructing it The Hold button pauses the currently playing song Press the Hold button again to resume playing the song The From button allows you to play a song from a particular bar The Rec button launches the Record Track dialog box allowing you to record a melody for your song The Lyrics button brings up a two line lyric display allowing you to type lyrics to a song The Notation button launches the Standard Notation Window Use the Open button to select a song to load into the program The Save button is to save a song to disk The MID button is for making
151. ever many MIDI files lack chord symbols so they become difficult to learn without the user having to figure out the chords in a time consuming process Now you can open up any MIDI file in Band in a Box and Band in a Box will automatically figure out the chords of the song for you It automatically analyzes the MIDI file figures out where the Bass Piano Melody and other tracks are and then figures out the chord changes for the song The chords are written onto the Band in a Box chordsheet like any other song This allows you to quickly learn how to play a song from a MIDI file just read it into Band in a Box and you ll see the chord symbols and then learn the melody You can also read tracks into the Melody and Soloist tracks To import the chords from a MIDI file blank the chordsheet by choosing File New Then select the menu item File Import Chords from MIDI File or press the keystrokes Ctrl Option I This launches the Chord Wizard dialog Chord Wizard MIDI File name Violet song mid Open Change F All Use Clipboard of lead in bars in MIDI file 2 Key Tempo 120 TimeSig 4 4 import Complete song Presets Insert to BB starting at bar 1 How many bars to import 103 M Auto interpret settings from MIDI file Part Options v Import Chords Bass part is on channel s 2 Chording track is on channel s 3 6 7 OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file v Open to Mel
152. ew chords Example If a harmony is played on bar 1 on a C chord and then the note is held as the chord changes to a Fm7 chord if this setting checked the harmony notes will change so that they will be still be playing chord tones If they don t the harmony sounds dissonant Leave this setting checked unless you have a specific reason to disable it The harmony is changed by moving the voices to the nearest chord tone Har Volume Adjust Raise or lower the overall volume of the Harmony with a range of 128 to 128 OK to Load Style w songs Leave this unchecked to audition the same style with several different songs Use MSB for Bank Roland Band in a Box sends General MIDI bank changes These can be sent in two ways Most synths e g Roland Korg Kawai use the Controller O for the bank This is the MSB Most Significant Byte method Check this option if you are using one of these synths Some synths use Controller 32 for the bank e g Peavey This is the LSB Least Significant Byte method If you have one of these synths then uncheck the Use MSB for Bank Roland Tip If your synth requires both MSB and LSB bank changes use the button patches on higher banks Pause Play till MIDI or key Chapter 14 Reference Allows playback to be started from another keyboard or the computer keyboard The Band in a Box arrangement will be generated then the program will pause until the MIDI or keystroke signal is rec
153. example let s change the Piano part to Rhodes Piano using Keystrokes 1 Press Ctrl 4 to select the Piano part 2 Press Ctrl Shift 2 to select the Favorite 2 That is Rhodes Piano Chapter 14 Reference 251 PG Music Inc Band in a Box is protected by copyright and is the property of PG Music Inc Copyright 1989 2004 PG Music Inc All rights reserved PG MUSIC INC 29 Cadillac Avenue Victoria BC V8Z 1T3 Canada World Wide Web www pgmusic com E mail info pgmusic com Phone toll free in the United States and Canada 1 800 268 6272 1 888 PG MUSIC 1 800 746 8742 Or 1 250 475 2874 tolls apply Universal International Freephone Service Outside of the United States and Canada where available 800 4PGMUSIC 800 4746 8742 Fax toll free in the United States and Canada 1 888 475 1444 or 1 250 475 2937 tolls apply Technical Support Phone toll free in the United States and Canada 1 866 9TECHPG 1 866 983 2474 Or 1 250 475 2708 tolls apply E mail support pgmusic com Live Internet Chat www pgmusic com Be sure to visit the FAQ pages at www pgmusic com for information about known troubleshooting issues as well as the latest technical support bulletins 258 PG Music Inc Index 166 198 dialog 67 2 bar ending chord options 67 203 early 55 Chord Preview 66 generate 55 chord progression 202 32 bit engine 14 chord root 205 A2 Transpose 110 chord shorcuts 85 accidentals 101 Chord Subs button 20
154. example we can generate substitutions for the Freddie MGU song Here is the original chord progression By using the auto substitution dialog we can generate substitutions for the whole song and we get this result BbMaj7 D7 202 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards You can see that Band in a Box chose the substitutions for about 70 of the chords in the song that s what we told it to do in the dialog It began by replacing the F7 chord with a Cm7 F9 progression Some of the substitutions chosen are more advanced than that replacing an F7 with a B13 for example Here are the settings in the auto substitution dialog that produced this result Chord Substitutions for whole song or range of song Style Choose Substitutions with Jazz More chords 7 to Substitute 70 Fm _ Pop Less Chords Types of subs to include O Jazz or Pop More or less Chords Best Subs Only hd M Only choose substitution is Melody is Compatible Include Chord Subs with each beat Range Set Range Tor Part of Song Tip bar 1 negative 1 Whole Song is the very beginning of Part of Song bars the song Tg il itt If you d like Band in a Box to only generate for a certain range of bars you should first highlight that range of bars in the chordsheet then launch the dialog The Range will then be set to Part of the song and the bar and of bars settings will also be set You can override these settings with manual settings i
155. ey and Band in a Box will immediately generate and play a professional arrangement of your song using the settings and the style you selected Having more fun with Band in a Box That s all there is to quickly creating music with Band in a Box There are also many powerful features and user settings for you to discover Have fun making music with Band in a Box Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial 13 Chapter 3 Summary of New Features New Features in Band in a Box Version 12 for Macintosh OS X Band in a Box File Edit Song S User MEL SOL Har MIDI GS Windows Help gt di 100 Wed 7 13 PM Band in a Box Playback Blue Caberet MG9 2 46 we ede SO VIEL 13 wens SPSS OPN EVER ere ee eee oe 4 Play sf Stop f Replay tHe gt e f r f Open f Save f MID YE EA CEY Song Give Cabaret CF Style gt zzp PBAL STY my i Sel pt ENYE Print co Note Rest on O aa e osit J O O O O O 8 GD OED as i i taj b a i Jf 4 All New 32 bit PPC Carbonized Engine Previous versions of Band in a Box were 68K code which required translation by the processor to operate on newer Macs The new program is rebuilt with a 32 bit clean carbonized PPC engine so that it runs natively in OS X Program operations are much faster including up to 3 times faster notation redraws song and soloing generation Playback timing is improved and rock solid with Mac OS X Odd Time Si
156. ey of Am Am is either the Im chord or the VIm chord Save Button on main screen works as Save As The Save button will launch the file dialog where the location and name of the file being saved can be changed Name MIDI files with MID extension This will append the file extension MID to MIDI files saved in Band in a Box rather than prefacing them with SMF Standard MIDI File Allow larger fonts on Chord Sheet Display larger fonts particularly with higher screen resolution Color for Chordsheet Area Make your choice from a list of colors for the chordsheet area The keystrokes Ctrl Shift C will toggle through the colors from the main screen without opening the Preferences 2 dialog Soloist Prefs Set the Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard to true if you want MIDI velocity information sent to the Soloing Wizard If you have a velocity sensitive MIDI device attached to your computer and you want to control the dynamics of the Soloist you should enable this feature Set the Trigger Playback Early to true to enable song playback to start before the Soloist has actually completed composing a solo Setting this setting to false disabled will instruct Band in a Box to completely compose a solo before song playback begins Set the Soloist Prefer Long phrases checkbox to true enabled if you would like the Soloist to use the longest musical phrases it knows Note this option may also i
157. f necessary Using the Chord Substitution Wizard Load in the song Freddie MGU The tune begins with an F7 chord for 8 beats Let s make that part a little more interesting by trying some substitutions for that chord First press Shift Return with the highlight bar on bar 1 You ll hear the F7 chord played Then choose Edit Chord Settings Option Z and the Chord Options dialog will be launched valle ge onanan Notice the following new Preview F Builder I buttons Preview Builder and Chord Substitutions Update Chord Subs IA j The Preview button allows you to hear the chord which is similar to what we did above by pressing Shift Return Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 203 The Builder button allows you to try different chords and build up chords by selecting root and extension The Chord Subs button is the one that we re interested in this time By pressing this button you ll now see a dialog with substitutions selected for the chord progression that begins with F7 for 2 bars Chord Substitutions C n For this 4 bar chord progression Bar fri Restore All F7 Bb6 Bdim Here are possible substitutions Cm7 F7 Cm F7b3 J Dm7 G9 Cm F7b9 J Cm7 G Abdim F7 A FY Cmi7 On the Gm chord only use if Melody doesn t have these notes E Works for Jazz chords
158. f 0 If you are making a simple style or if you don t understand all the options just leave them at their default settings When you record a pattern with all the default settings it is called a generic pattern Generic patterns may be picked at any time by the program Playback of patterns in the StyleMaker is done from the StyleMaker screen ail button plays pattern back exactly as played wail button plays pattern back as Band in a Box would e g on a specific chord set by the user from a menu Stopping Playback Clicking the mouse button or pressing the lt Spacebar gt stops playback of the pattern Erasing Patterns Patterns are erased by assigning a weight of zero to the pattern Type a 0 at the pattern NOTE All user styles are entered in 4 4 time The Band in a Box Program is capable of playing back in any time signature via the Bar Settings option on the Edit Menu or Option B so user defined waltz styles would be made as 4 4 but played as 3 4 Editing Existing Styles The easiest way to become familiar with the StyleMaker is to start with an existing style and modify it In this tutorial we will describe several ways to edit an existing style These include 148 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions changing patches saved with style adding editing drum patterns to a style copying and pasting drum patterns recording additional bass patterns adding strings to a style by importing strings fro
159. f an intro is present If you would like the lead in bars to be played even if an intro is present in the song set this feature to On Audible Lead In Volume Use these settings for the audible drum count in You can select any drum instrument for the count in You can choose different count in rhythms e g Tap on 2 and 4 instead of 1 2 3 4 Smart Lead ins can also be set here A smart lead in avoids playing the count in drum sound during a Melody pickup Metronome During Recording Select this to hear the metronome while recording Allow Any Endings Song endings can be turned off for all songs or on a song by song basis To turn song endings off for all songs uncheck the Allow Any Endings option Chapter 14 Reference 219 220 To turn the song ending off for a single song select the Additional Song Settings option from the Song menu and uncheck Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Limit Screen size to Use this setting to choose the size of the screen you want to display Menu Limit Determines the number of items that can be listed in a menu OK to Load Harmony w songs If checked the harmony settings for each song will be loaded and saved with each song If set to NO the harmony setting won t be saved or loaded with the songs If you are using a certain harmony you should set this setting to NO otherwise you ll have to keep re selecting the harmony when you load in new songs Change Harmony w n
160. f nothing else Good chords Advanced Chords Unusual Chords Barre chords Lenny B Chds CloseVoice Open Strings OK to use chords with this notes 2 notes 100 4notes 100 3 notes 100 5 notes 100 6 notes 100 Include Chords with this of Notes You can select the of notes for chords to be included in the chord solo In the example above chords with 2 6 notes will be included Embellish Chords Embellish how often 100 Embellish types ths Sths Jazz b Embellishment types allow setting of the types of embellishments to do Pop Guitarists should be set to use 9ths only This will change C7 chords to C9 and Cm7 to Cm9 184 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions The 7ths 9ths setting should be used for Jazz This adds the embellishments of C to Cmaj7 and Cm to Cm7 The 7 9 11 13 embellishment should be used for Advanced Jazz Guitarists and add 1 1ths and 13ths voicings If you make changes to the Guitarist settings you need to manually save them by pressing Save As and then finding the Band in a Box folder and saving the file as default git Individual Guitarists can be copied pasted exported or imported to from disk Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 185 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards MIDI File Chord Wizard MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard Many people who play music by ear think of songs in terms of Chords and Melody H
161. f tempo is slower 1 Bebop Saxophone 2 Bebop Piano SERIE ON One SaX Instrument Choose _ Clear _ 4 Jazz Swing Vibes 5 Jazz Sw Quartet 4 Inst Harmony Clear_ 6 Jazz Waltz Piano E aeee 7 Jazz Waltz Trumpet Style No Change Choose Clear CE ATT AMU ATOE VIDAS a 9 Even 8ths Bosa Rock Trumpet Change Instrument _None z 10 Even 8ths Bosa Rok Guitar Solo Mode Solo Which Choruses 11 Even 8ths Bossa Rock Vibes Normal First If no melody v 12 Even 8ths Bosa Rok DistGit 13 Blues Acc Piano O Fills 60 Middle 14 Charlie P Swing 16ths 15 Blues Jazz Guitar Around Melody Last If no melody 16 Blues Rock Organ 7 TNE 17 Blues Quartet Even 8ths Trade 4 s Ist v Mute melody in middle 18 Charlie P swing LGths Solo Wizard Allsolo Mel amp Solo 19 Blues Even 8ths Jz Guitar oiiae Msani 20 Blues Even 8ths Organ R Custom Fav Search Goto Double Time Edit Soloist Maker More Improved Solo but slower creation Mi Auto Suggest Suggest l Force choruses 5 Z Use Large soloist files ST3 v Load Set w songs _ Save set w songs Mi Create Long Phrases Eo Cancel Now select the type of Soloist Soloist type list box and choose the appropriate style This will bring up a list of Soloists in that style Then simply choose which one you would like to hear and what instrument you would l
162. f the notes into chord tones Chord Selection Dialog Box This section is accessed by the CHORD button This plays back a pattern on a specific chord that you choose You can hear what patterns will sound like in a style by trying them out on certain songs Macro notes recorded in a pattern will play their corresponding chords smooth voice leading is demonstrated etc Just choose a chord and then press OK Note This does not apply to drum patterns since drum patterns don t play any differently on different chords From within the StyleMaker press the PATCH button The Misc Style Settings dialog box opens which allows you to set some miscellaneous settings for the style Misc Style Settings C Waltz Deum Rest iSt Velocity Boost Drum Rest Vel 100 ticks to push Drum Push Inst 7 Ride Cymbal 7 Style Pushes Drum Push Vel 110 A Bass 0 Drums Piano Guitar Strings Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 163 Waltz If you want to make a Waltz style check the Waltz checkbox Then the StyleMaker will record and play patterns in 3 4 time The 8 beat row will record 6 beat 2 bar patterns the 4 beat will record 3 beat 1bar patterns The 2 beat and 1 beat still record 2 and 1 beat patterns The new style is made as a waltz and will play with a 3 4 lead in There is no need to put a 3 4 time signature change in bar 1 You will also notice that any style will play better
163. f the previous song If Auto Tempo is checked the tempo will be set by the tempo range stored with the Melodist For example if a Melodist is called Fast Waltz it would have a fast tempo range stored inside the Melodist and the song would be generated at a fast tempo if the auto tempo option is set A2 transpose Section Plus ad In songs with an AABA form it is common for the second a section to be transposed For example the first a section might be in the key of Eb and the 110 Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features second would be transposed up to the key of Gb Melodists store these settings and some Melodists are set to transpose the A2 sections If you don t want to allow Melodists to transpose the form in this way set the A2 transpose to none If set to section plus it will transpose the A2 section and might transpose 2 bars early or 2 bars late The song will only be transposed if the particular Melodist is set to transpose the section Key The Song Key area determines the key for the song If set to Any Key the program will randomly pick a key for the An Y Key song weighed more heavily toward the E T popular keys like C and F min key 20 The Minor Key setting determines what of songs would be generated in minor keys vs major keys If set to 20 then 20 of the songs would be generated in minor keys You can also set the Song Key Pop up to a specific key or set it to use
164. ference GS Menu Reset Sound Canvas to Factory Reset Sound Canvas And Send BB Master Combo Volume Adjust Reverb Type Chorus Type Assign Part Chan Patch Bank Send General MIDI Mode ON Send GS mode On Roland Send XG Mode On Yamaha Master Volume type Roland Auto Send GM mode at Start Auto Send GS mode at start Auto Send XG Mode at start Use MIDI messages instead of GS XG Sysex Panic send all MIDI note offs Turn Local OFF external MIDI keyboard Turn Local ON external MIDI keyboard v When program quits turn Local ON set Panning to Mono Set Panning To Stereo Reset Sound Canvas to Factory resets the module to factory settings Reset Sound Canvas And Send BB sends a reset message to the Sound Canvas and then sends the startup Band in a Box patch changes Adjust Master Volume sets the overall output level for Band in a Box Reverb Type or Chorus Type Roland GS instruments allow different type of reverb and chorus settings These settings boxes allow you to make a selection Assign Part Chan Patch Bank The GS Part settings are for GS compatible synthesizers only These synthesizers have 16 parts The default is for part 1 to be channel 1 part 2 channel 2 etc but you can change a part to another channel Chapter 14 Reference 249 This allows you to use the same channel for 2 parts so that you hear a layer of 2 instruments playing the same part Send General
165. from channel s 8 _l Write chord summary notes to Soloist Track vi Include Continuous controllers and pitch bend v Include Patch changes Include notes early by 120 PPQ is Open Change All Use Clipboard Tempo 120 TimeSig 4 l 4 Key Presets Defaults 3 Pop w 7ths Jazz Standard Rock Pop no 7th Jazz Modern Pop Ballad SoloPia Pop Sol Pia jazz Chord Options Chord Resolution Include Slash Chords Some Slash Chords T Walking Bass Fewest Chords v Allow Sus chords suspended Bass Part is mainly Mi Allow 7th seventh chords e g C7 l Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes Lowest bass note is delayed Method Jazz Leadsheet fl INTERPRET CHORDS NOW 186 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards Open Change M All eed Press the Open Change button to select the MIDI file that you d like to import If you select the AH checkbox then all files will be displayed If you deselect the Al checkbox then only filenames ending with MID will be displayed Note Any Band in a Box song can quickly be converted into a MIDI file by pressing the MID button or with the keystrokes Option S or from the menu File Save Standard MIDI File The song will be saved in the Band in a Box folder with the same file name but the file type will be MID For example the Band in a Box song Violet MGU becomes the MID
166. g any new channels MIDI Output to an external device Some external music hardware devices require chords played in root position to drive them in real time An example of this is the Digitech Vocalist It will let you sing into a microphone and harmonize your voice according to the chords that are input to the device Band in a Box now has the capability of outputting a separate channel with the chords in root position to support such external devices automatically There are also settings such as complexity of chords output channel velocity and note range Band in a Box will also drive RealTime Arrangers like the Roland RA series The best way to accomplish this is to access the M Output chords to external device menu item You will then be given a window like the following Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 89 _ Output chords Update _ Channel 9 Velocity 90 Default Note Range to output 36 to 60 Roland RA Chord Types Vocalist ticks before chord change to output 120 1 beat 40 Output chords during Leadin Mi Write track to MIDI file Output MIDI sync info rd Display Output on piano This option is useful if you are using an external arranger that can read chords in real time BB will output chords in root position on the selected channel during playback Cancel Click on the Vocalist button if you have such a device connected to your MIDI system Band in a Box will then
167. g or a Shuffle style then Band in a Box will set the resolution to 3 swing This will ensure that Jazz eighth notes swing triplets are handled correctly When a straight style like Bossa Nova is loaded in Band in a Box will change the resolution to sixteenths notes Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 99 This will provide even eight notes You shouldn t have to change this setting very often as Band in a Box sets it for you The Resolution setting determines how the program rounds the note times and durations when translating a track into standard notation For example a resolution of 4 will cause the program to round each note and duration to the nearest 16th note when displaying the music in 4 4 time A resolution of 3 will cause Band in a Box to round each note to the nearest 8th note triplet in 4 4 time A resolution of 2 will cause BB to round each note to the nearest 8th note in 4 4 time Tip If you re displaying Jazz Swing or Shuffle music that has a triplet feel to the eighth notes make sure to set the resolution to 3 swing This will display the 8th notes and other aspects of Jazz Swing music correctly Transpose The Transpose setting lets you adjust the Notation window to display notes either higher or lower than their actual pitches For example if you re working with guitar music you could set this to 12 and the guitar music will be displayed an octave higher which is the way guitar musi
168. gement And you can define your own Guitarists choosing parameters such as strum speed types of voicings Pop Jazz embellishments and many more You can easily make and learn a professional quality guitar chord solo to your favorite song Generate a Guitar Chord Solo Load in a song with a melody in it We suggest the song GIT_TEST that should be in your Songs folder If it isn t there choose the song Old Folks at Home or any other song with a melody Open the Guitar window Ctrl Shift G 120 Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features Ch Solo Launch the Chord Solo function with the Ch Solo button or select MEL Generate Chord Solo Select Guitarist Window Once you press the Chord Solo button you ll see the Select Guitarist window Select Guitarist Create Chord Solo in a style similar to Track to use 2 Jaz Guitar single position cuitar ater 3 Jazz Guitar advanced chords Preferred Fret Position Sth v 4 Jazz delayed strum 5 Pop w Barre chords M Auto Set Set Range 6 J Pass 4 notes 5 frets 7 J Pass 4 notes in position 8 James Taylor open 9 Lenny 100 no best chords Whole 10 Johnny 100 close voicings Part 11 Lenny 100 with Best Chords 12 Johnny 100 w Best Chords 13 Johnny Ballad close voicings 14 Close voicings broad strum Jazz Guitar plays within the position 15 Lenny Ballad shell type 16 EdB shell type med tempo 17 J Pass amp Lenny mixed 18 Single note slide correction
169. gnature Support Previous versions of Band in a Box supported only X 4 time signatures but now we ve added support for odd time signatures like 9 8 11 8 13 16 19 16 etc The count in and the style plays in the odd time signature feel and you can change time signatures during the song Note The notation window still displays edits these odd time signatures in 4 4 but the styles all play sound correctly 14 Chapter 3 Summary of New Features Example of odd time signature support Load in a demo song like Songs 11_8_Pop MGU This loads in the 11 8 Pop Style When you press Play you ll hear a count in in 11 8 time The 11 8 time signature is stored within the style so you can switch at any bar to a 4 4 style and the song will change time signatures easily Also if you change from a 4 4 style to an 11 8 style the Melody will still stay nicely in time with the bars With the pro version we include 5 4 7 8 24 16 and 11 8 time signatures There are 20 more available on the About Time Styles disk 38 There is also an About Time Video available that demonstrates using odd time signatures in BB and how to count in odd time signature styles Maximum Number of Soloists increased Solo in a Style similar to 242 ETHNIC16 Guitar Pickin 243 ETHNIC16 Accordian 244 ETHNIC16 Wind Band 245 CLASSICAL16 Piano 246 CLASSICAL16 Brass amp Wood T 247 Pop 16th Shuffle
170. gray vertical bars to the right of the box will increase or decrease the setting by 5 except for Bank settings Bank numbers start at O and then go up by multiples of 8 8 16 24 32 etc until they reach 127 5 The range of settings is from 0 to 127 except for Pan which goes from 63 hard left to 64 hard right with O in the center of the stereo field Saving Songs Saving a Song Once you have made a song or have made changes to a song you can easily save the song by Click on the C Save button or Press the F2 function key or Choose Save or Save song As from the File menu or Press s Then type the filename for the song Don t add the extension Band in a Box adds it for you The extension SGU indicates a Band in a Box song the extension MGU indicates a Band in a Box song with a melody Saving song with Patches Patches may be saved with songs This is done by selecting the Save song with Patches option from the File Menu This allows you to save the instrument patches for each part including the Melody Soloist and Harmony in a particular song 74 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Save Patches and Harmonies W Song Save Settings for Bass Patch Volume Piano Reverb Drum Panning Guitar i Chorus Soloist Bank Strings i View Patches Bank LSB Ctrl 32 Melody Fill Patches On fv mi mi v mi i Thru 0 Zeros Save Current Melody Ha
171. han 2 beats This means that you don t have to worry about durations at all and can just click on the notes that you want at the locations that you want If you want a specific duration 1 e over ride the auto duration you can do this by editing the note using by clicking on the note while holding down the option key and then youre in a dialog box that allows you to type the exact duration that you want The purpose of auto durations is to allow you to enter a lead sheet style melody by clicking only once per note dramatically speeding up the entry of notation Inserting Rests fe Rast You can Insert a REST by clicking the Rest button and then clicking at the location you would like the rest to be inserted at This automatically chops off the duration of the previous note Note Band in a Box dislikes rests less than a quarter note so if it is important to you to see rests less than a quarter note make sure to de select the Minimize Rests check box in the Notation Window Settings dialog box Notes can be moved via drag and drop To move a note place the mouse cursor over an existing note and then click and hold the mouse button down While keeping the mouse button pressed move the mouse cursor over to the location you wish to drop the note and then let go of the mouse button The note will be moved to the place you dropped it Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 97 Certain areas of the screen are not valid locations
172. hapter 11 User Programmable Functions 157 Playback Bar Mask Usual Setting 0 Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars of the song the pattern will play The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker and range from 1 8 Bar is the first bar after a part marker for example Other bar mask settings 1 pattern played at odd number bars only 1 3 5 7 9 pattern played at even bars only 2 4 6 8 10 pattern played on 3rd of 4 bar 3 7 11 15 pattern played on 4th of 4 4 8 12 16 20 pattern played on Sth of 8 5 13 21 pattern played on 6th of 8 6 14 22 pattern played on 7th of 8 7 15 23 pattern played on 8th of 8 8 16 24 Special bar masks 1 PRE FILL special value refers to the bar before a fill 2 FILL refers to the bar of a fill this allows you to put in bass fills for example 3 POST FILL refers to the bar after a fill same as the first bar after a part marker Playback Beat Mask Usual Setting 0 Set the beat mask to a beat from 1 4 if you want the pattern to only be played on certain beat numbers 1 Beat 1 2 Beat 2 3 Beat 3 4 Beat 4 So ie ee a ale Roman Numeral Mask Usual Setting 0 If you have a pattern that should only be played on the I chord or the IV chord of the key you can use these Roman Numeral Masks This setting is rarely used Chord Type Usual Setting Any Chord This setting is very useful This allows you to record patt
173. hat is a SHOT Held Chords You can specify that certain instruments hold a chord sustained for a certain number of bars For example you can have the bass and piano hold a chord sustained while the drums continue to play a pattern A chord is HELD by adding 3 periods after the chord Pi _ indicates a C chord that is a HELD We will now illustrate the effect of putting these breaks into the chord sheet In the examples that follow bar will have a normal chord then bar 2 will have a chord with a break on it a rest shot or held chord 58 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 2 bars of C chord no break on bar 2 This is the usual situation without any break Note that the piano plays rhythmically on bar 2 This rests the instruments until the next chord on the chordsheet The rest is typed in as a C chord followed by one period The shot plays a staccato chord on bar 6 and then rests until the next chord on the chordsheet The shot is typed as a C chord followed by two periods The chord on bar 10 is held sustained until the next chord on the chordsheet The held chord is typed in as a C followed by three periods Breaks for only some instruments You can specify that some instruments not be affected by the break The coded names for the instruments are B for Bass D for Drums P for Piano Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 59 G for Guitar for Strings C bd To exempt i
174. he default instrument volumes Remember to always use General MIDI Instrument numbers not the Patch numbers of your synth unless you have a General MIDI synth If you don t require a specific instrument for the style type a 0 for no patch change The patch changes take effect immediately in the style so that when you are recording Bass parts for example you will hear the bass patch that you have selected Thru Patch If you set the Thru Patch to other than 0 the instrument that the user plays along with using your style will be the Thru patch that you set If you re making a heavy rock style you might want to set the thru patch to be Rock guitar if you expected that the user would want to always play along on Rock guitar Melody Patch If set to other than 0 all melodies will be played on the specified instrument If you re making a Grover Washington style for example you might want any melodies to be automatically set to Saxophone Volumes You can set a default volume for each instrument in your style The default volume is 90 The volume range is 0 127 Importing Patterns into a Style Importing a pattern into a style is a powerful feature that greatly speeds up the making of new styles In the interests of not re inventing the wheel with each new style this allows you to import a pattern from another style How to Import a Pattern into a Style A pattern can be copied from one style to another by copying a
175. he root extension and alternate root if applicable You can launch the chord builder by choosing the User Chord Builder menu option or with the keystrokes Ctrl Shift H You ll then see the following Chord Builder dialog Chord Builder Oc OF OAb vo M Types of Voicings Open Voicing hd S Db F e A S j 69 v Enter chord when clicked JD OFF Bb E ET Of OG OB Q gt Oma OmMaj7 Atbar 14 Beat 3 Bass Note Slash Root fe 0O13 O7b9 Clear Chord lt gt Cancel Play Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 67 You can now click on the root of the chord in the Root group the extension Maj7 etc and also an alternate slash note root For example to make the chord F9 A you would click on the F root the 9 extension and the Slash Root of A As you click on them you ll hear the bass note played on the Bass part and the extension played on the Piano track If you are happy with the sound of the chord you can press the Enter Chord button to enter the chord at the bar and beat specified If you would like the chord to be inserted automatically when you click on the note extension names select the Enter chord when clicked option Change the Bar Beat settings to enter at a different bar The Chord Builder can be left open as you work entering chords into Band in a Box Remember that you can also play chords in from the MIDI keyboard by pressing Ctrl Return afte
176. heet area of the screen and you can also choose to use larger fonts for the chord display These two settings are found in the Edit Preferences 2 menu Support for larger screen sizes allows the program to fill the entire screen There are also options to restrict the screen size to a certain size To force the screen size to a certain size use the Edit Preferences Limit Screen size to item Chapter 5 The Main Screen 49 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide In the QuickStart Tutorial it s as easy as 1 2 3 to make great music on your computer using the intelligent automatic accompaniment features of Band in a Box This PowerGuide provides detailed song making instructions and configuration settings for the Band in a Box power user Song Settings Song settings include the title key signature and tempo for a song and the Band in a Box style for its arrangement Main Settings The Main Settings dialog shows all the settings for the song Go to Song Title Key Tempo Embel or use the keystrokes k to open the dialog Settings can be entered directly into the dialog Main Settings Title Untitled Key n lempo Ex Bbm F C 30 500 12 Click On __ Transpose c leo C More roti ipo W Embellish Chords m Cancel Most of these settings can be made in the Title window on the main screen Old Folks at Home GARNER STY Ab t 185 1 32 3 Band in a Box Title wi
177. hs Bass player plays better Sths over some Jazz chords Band in a Box s bass player was playing some natural 5ths over some chords like C7 altered or others Now after a discussion with some bass players we ve improved Band in a Box so that the bass part plays the 5 or b5 correctly on these Jazz chords Load Previous Style Load Next Style Load Previous Style Load Next Style This function analogous to the Load Next Song function loads in the previous or next style in alphabetical order of the file name To load the next style in alphabetical order choose the menu item File File Utilities Load Next Style or use the hot key Command Shift F8 Control Command Shift F8 for the previous style Chase Volumes added for playback For files that include volume change events Controller 7 Band in a Box will locate the most recent volume control information that is prior to the current location in the song Band in a Box will then send this volume control information at the start of playback 18 Chapter 3 Summary of New Features Drum count in options Ki Lead in Drum count if drums muted Option to hear the drum count in even if the drums are muted or disabled This is great for drummers who play along with Band in a Box and mute the drum track Previously when the drum track was muted or disabled in a song the count in drum click wouldn t play Now there s an option to play the drum count in in a
178. iano Guitar Strings patterns Are played in real time from a MIDI keyboard MIDI guitar etc by clicking on Rec or typing r with the cursor placed on the first dot of the A or B section of the desired instrument starting with 8 Beat Are played in based on a C7 chord C E G Bb though all 12 notes may be used The patterns for Bass Piano Guitar Strings are classified by the length of the pattern i e the number of notes that the chord lasts without a change of chord Click on the Piano Guitar Strings buttons to toggle between each instrument s A B recording sections You get to the instrument screen by mouse clicking on the instrument name button 55595555 5 This rowis for substyle A patterns that last 8 notes 25555593555 Thisrowis for substyle A patterns lasting 4 notes 5553335 Thisrtow has 6 patterns recorded on it weight 5 5 5 3 3 5 Fst sks ae ah ad This rowis for substyle B patterns lasting notes aoa ee a E The ending is recorded on this row The important rows are indicated with an asterisk meaning that if you are making a simple style you ll only have to use these rows The a and b refer to the a and b substyles found in Band in a Box The numbers 1 2 4 8 refer to the length of the recorded patterns in terms of number of beats For example a 2 bar pattern would be 8 beats Explanation of the numbers on the StyleMaker screen The StyleMaker
179. iano this option allows you to write it on channel 5 instead Write Harmony to MIDI file If checked the harmony will be written to the MIDI file If not just the melody will be written to the MIDI file MIDI file Harmony sep tracks Chapter 14 Reference 221 If checked the harmony will be written to the MIDI file on separate tracks for each voice You could use this to print out individual parts to your printer for example Write Guitar part on 6 channels If set to YES the styles that are Intelligent Guitar Styles will result in a MIDI file that has the Guitar part written on 6 channels 11 16 Then when you read it in PowerTracks or another sequencer that uses the convention of 11 16 for guitar strings the guitar part will display correctly Preferences 2 x OK to save load rev vol chorus w songs _ Send GM mode at startup Send GS Mode On at startup lt lt _ Send XG Mode On at startup W Local On External Keyboard MIDI Local On Ml Turn External keyboard s Local On at end of session _ OK to beep with messages WI OK to prompt to reduce expand Lowest Bass Note E2 default E C_ My soundcard or MIDI doesn t have brushes remap them M For Roman Numerals in minor keys use relative major rd Save Button on main screen works as Save As wi Name MIDI files with MID extension W Allow larger fonts on Chord Sheet Color for Chordsheet Area Pastel Default Y Note keystro
180. ick on the number where the number of choruses are displayed on the Title Key Tempo Chorus Window and select the number of choruses from the Pop Up Menu or select Total Choruses from the Song menu or press The number of choruses will then be displayed Additional Song Settings The Additional Song Settings dialog box is accessed by selecting the More button in the Main Settings dialog or choosing Additional Song Settings from the Song menu These are additional song settings that are saved with the song Additional Song Settings i Vary Style in Middle Choruses Allow Pushes in Middle Choruses Rests RA Allow Rests in First Chorus MW Allow Rests in Middle Choruses MI Allow Rests in Last Chorus vi Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses rd Allow Embellishment of Chords Tags C Tag Exists Tag Jump After Bar Tag Begin at Bar Tag Ends After Bar W Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song _ Start the 2 bar ending early Vary Style in Middle Choruses Default If checked the song will play in substyle B throughout the Middle Choruses The Middle Choruses include all choruses except the first and last If not checked the middle choruses will play a and b substyles as set in the chordsheet with part markers Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 53 For example in Jazz Swing since the b substyle is Swing all of the middle choruses will have swing bass The a substyle
181. if set to 3 4 time This makes songs like Take Five sound better which are written as 3 4 2 4 bars Try out the swing_number9 demo of 5 4 time signature So if we haven t made as Bossa Waltz for example you can set a time signature of 3 4 in bar 1 and get a Bossa Waltz Pattern Pushing Patterns can be pushed individually or on instrument basis random of time Pushes can get a Velocity Boost so that they are played louder than other patterns Usually a setting of 10 is a good boost to give pushes ticks to push Choose the number ticks for each push to use 30 16th note 40 ticks triplet 60 half note Style Pushes Ce Bass 10 In this example the Bass part patterns will be pushed randomly 10 of the time in the A substyle and 20 of time in the B substyle Drum Rest Inst Drum Rest Vel 100 Drum Push Inst 7 Ride Cymbal X Drum Push Vel 110 Since Rests can be Shots that play a chord on beat 1 the style can define what instrument to use for this and at what velocity Similarly each Push is accompanied by a drum stab and the style can define what instrument to use and at what velocity Set Patches The Set Patch and Volume for Style dialog box allows you to assign instruments to a style including default instrument volumes When the song is played back using the style these patch changes will be sent to your synthesizer 164 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions along with t
182. if you know that they key signature of the song is not F but is C then you would set that Similarly if you knew that the Melody channel was on channel 3 you could set that to override the Chord Wizard settings Once you ve done that choose one of the Presets to quickly enter the settings to the type of song that you are trying to interpret Preset choices are Jazz Standard Jazz Modern Pop with seventh chords Pop with no seventh chords Rock Pop Ballad Solo Piano and Solo Piano Jazz Presets Presets d Defaults Pop w ths Jazz Standard 3 Te Rock Pop no 7th Jazz Modern 3 Pop Ballad Solo Pia Pop Sol Pia Jazz Chord Options When you choose one of these presets it automatically makes a number of settings in the Chord Options section of the dialog but you can override them in this dialog These include Chord Resolution Chord Resolution Range from 1 beat to 4 bars default 2 beats This is the minimum number of beats for a chord For example if you set it to 2 beats then Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 189 the Chord Wizard will never attempt to come up with different chords that are only a beat apart Tip If you have a song that has a short section that does include chords every 1 beat you can redo that section of the song with a 1 beat resolution Include Slash Chords If set the Chord Wizard will include slash chords like F7 A or Cm G B
183. ike the Soloist to play There are additional settings in the Select Soloist window to have the Soloist play a Harmonized solo just like the Melody Harmony feature in the style of your choice Solo Wizard Additionally you will find another great feature in the Solo mode list the Solo Wizard With this mode selected the program will play correct notes in the style of the current Soloist as you play notes on the MIDI or QWERTY keyboard Beyond impressing your friends with your newfound improvisational prowess this feature has practical implications as well For example you can concentrate 116 Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features on practicing your solo phrasing and playing in time without concerning yourself with which notes to play Band in a Box will supply the correct notes Tip The Soloist will use the velocities you play or pick its own depending on the setting in the Edit Preferences 2 Soloist Prefs Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard checkbox Editing Soloists Edit Soloist Maker gt a If you d like to create your own Soloists or permanently change the settings of existing Soloists you can press the Edit button to launch the Soloist Maker which is described elsewhere in detail Using the Soloist Feature Generate a Soloist and practice the solo by looping it slowing it down or printing it out until you can perform a great solo on any chord changes Generat
184. ilar to this A Pattern E Pattern Endings You will notice that there are 4 rows of drum patterns A Pattern is the row to record drum patterns for the a substyle Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 149 B pattern is the row to record for the b substyle Fills are recorded on the Fills row Endings are recorded on the Endings row 2 consecutive patterns of 1 bar Let s have a closer look at the A Pattern row A Pattern 5555522395 Each of the numbers represents a drum pattern that has been already recorded There are 8 patterns that have been recorded on this line The numbers themselves are called weights The weights can be from to 8 a weight of 9 is a special case explained below Most of the patterns have weights of 5 which is the default Assigning a higher or lower weight will cause that pattern to be played more or less often relative to the other patterns The 2 patterns with a weight of 2 will be played less often than the patterns with weights of 5 Use of a weight of 9 on one of the patterns is a special case Patterns with a weight of 9 will always be played instead of any other patterns on the same row These patterns usually have other options associated with them to ensure they are played under certain circumstances only For example the pattern on this row has an option set of Bar Mask post fill which means it will be the bar after a drum fill In this case the pattern has a Crash c
185. ime line is the black vertical stripe just below the notation tool bar f T Toggle between Standard Editable and Staff Roll notation z modes with the N button Oot Press the Opt button to set Notation window options such as P resolution chord position split point transpose options and more Print out any part with the Print button Pressing this button opens the Print Options dialog where print settings are made Editable Notation Mode Click on the N button to go from Standard Notation to Editable Notation mode Chords can be entered as in the Standard Notation window the Editable Notation mode also permits point and click entry of notes and rests as well as drag and drop editing Print e2 Note ORest Mono M Clean O L Scrn 3 ED P ES ES Band in a Box Editable Notation window This is the screen for step entry of a melody or for editing existing parts Note that each beat is sub divided by either 3 or 4 broken vertical lines Swing styles use 3 lines to divide each beat into eighth note swing triplets Straight styles use 4 lines to divide each beat into sixteenth notes 30 Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Swing triplet Resolution Straight sixteenths Resolution Tip Edits you make to Band in a Box instrument parts will be overwritten when the Play button is pressed and the program generates a new arrangement To hear your edits use the Replay button to pl
186. ing back your style it starts by looking at the Dm7 chord and counts that it lasts four beats before the next chord change to a G7 chord It then looks to the style that you have created and sees if you have any patterns created in the A 4 beat line if so you will get an appropriate pattern that you have recorded for chords lasting four beats Note If you don t want to classify patterns according to this method don t worry you can just record all of your patterns on the A 8 beat line When Band in a Box sees that you haven t any 4 beat patterns it will choose an eight beat pattern and then only use the first four beats of it Then when Band in a Box encounters the G7 chord it sees that it lasts two notes before the next chord change So Band in a Box will look for any A 2 beat patterns There is tremendous advantage to being able to record different length patterns Eight beat patterns might be blank for the first four beats for example a situation that could not apply for four beat patterns or the entire pattern would be blank Here is another example of chords with the durations of the chords displayed for you underneath 4 bar e g F Bb C7 F6 chord duration 4 2 2 8 Patterns may be entered for chord durations of 1 2 4 and 8 notes The Band in a Box program sorts out everything else about determining the length of the chord durations in the song and combining lengths for unusual lengths 3 2 1 etc So no
187. ion and Solfeggio Enter Chords Using a MIDI Controller Keyboard If you have a MIDI controller keyboard you can use it to enter chords into Band in a Box First you must make sure that your cables are properly connected and you have the correct input drivers selected If you play a chord on your MIDI keyboard and then press Ctrl Return the chord will be entered into the chordsheet at the current highlight cell position Enter Chords Using the Chord Builder Press the Chord Builder button This opens the Chord Builder dialog with a list of chord roots and their extensions Chord Builder Types of Voicings l F A l 69 v Enter chord when clicked J F Bb JG OB z gt m9 mMaj7 Atbar 1 Beat 1 Bass Note Slash Root A e 313 7b9 Clear Chord 7Sus Other Enter Chord CMaj Fegi Play Chord Builder Dialog To enter a chord at the current bar select the chord root from the left pane and then the extension on the right pane Pressing Enter Chord ___ enters the chord and advances the highlight cell to the next half bar Import Chords from a MIDI File You can have Band in a Box import chords from an existing MIDI file Choose File Import Chords from MIDI File on the File menu or use the keystrokes Ctrl Option I to open the Chord Wizard dialog Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial 9 Chord Wizard MIDI File name Open Change M All Use Clipboard of lead in bars
188. ion dialog and then selecting Low Root and then inputting the range of acceptable notes for the low root voice and a velocity boost if applicable 16 Chapter 3 Summary of New Features Strauss in a Box Transform 4 4 Melody to a Waltz 3 4 Strauss in a Box You can now automatically transform any 4 4 song melody to a Waltz 3 4 feel Simply load in any 4 4 song and change the style to a Waltz style The program will offer to transform the melody so that it works as a Waltz or choose the added menu item Melody Edit Utilities Transform to 3 4 This function is referred to as Strauss in honor of Johann Strauss the famous Waltz composer It is fun and educational to hear and play familiar songs in a Waltz feel Band in a Box uses intelligent algorithms to transform the melody to the new time signature To use this feature load in any song in 4 4 time Then load in a Waltz style If there s a Melody or Soloist present you ll be asked if it s OK to change the Melody from 4 4 to 3 4 If you click YES to that the transformation will occur and you can listen to the Melody in 3 4 time Answer Question OK to change Melody from 4 4 to Waltz Cancel If you click NO to the offer to transform the Melody you can still convert it later by choosing Melody Edit Utilities Transform 4 4 to 3 4 Note that if you choose the manual command the Melody prior to transformation should have 8 beats bef
189. ion gives you an alternative to end the song on the last bar of the song Band in a Box will still play an ending on the chord that you specify and the ending will occur as a 2 bar phrase beginning 2 bars before the end of the form This results in more natural endings for many songs Play Generates a new arrangement and plays the song Stop Stop playback with this command or the esc key Hold Pause Pauses the song Repeating this command resumes play from the exact location where the song was paused Play From Bar Choose a chorus and bar to play from in the current arrangement Parts are not regenerated Use this command during playback to jump to any bar in the song Play From Current When the song is stopped this command starts playback again at the bar with the highlight cell Go Open and Play Launches a file dialog for selection of any song in any folder The selected song loads and plays automatically in Band in a Box Juke Box Play Opens the Juke Box Options dialog to select and play a jukebox list Previous Juke Song Next Juke Song Navigate back and forth in a jukebox set list Wizard Playalong Enables the Wizard feature for play along on the computer keyboard Wizard Uses Smart Notes Toggle this on so the Wizard will only play notes based on the chord key of the song Toggle smart notes Off unchecked to have the Wizard provide you access to the chromatic scale Chapter 14 Reference 229
190. ipboard with the keystrokes e or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu Pasting chords to the chordsheet When you have copied some chords to the clipboard you can then paste them into the chordsheet by Moving the highlight cell to the destination bar where you want to begin the paste of chords This can be done by clicking that bar with the mouse or by moving the highlight cell with the cursor arrows on the computer keyboard Press 4 v or select Paste from the Edit menu Tip Remember that the copied section remains in the clipboard and can be used repeatedly Example If you re inputting a song with verse verse bridge verse you Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 61 can just copy the first verse to the Clipboard and then paste in the other verses The clipboard remains even if you load in a new song so you can copy and paste between songs Copy Chords and or Melody You can copy and paste the chords melody and solo for a range of bars in the Copy Chords and or Melody dialog f Co py Press the Copy button to launch this dialog box or el ot select Edit Copy From To or press Option C Copy Chords and or Melody rd Copy Chords W Copy Melody Copy From Bar 1 wi Copy Soloist Bars to Copy amp Chorus 1 Copy To Bar 13 C Cancel Erase Chords and or Melody Select Edit Erase From To or press Option K to launch this dialog box Erase Chords and or Melody Erase From
191. is part of the F 7 scale as a G the 2nd of the scale but is also part of the Eb key of the song If you want to display based on the chord scale setting Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics will display the note as a G instead of Ab displayed as G because use chord scale enharmonics set to true Enharmonics for passing tones are based on the chord if we Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics Intelligent accidentals chord context The sharps and flats that Band in a Box uses on the melody notes are also context sensitive to the chord names For example if you are in the key of Eb and the chord is an E7 a G note will show up as a G and not an Ab This means that the notation accidentals will automatically show up correctly Scroll Ahead by The Scroll Ahead by option can be set to none 1 bar or 2 bars This is useful if you are reading the music from the Notation as it is scrolling Since musicians read ahead of the music it is helpful for the music to scroll ahead So when the playback is on bar 4 you ll also see bar 5 of the next screen displayed This feature still shows you the current bar when it is scrolling ahead so it is useful even if you don t read ahead Tick Offset The Tick Offset on the notation options is one of the keys to great looking notation It accounts for playing that is before or behind the beat The track is automatically scanned to determine the tick offset so that you don t have t
192. isplayed In general this should be on since it improves the display But if you want to see every grace note or glitch that was played then turn it off Looping the Notation Screen While a song is playing click the L Scr checkbox and the Ei L Scrn song will loop for the 4 bars shown on the notation screen For example if you let the soloist create a great sounding Jazz solo you can then look at the notation and sight read along with the solo When you reach a particularly interesting or difficult part that you would like to practice set the L Scr to On and it will loop that 4 bar phrase Tip Since you might be holding your guitar or sax as you try to play with this command we ve made some easy hot keys to navigate around The NUMPAD 1 key turns the Looping on or off The Cursor Up Down keys jump to the previous next screen The Track Buttons These stand for Bass Drums Piano Guitar Strings Melody and Solo Normally you will be displaying the Melody or Solo track but you can display or print any track from Band in a Box The Soloist 94 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing allows you to read along with the solo or print a hard copy Why not mute the Soloist track and play the Solo yourself Just press the button to change the track You may do this while the song is playing Note The instrument tracks are not created by Band in a Box until you press Play so you may notice that the
193. k the chordsheet Name the song Enter the title of the song by clicking in the title area F Song Click here to type the song title Memo CF d Style J ffBOSSA STY C t 120 1 32 3 Select the Key Click on the key select list and change the key of your song instantly Click on YES to the OK to transpose Lead sheet prompt and Band in a Box will automatically transpose the entire song Type in the chords The chords we will enter are F for 1 2 a bar Bb for 1 2 a bar and C7 for a bar Mouse click on the first cell in the chordsheet and type in the chord symbol The chord name will appear in the chord box Press the return key to enter the chord on the chordsheet and advance the chord cell 1 2 bar To enter two chords in a chord cell type the chord names separated by a comma e g f bb Continue until the song is complete This song will have no intro and the chorus will be 32 bars long The chordsheet we want to end up with will look something like this stop Ii Replay I Hold I From h Rec Y Lyrics J Notation O Ii YE Save Of MDO of STY f Melodist Solo Yi Copy JE Print El ng Making a Mew Song F Memo ee ee d _ Emb M zr g0ssa STY F t 12011 32 PTE Py Bene hiring 3 Bb 4 CF 7 F Bb a OF 34 Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Copying and pasting a section of chords Since many songs repeat the same sequence of chords throughout
194. k they are replaced by a function List of Bass Macro Notes Note number 72 C Pop Walking Note s On playback the note number 72 will be replaced by intelligent notes walking in a Pop Country mode to the next chord Maximum 4 walking notes per pattern Note number 76 E Note a semitone below Root of Next Chord Note number 77 F Root Of Next Chord Note number 78 F Note a semitone ABOVE Root of Next Chord Note number 79 G Best Fifth a Fifth above or below the Root depending on how high the root is Also stays on the root if in a slash chord C7 E Remember to get Bass Macros Working you must Hit the right note number you may be out by an octave Check the OK To Use Macro Notes box Playback the pattern with the CHORD button The PLAY button gives you an as played playback with the strange sounding high macro notes Making Piano Guitar and Strings Patterns Piano Guitar and Strings are all considered together because they have all the same options available They like the Bass patterns are recorded live from a MIDI keyboard If you can t play in real time or if you don t have a MIDI keyboard you ll have to import these instruments from other styles as we ll be doing with the Strings In this section we will refer to Piano patterns but this information applies equally well to Guitar and Strings patterns Moving to the Piano Pattern Screen Move to the Piano area by mou
195. ke Ctr Shift C will Soloist Prefs toggle the color from the main screen not inside this dialog OK Cancel Preferences 2 dialog 222 Chapter 14 Reference OK to save load rev vol chorus w songs Offers global control over additional song settings 1 e reverb chorus etc that can be saved and or loaded with each song Send GM Mode At Startup For sound modules that are GM compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GM specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Send GS Mode On At Startup For sound modules that are GS compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GS specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Note Many newer modules keyboards made by Roland and others can take advantage of the extra parameters and features found in the GS mode We recommend using this mode rather than the GM mode if your synth supports it Similarly many newer Yamaha modules keyboards support the XG specification If your synth supports this mode we recommend using it in order to access more parameters and patches than the GM standard provides Some Yamaha XG modules keyboards can also be set to work in GS mode if desired Send XG Mode On At Startup For sound modules that are XG compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready to accept XG specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information
196. l see an area called the chordsheet Band in a Box vioki MGU 3 26 ar Jas wa DEEE ERA Ae O e DE From E Melodist ce Maj D7 G7 F6 G7 F amp BbMaj Gm7 G7 F amp Band in a Box main screen showing chordsheet Each of the numbered cells on the chordsheet represents a bar In this example you can see that there is an F6 chord in the first bar of this song Similarly one row down you can see an F6 chord in bar 5 and later in the song a G7 in bar 7 8 Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial Notice the box in the first half of bar 1 This is the highlight cell and it represents the bar you are currently working on You can move the highlight cell around using the cursor keys or select a specific bar using the mouse Enter Chords Using the Computer Keyboard To enter a specific chord move the highlight cell to where you want to place the chord For example if you wanted to add or change a chord in bar 20 you would highlight bar 20 on the chordsheet Next type in your chords If you want an F7 at bar 2 type F and 7 on your keyboard and press return Notice that when you use the return key the highlight cell moves to the second half of the bar You could then enter another chord at beat 3 Chords are commonly typed using standard chord symbols like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13 9 E but you can enter them in any of the supported chord symbol display formats like Roman Numerals Nashville Notat
197. le over the changes for a percentage of time Other modes are Solo Around Melody Trade 4s Solo Wizard and Custom Solo for a Specific O Trade 4 s ist Range of Bars J Fills 60 _ Around Melody J Solo Wizard Custom Around Melody option This option for the Soloist part creates a solo around the melody that is at times when the melody is silent To solo around the melody do the following 1 Open up a song that has a melody preferably a sparse melody with some space in it that a Soloist might be able to jump in Press the Soloist button Select the Solo Mode Around Melody Set the Soloist to play in All Choruses and uncheck the Mute Melody in Middle option 4 Press OK and the solo will be generated playing riffs at times when the melody isn t playing 118 Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features Tip For added effect add a guitar chord solo to the Soloist part using the Chord Solo button on the Guitar and choosing Solo as the destination Or simply choose a Guitar Harmony like 32 J Pass Custom Solo Generation You can redo any part of the solo that you don t like with the ability to generate and regenerate parts of the solo There is a Custom button on the Select Soloist dialog This launches a custom solo dialog to allow you to set the range that you d like for the solo Generate Solo for a Specific Range of Bars Start Generating Solo at Bar 5 Chorus 1 Generate
198. le of a lead sheet style Most songs will fit on 1 page so your printout will look similar to a standard lead sheet You can easily make and printout a custom fake book of all of your tunes and you can easily transpose parts to print out for trumpet sax players etc The printout includes title bar s composer style and copyright information Prints using a scaleable True Type font and supports all MAC compatible printers A lead sheet usually contains the chords melody and lyrics of a song on a single page if possible We have kept the concept of Band in a Box using 4 bars per line on the printout since Pop music is usually in 4 bar phrases This aligns these phrases on the beginning of a new line In addition to a lead sheet style printout you can also print out any part of Band in a Box such as the Piano part or Guitar part to practice your sight reading or to learn the parts if you are learning to play that instrument Printing a song is done by pressing the Print button This launches the Print Options dialog box that lets you view the current settings and then press the OK Print button Print out any combination of Chords Notes Lyrics or blank paper You ll need to choose what to print out notes chords lyrics bar numbers and what clefs to include treble bass You can print out the first chorus last chorus or the whole song Margins are available so you can make a left margin to produce a printout
199. list Band in a Box will play each song in the folder for the number of bars you enter into the box Use a setting of 99 bars to play one chorus of each song Set Cue Tap Options The Cue Song Setup dialog has two parts One part defines the Tap Input device the other part determines whether you would like the Tap Input device to just Start the song or if you would like it to SET TEMPO START song Accept Tap Input From options SPACEBAR If this option is checked your computer keyboard s Spacebar would be used as the Tap Input device MIDI Keyboard If this option is checked your MIDI Keyboard would be used as the Tap Input Device The other options here allow you to select a channel and a MIDI note number as the key to start the song This is usually defined as the Rim Shot note number Mouse click If this option is checked your Mouse will be used as the Tap Input Device Any MIDI Event If this option is checked any MIDI Event will be used as the Tap Input Device 1 e Keyboard Metronome pressing a key on your MIDI Keyboard Start Song Start Song and Set Tempo Tap ONCE to START song If this option is checked the song will start after one tap from the selected Tap Input Device Tap 4 x s to SET TEMPO START song If this option is checked the song will start after tapping 4 times on the selected Tap Input Device The Tempo will be set automatically according to your tapped in value 92 Chapter 6 Band in
200. ll circumstances To set this option choose Edit Preferences and set Lead in drum count if drums muted to true default is true StylePicker Enhancements There is a new filter to display only the styles of a certain styles set number as well as displaying the full descriptive name of the styles set The limit of number of styles has been increased to 4 800 to accommodate the large number of third party styles developed for Band in a Box The window size has been increased providing more space for the category descriptions A new Show All button removes any filter set Select Style Prototype Style ZZBOSSA STY Category Styles Preview Stop te 120 Update i Reduce Expand f J BASIN sw 8 165 VintJz Basin Easy 40s 50s swin spazs IA C Prompt w preview J BENNY 8 260 VintJz Benny fost 30s swing Soe25 J CLUE sw 8 85 VintJz Club 30s 40s sw Ballod Sp 25 JIAFREDY sm 8100 VintJz Freddy smart rhy guit 508725 Easy 40s 50s jazz New HOAGY sw amp 95 VintJz Moagy 30s 48s swing S0s25 Orleans swing style 5 Ji HTCLE sw 8 238 VintJz Hot Club 305 405 HotSw Sos25 insts ac p ac b d MATZ 190 VintJz Not Cole2 48 Qt wing Sbe25 br ac G trombone Memo 75 VintJz Night very slow balled SO 2S Fills Older style bass 145 VintJz Sky 30s 4 s bounce S0 25 in 4 Ride cymbal ot 145 VintJz Sky2 30s 40s bounce var S0 25 b Te100 190 VintJz Teddy2 stride Pno Quartet S0825 165 VintJz AlHirt NewOrl Jz Pop S
201. ll double the melody so will use the Mel2 voice The Guitar will double the melody so will use the Mel3 voice Settings for Each Voice Voice Chan Octave Low High O Double V Boost Channel is described above A 1 instrument harmony will use Channel A only Additional instruments can use Channel B and C Note These channels are set to numbers in the Harmony Channels dialog box available in the M MIDI Settings dialog box For the Shearing Quintet harmony we will set the Piano to Channel A the Vibes to B and the Guitar to C Octave This allows the harmony to drop down or go up by a number of octaves This octave change will only happen in a certain range as chosen in the Low and High settings Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 169 For example in the Shearing Quintet harmony we want the 2nd voice of the Piano part to drop down an octave when the melody note is higher than MIDI note 68 the Ab above middle C So when the melody is higher than this the harmony will become a drop 2 voicing There is also an Overall Harmony Octave setting available by pressing the More button that changes the octave of the entire harmony O Double Octave Double This setting lets you double any voice Usually you want to do this by doubling an octave below i e octave 1 but you can set the octave from 2 to 2 The doubling will always be on the same channel if you want a different instrument
202. lodist 18 ColeP 64 bar form The song form refers to the pattern that the verse and chorus repeat An AABA 32 form has 4 sections of 8 bars each the a section is the verse and the b is the chorus or bridge of the song If you d prefer for the song to have no form you could set the song to no form This wouldn t be a very musical setting but might be useful for practicing or ear training The choruses setting determines how many choruses of the song form Melodies are to be generated For example if set to 5 the Melodist will generate 5 choruses enough for an intro chorus ending chorus and 3 Middle Choruses The choruses setting defaults to the choruses present in the current song Preset Buttons All gt at Chords Melody Chords amp Mel There are convenient buttons that will set these settings to popular presets For example pressing the Chords amp Mel button will set the checkboxes to Generate Chords amp Melody but not Solos The All button will generate Chords Melody and Solos The Chords button sets the options to generate Chords only no Melody and the Melody button will set the options to generate only a Melody no chords over an existing chord progression The Defaults button sets the Melodist settings back to Defaults Tempo 95 vi Autolempo The Tempo setting determines the Tempo of the song and defaults to the current tempo o
203. lody Embellisher dialog where settings are made for live embellishment during playback td la Click this button to launch the Chord Builder dialog where you can preview chords roots and extensions and send them to the chordsheet m Chapter 5 The Main Screen 41 Synth Window Piano Keyboard Sg ere neo ee eT MRIS Pom Jo WL tutor Sol Steno Fel Thru eee coy BW EA ARELL ARL ARL ARL ALL ARLA RAAR dh ARALAR d LAR L AA eda AR oL AE d ed A el AR oL h A AM dhA The Piano Keyboard This keyboard displays the notes that are being played by all instruments on various parts of the piano keyboard during playback except drums The MIDI Thru is also displayed on the Keyboard Synthesizer Window Part Settings The Bass Piano Drum Guitar Soloist Strings Melody and Thru buttons are referred to as Parts Settings that can be changed for an individual part include Reverb Chorus Pan Bank Volume and Instrument To change a setting for one of the parts Select the Part by mouse clicking on the part name at the desired parameter to affect the new setting The H button launches a graphic Help dialog box of the keyboard part settings area You can also Option Click an Instrument button The M button mutes the currently selected instrument The JUKE button launches the Band in a Box Jukebox The Combo button lets you assign favorite instrument combos Bass 32 Acoustic Bass The Instrume
204. long v Wizard Uses Smart Notes Title Key Tempo Embel Opens the Main Settings dialog This dialog offers you the option to set the title key and chorus begin end etc These settings are usually entered on the main screen Chorus begins at Shows the bar number for the start of the chorus Choose this command to set a new beginning for the chorus by clicking on the bar in the chordsheet Chorus ends at Shows the current bar setting for the end of the chorus Use this command to set a new ending for the chorus by clicking on the bar in the chordsheet Total Choruses Show the number of choruses for the song click to change Vary Middle Style If checked the middle chorus es of the song will be played in the b substyle 226 Chapter 14 Reference Overall Loop If checked the song will play again from the beginning it time it reaches the end Additional Song Settings These additional song settings are saved with the song Additional Song Settings Mi Vary Style in Middle Choruses Allow Pushes in Middle Choruses Rests i Allow Rests in First Chorus W Allow Rests in Middle Choruses i Allow Rests in Last Chorus Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses Allow Embellishment of Chords Tags C Tag Exists Tag Jump After Bar a Tag Begin at Bar Tag Ends After Bar W Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Start the 2 bar ending early Sel Vary Style in Middle Choruses D
205. lso play accurate guitar voicings in your choice of Pop Jazz Country or Folk Guitar chording There s even a walking guitar comping style that plays guitar that emulates the famous Basie Big Band Jazz style The Guitar Styles play like any regular style and when you view them on the virtual guitar fretboard you can see exactly which strings and frets are used so it is a great learning tool as well Information about Guitar Styles for Playback Guitar Styles are identified by the exclamation point in the style name This is not a requirement but is usually present in the style name Guitar styles require Version 11 of Band in a Box With an earlier version the guitar track will play wrong notes For the typical user who is just using the styles for playback and isn t making their own styles there s not much that you need to know about the styles since they play normally like other Band in a Box styles Guitar Sth Position Key of F Track Displayed is Guitar Guitar voicings You can see which tracks have intelligent guitar parts by looking at the title window of the Guitar fretboard when the track is highlighted If it is a guitar style track it will say Guitar voicings after the name of the track The usual track that has the intelligent guitar styles is of course the Guitar part Some of the styles have more than one guitar so the Piano and or Strings part might also have an intelligent guitar part In these c
206. ly show up in the Favorite Styles dialog Choose this from the menu User Load Favorite Styles or type Shift F9 on your computer keyboard or click on the f button to the left of the STY StylePicker button You can choose to save a Favorites set for use later You can also load a set of favorite styles this way Method 4 Quick Pick You can choose from among the User MEL SOL Har 24 built in styles This list Jazz Swing provides a quick way to choose Country Triplet Feel from among the most popular Ciunt arenatge Bossa Nova music genres myisi Blues Shuffle Blues Even Waltz Pop Ballad Shuffle Rock Light Rock Medium Rock Heavy Rock Miami Sound Latin Milly Pop Funk Jazz Waltz Rhumba Cha Cha Bouncy 12 8 Irish Pop Ballad 12 8 Country 12 8 Old Reggae Step 3 Play your song We ve entered chords on the chordsheet and chosen a style Now it s time to play the song First we need to tell Band in a Box how long our song is how 12 Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial many times we want the program to play through the chords in what key and how fast Framing the Song To tell Band in a Box where the start and end of the song is we look at the middle of the Band in a Box main screen F Song Untitled Memo CF C Style ZZJAZZ STY C t 170 1 37 43 Locate the framing settings there are three of them The numbers 1 32 in brackets are the bar numbers for
207. ly the embellishment occurs live when the song is playing and doesn t affect the Melody track permanently But if you like the embellishment and want to apply it permanently to the melody you can choose the Make Current Embellishment Permanent option Re Embellish NOW Permanent If the song is not currently playing you can still create an embellishment and have it apply permanently by pressing the Re Embellish NOW Permanent button Restore Original Melody The original Melody track is not permanently affected unless you have press the Re Embellish NOW Permanent button If you have done this and want to restore the original melody you can press the Restore Original Melody button Track to use Melody ji The Embellisher is usually referred to as the Melody Embellisher because you ll usually want to have it affecting the Melody track But if you d prefer it to affect the Soloist track you can choose the Soloist track as the Embellisher track Embellisher Settings The settings contain a number of parameters that affect the embellishment They can be turned on and off and can be set with certain percentage strength The settings are Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 135 Humanize The velocities durations legato and timing of the notes are humanized The original velocities etc of the notes are ignored This is useful when the melody has been entered in a stiff manner Octave The octave of the
208. m another style Let s edit the Light Rock Style which is called ZZLITROK STY 1 To select a style for editing from the main screen fF Song Untitled fF y Style ffLITROK STY C t 120 1 32 3 Mouse click over top of the style on the Title window This area on the main screen indicates the style that is currently in memory If you want to edit the current style in this example it is ZZLITROK STY then choose either User Edit Existing User Style or press Option Y If you want to edit a different style then load a different style from the StylePicker or by selecting the Load Style From Disk option on the User menu or press u or select a style from either the Style menu or the STY menu 2 The StyleMaker window is then opened and you will see the display of the style prepared for editing The StyleMaker shows you patterns that have been recorded for Drums and Bass constantly If you would like to see the patterns recorded for Piano Guitar or Strings then select the appropriate instrument button to view them The currently selected instrument for Piano Bass Strings is indicated by the highlighted instrument button In the diagram you ll notice that the Piano is the current instrument Clicking the mouse on a different instrument button will change the instruments The StyleMaker begins by displaying the Drums and Bass Let s have a closer look at the Drums The ZZLITROK STY Drums screen will look sim
209. mand key down a Long hint will appear with additional information Stop Replay Hold Save C MID YC STY Jf F Eson MIDI Button k This saves the current file as a Standard MIDI if Styl file The extension MID will get appended to the file name MIDI file options can be set in the Edit Preferences dialog The hints are configurable inside Band in Text Hints a Box in the Edit Prefs 2 dialog there are Mi Show text hints settings to control length of time before the Mi Show comprehensive hints hint appears whether you d like long hints Siriaas to be the default display and enabling of Delay before hint 759 ms hints overall and in the dialogs and many more Chapter 3 Summary of New Features 23 Let s check out Styles Set 38 Note Styles Set 38 If you ordered Band in a Box 12 as an upgrade the package includes Styles Set 38 About Time This is not one of the styles disks that are included in the first time purchase unless you order the MegaPAK If you have the first time version of Band in a Box and don t have a Band in a Box Folder 38 Style Demos folder use the BB SOLODEMO directory of Band in a Box for this example To try out the new styles from Styles Set 38 press the OPEN button and load in a song e g from Band in a Box Folder 38 Style Demos Once you have a song loaded in the directory will be set to the styles demo Then you can simply
210. mony F11 Select Thru harmony Shift F11 Panic all notes off F12 Direction Arrows Move the cursor in the appropriate direction Adjust the tempo by increments of 5 Chapter 14 Reference 255 lt gt Advance page in either direction Displays the Lyric Mode Hit ESC or to exit p Set Advance Part Marker at cursor location During Playback delete Pauses Song Resumes Playing Song or Increments Patch number by 1 Decrements Patch number by 1 shift Increments Patch number by 5 shift Decrements Patch number by 5 0 9 Select Favorite Instruments Combos esc Stops Song Ctrl 1 Transposes Melody down 1 octave Muting Parts You can also Mute a Part by Option Clicking its button at the top left of the Main Window 2 Mutes the Combo all the instruments a 3 Mutes the Bass 4 Mutes the Piano 3b 5 Mutes the Drums aE 6 Mutes the Guitar 8 Mutes the Strings 3 9 Mutes the Melody 0 Mutes the THRU Selecting Parts Ctrl 2 Selects the Combo Hold down Ctrl Shift and the letter to change the value for the selected part E R Decrease Increase Reverb T Y Decrease Increase Chorus U I Decrease Increase Panning O P Decrease Increase Bank Q W Decrease Increase Volume Holding down Ctrl Shift and 1 9 and 0 keys on top row of keyboard selects favorite instrument patch 256 Chapter 14 Reference Hold down Ctrl Shift and and keys to decrease increase patch by 1 For
211. n Window Settings dialog box Include Notes If you want only a chord lead sheet with no notes then turn this off Otherwise it should be true Bar s below by Sets the position of the bar numbers below the staff The range from highest to lowest position is 1 to 7 Lyrics Lyrics can either be printed above the chords below the staff or not printed at all Normally lyrics are printed below the staff Lyrics Below By Positions the lyrics below the staff with settings from 1 highest to 7 lowest Treble Clef Normally you will want to include the treble clef If you re printing out the Bass part you probably don t want the treble clef Bass Clef For Melodies you likely won t want the bass clef printed For other parts Piano Bass you will want the bass clef printed Clef split at This determines where the notation will split the treble and bass clefs Middle C is C5 Key Signature Every Line Default NO Most modern fake books don t include the key signature every line If you would like this to happen then select this Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 105 Print Range First Chorus Last Chorus Whole Song You can either print the First Chorus Last Chorus or the Whole Song When you change this setting Band in a Box will reset to auto fit the printout to one page if possible Normally you ll want to print the first chorus of the song You ll want to print the last chorus in a song that has a tag ending
212. n memo 134 Solo in Middle Choruses 109 octave 136 Tempo 110 presets 134 Using 113 l settings 133 135 Write To Track 113 turns 137 Melodist Maker i aaa vibrato 137 Anticipations in Phrases 180 Melody track 130 memo 84 262 Index MIDI Channels Setting 87 drivers 86 Files Standard 129 Note Offs 88 settings 86 setup 85 sync 87 MIDI chord entry 9 MIDI file choose tracks 76 options 76 Save 76 MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard 33 186 MIDI Thru 199 MIDI tracks 76 Mono 20 mute tracks 76 Nashville Solos 130 New features audio memo support 20 bass 5ths 18 Carbonized engine 14 chase volumes 18 configuration files 22 convert 3 4 to 4 4 17 drum count in 19 GM menu updates 21 hot keys 21 mono stereo option 20 next style 18 215 Index odd time signature support 14 previous style 18 215 Soloist note density option 20 Sololists increased video memo support new song notation note colors Note Offs octave Octaves odd time signatures omit lead in opening styles OS X Jaguar Panther output chords Pan panning Panther parameters song part settings Part settings paste chords patch changes Patches Allowing Change at Bar fill higher banks saving with songs searching 15 20 34 29 87 88 136 87 14 78 219 11 6 6 6 89 87 130 6 210 212 131 76 42 74 35 130 87 66 75 45 74 Zi 263 patches popup Pause till key pause song PG Music chords piano display pl
213. n of the Wizard Wz The Wizard is an intelligent play along feature that uses your QWERTY keyboard to play along with Band in a Box This also allows you to record to Chapter 5 The Main Screen 43 the melody or soloist track without an external MIDI keyboard and can even be used to trigger the Soloist Wizard Also play along using the Wizard can use the harmony feature so you can play along live from your QWERTY keyboard in 4 part Saxophone harmony for example Turning the Wizard On Off i a Click on the Wz box to turn the Wizard feature On Off or select W Wz the Wizard Playalong option from the Song menu or press Option W The Wizard is only active during playback Playing the Wizard The Wizard keys are active during playback The active keys are the lower 2 rows of the keyboard ASDFGHJKL This row plays PASSING Tones 2nd Fourth Sixth FXCVBAM This row plays CHORD tones root 3rd Fitth Seventh Changing Instruments Settings For The Wizard The Wizard is a play along instrument so is treated just like the THRU instrument Changing Instruments Volume Reverb etc for the Wizard is therefore the same as for the THRU instrument 1 e Click on the THRU button then select instrument etc You can record the Wizard and it will use THRU harmonies if selected Play Regular Notes There is now an option to play regular non smart notes for those of you up to the task of poking out actual melodies on your
214. n of the style such as a verse or in the case of a Jazz Swing style a two beat part The b substyle would be a Chorus section bridge or Swing part in reference to a typical Jazz Swing style On the StyleMaker page you ll see rows of dots that line up with their respective instruments substyle length in beats etc These are locations for your patterns that you ll be recording In order to create a Style you ll need a MIDI instrument of some sort keyboard MIDI guitar drum controllers with a MIDI Out port Styles are made by entering Drum Bass and or Piano patterns in the desired style Drum patterns Are entered in step time Tap mode and Real Time from a typical drum programming screen grid Are always entered as bar patterns longer patterns may be chained together using BAR MASKS described below The drum patterns are entered from the drum screen in 4 sections these 4 sections appear when you click on the drum button A Pattern BE Pattern Endings A patterns This row is for 1 bar drum patterns for the a substyle Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 145 B patterns This row is for 1 bar drum patterns for the b substyle Fills This row is for 1 bar drum patterns for the a substyle Endings This row is for endings Endings are 2 bars 2 patterns of 1 bar each Tip If you are making a simple style you only need to use the top row a patterns Bass P
215. n on 6 channels 11 16 When saving the file as a MIDI file any notes on the guitar channels 11 to 16 are preserved so that any fret positions are preserved Channels 11 to 16 correspond to strings 1 to 6 so that a G5 note on Channel 11 would be shown on the high E string at the third fret More Preferences Preferences 2 Preferences 2 z OK to save load rev vol chorus w songs Send GM mode at startup Send GS Mode On at startup _ Send XG Mode On at startup Mi Turn External Keyboard s Local On at end of session r 1 __ OK to beep with messages wi OK to prompt to reduce expand Lowest Bass Note E2 default F 2 My soundcard or MIDI doesn t have BoE remap them M For Roman Numerals in minor keys use relative major Ww Save Button on main screen works as Save As ral Name MIDI files with MID extension WI Allow larger fonts on Chord Sheet Color for Chordsheet Area Pastel Default Y Note keystroke Ctr Shift C will Soloist Prefs toggle the color from the main screen not inside this dialog GSO Cancel ae OK to save load rev vol chorus w songs Offers global control over additional song settings i e reverb chorus etc that can be saved and or loaded with each song Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 81 Send GM mode at startup For sound modules that are GM compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GM specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and
216. n small increments relative to the rest of the song tracks Measured in ticks or parts per quarter PPQ Insert Beats in Soloist allows you to insert a blank beat or beats into the song relative to the current time signature Delete Beats from Soloist allows you to delete a beat or beats from the song relative to the current time signature Chapter 14 Reference Utilities Copy to Melody Track copies the entire contents of the Soloist track to the Melody Track This is useful for a temporary holding area for your soloist or for bouncing tracks Move to Melody Track copies the entire contents of the Soloist track and erases the original data from the Soloist track preparing it for a new track or data Swap Melody and Soloist Track performs a double copy move so that the data that was in the Soloist track is transferred to the Melody track and vice versa This is also known as track bouncing Convert Harmony to Soloist Track converts a single line Soloist track to include the current harmony selection Remove Harmony or Guit solo from Soloist Track removes a harmony from a track providing that the harmony was put there by Band in a Box in the first place using the Convert Harmony to Soloist Track command Generate Guitar Chord Solo opens the Guitar feature dialog for generating a guitar chord solo Rechannel to Guitar Display converts channels on a track to channels 11 to 16 Channels 11 to 16 are used by Band in
217. nactise anes teree idea oe eae glenda bia Ween a ahaa 85 We JUK BOK abscesses taehacseate a a 90 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 93 Notation tates dosievuagsacideaiaaisvaasialatedauedsapiecaiaasseenlss 93 Prnt Eureen heeded aaa i eMac des cardunganebedelduatatedl 104 Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 107 Automatic Songs The Melodist cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 107 Automatic Solo Generation The Soloist cccccccccccecsssseeeeeees 115 Automatic Guitar Chord Solos The Guitarist cceeeseeeeeeees 120 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 125 Real Tinie RECOMGING oaos nn on E AOE Ogs 125 Step EdC NO Snina E E 127 Entering Notes Manually in the Notation Window ccceeeee 128 Recording with the Wizard Feature ccsssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 128 Importing Pre Recorded MIDI Data ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 Record using The Melodist cccccccsssssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeeenees 130 Additional Options for Melody Soloist Track ccccccccccsesseeseeeeees 131 Chapter 10 Built in Drums 139 Ammaed Drim Kilossa aan AA 139 PDr neKit Main Window nesso noreo atoian 142 4 Table of Contents Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions The StyleMaker ANE EANA IE OE A IE EAA A E EE The Hannon Maker meina a sea een The soloi Makir oaii N The Melodist Maker arse iccss tin visas srbcresidunasenenteeatlanbannud The Guitarist Makerere
218. ncrease Soloist creation times Disable this feature if you are using a slower or low memory equipped computer The Soloist Melodist Velocity Adjust box allows you to quickly boost or reduce the volume of the Soloist or Melodist part relative to the other instrument parts For a realistic mix they are set slightly louder than the other instrument parts ina song The default is 5 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 83 Shrink Expand The Shrink command will reduce durations of chords by e g A4beats gt gt 2beats 2beats gt gt Ibeat Expand doubles the durations of chords e g lbeat gt gt 2beats 2beats gt gt 4beats Unfold convert to 1 big chorus If you have a song with 3 choruses and want to convert it to a single large chorus this command unfolds the song into just that one BIG chorus This is useful for customizing a song When selected Band in a Box will display all choruses and verses of a song without loops or repeats This is a useful command if you wish to make use of the Patch Harmony change at any bar feature or if you are going to generate a MIDI file for use with a sequencer or sequencing program Slide Tracks This allows you to move any of the bass drums piano guitar strings melody or the soloist track ahead or behind by a certain amount Setting these numbers will slide the entire track ahead or behind by the of ticks 120 ticks per beat You could for example slide the bass track
219. ncreased to 4 800 to accommodate the large number of third party styles developed for Band in a Box The window size has been increased providing more space for the category descriptions Technical note The Styles list file is called BBM LST for the OS X version and BBW LST for the OS9 and prior versions Chapter 3 Summary of New Features 19 StylePicker Dialog show all button StylePicker Dialog show all button added which removes any filter set Set Panning to Mono Set Panning To Stereo Mono Stereo menu options Mono Stereo menu options are available to easily switch all parts to mono or stereo Also if your current settings are mono the program will offer to convert to stereo when you exit the MIDI Driver selection dialog On the GS Menu see the dedicated menu items to set to Mono or Stereo Video and Audio Memo support You can add an audio MP3 or video QuickTime memo to your Band in a Box song These are prepared outside of the program but can be associated with the song by using a similar filename to the song see technical note Several of PG Music s new 101 Series programs include these audio and video memos For example there are video guitar memos that demonstrate advanced Jazz guitar comping showing video examples corresponding to the MIDI guitar examples in the Band in a Box song When a song has an Audio memo an Audio Memo Memo n z button appears on screen
220. nd pasting The Miami Pop style has a nice Strings part in this example we ll import the Strings from Miami Pop style into the Light Rock style ZZLITROK STY Let s import the Miami Pop strings into the Light Rock style Choose the LOAD button Select the ZZMIAMI STY style from the file dialog Select the Strings button to display the String patterns for this style Select an 8 beat String pattern to copy and press the COPY button Choose the LOAD button Select the ZZLITROK STY style Press the OPEN button to open this style Choose an empty 8 beat b String pattern because that is where the String pattern was recorded in and press the PASTE button Press the SAVE button to save the Lite Rock style with Strings Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 165 The strings will play in the b substyle only because that s how they were made in the Miami Pop style You could now import the Guitar from the ZZCONTRY STY for example using the steps above It is quite easy to quickly add instruments to styles by importing instruments from other styles Intelligent Guitar Styles Would you like to hear some realistic accurate MIDI guitar from Band in a Box styles with strumming picking and accurate fret fingering You ll get it with Version 11 Guitar Styles are styles that show strummed and picked guitar parts accurately on the guitar fretboard and they sound great These styles a
221. ndow Key Changes Transposition The key signature of the song is displayed in the Title window Old Folks at Home GARNER STY Ab t 185 1 32 3 50 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide To change the key click on the key signature This displays a popup menu where you choose the new key that you would like Band in a Box then asks if it is OK to transpose Lead sheet If you answer Yes the entire song will be transposed to a new key Answer No and the key signature will change but the song will not be transposed Select Cancel to exit without changing the key signature Setting Tempo The tempo of the song is displayed on the main screen in the Title window Tempo can be set on the computer keyboard with 4 taps of either the minus key or the equals key When the tempo is tapped on the key song playback will start automatically at the tapped tempo Old Folks at Home GARNER STY Ab t 185 1 32 3 To change the tempo of a song while the song is playing you may use the and keys to change the tempo by 5 at a time Or you can move the mouse pointer over the tempo setting and click the mouse as follows aT aS The tempo display is broken up into 4 quadrants Mouse clicking in these four areas will change the tempo by 1 1 5 or 5 before or during play j You can change the tempo at any bar in the song with the Edit Bar Settings dialog box Press F5 or the keystroke combination Opti
222. ne as represented by a weight number Let s use COPY PASTE to simplify creating a new drum pattern To make another fill move to an existing fill Choose the COPY button to copy that drum fill to the clipboard Move to an empty pattern Choose the PASTE button to paste in the previous drum fill Now press REC to launch the Drum Pattern Entry screen and step edit the drum fill You will only need to change a few notes of the fill to make a variation of the one you have copied Save the style by pressing the SAVE button Save allows you to rename the style so you don t affect the original ZZLITROK STY Change the Patches that are assigned to the Style Each style can have patches assigned to it For example if you want the style s Piano part to use a Rhodes piano you can select the piano patch of 5 which is the General MIDI number for the Rhodes Electric Piano Press the PATCH button This displays the Misc Style Settings dialog box Select the Set Patches button You will then see a dialog box allowing you to type in patches you would like for the style If you don t need a specific patch use 0 for no change of patch number Let s add Strings to the Style There are 2 ways to do this 1 You could move to the strings part by clicking on the strings button and then record the strings patterns Or 2 The easiest way is to import strings from another style that already has strings This allo
223. ned no alias defined Confirm Substitutions no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined tT no alias defined Eo ns no alias defined Clear Choose Patch from Higher Bank This will display a list of higher bank patches as found in PAT text files Choose a PAT file from the Synthkits folder Insert Current MIDI Chord Enters the last MIDI chord played on the MIDI controller into the current location in the song Output chords to external device This is useful with an external arranger that can read chords in real time Band in a Box will output chords in root position on the selected channel during playback Thru Transpose Settings Transpose the Thru part which is the live playing on the MIDI keyboard so you can play any song in any key Filter for Recording Used to filter the MIDI information that is recorded to the Melody track Return to Factory Settings This will return program options to factory defaults excluding MIDI Drivers and patch map set in the MIDI Settings dialog What add ons do I have Analyzes your current installation and reports which add on Styles and Soloists have been found Chapter 14 Reference 235 Hp Menu View Band In a Box Manual Panic All Notes Off lt F1l gt ao f Visit web site Www pgmusic com Balloon Help is available with context appropriate help for many on screen items Use the Help menu to enable the
224. new songs are added to a folder Save saves an existing song to the same folder with the same file name Save song As saves songs using the file dialog to name the file and choose a folder for the saved file Save Standard MIDI File makes a standard midi file You can save in Type 1 multi tracks or Type 0 single track files Karaoke MIDI files are also supported See the settings in the Edit Preferences dialog box to control how the Melody Solo and Harmony are written to a MIDI file Save song with Patches If you would like to save certain patches with a song then type in the number of the patch instrument that you would like Leave the other instruments at zero O for No Patch change Remember that as with all other Band in a Box functions you use the General MIDI number for the instrument regardless of the synth you are using File utilities opens a sub menu of file utilities Open Next Song Open Previous Song Auto Rename IBM songs Rename any 5ong on Disk Rename Current Song on disk Delete a Song from Disk Nuke it Delete Current Song from Disk Load Previous Style D go FS Load Next Style it dh F8 Open Next Song and Open Previous Song will open the next previous song in alphabetical order For example if the song loaded has a file name of Paul choosing load next file will find the next file in alphabetical order after Paul maybe it would be Peter The hot keys for this
225. ng fF Bl tee harina _ Emb Ervie AAA QUINT SY j Play along with your MIDI Controller Keyboard If you have an external MIDI keyboard controller connected to your computer system you can use the MIDI THRU features to play along with the program Harmonize your play along part by pressing the T button in the synth window to choose a Thru harmony just as you would for the Melody part Change the Style The hundreds of musical styles available for Band in a Box include lots of variations for any style you choose You can even use several styles in the same song by pressing the F5 function key on the computer to open the Edit Bar Settings dialog to change the style at any bar Try different styles by clicking on the STY button to choose z from the StylePicker Styles that are in a similar feel to the prototype will be indicated with an asterisk These would be styles that have the same feel triplets eighth sixteenths and a similar tempo range Styles that have a similar feel but a different tempo range are marked by a caret symbol Choose the Show Styles Filter to display all styles or only styles that match the prototype partially or fully 26 Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Change the Sound Band in a Box has several instrument parts Bass Piano Drums Guitar Solo Strings Melody and Thru You can change patches on any part The easiest way to change patches on a part is to
226. ng phrases 4 bars or more The downside to setting it higher than 20 will be a loss of uniqueness in the phrases generated The setting shouldn t be set much higher than 20 Mix Minor and Major Chord Progressions Default 0 Typical major key chord progressions have progressions like in the key of C Dm7 G7 Cmaj7 whereas in the key of Am they would be Bm7b5 E7 Am6 This setting determines how much the two types of progressions should be mixed in a single song Chord Substitutions Throughout the Form Default 0 Normally an AABA song has identical chords for each a section If this setting is greater than zero the Melodist will generate chord substitutions throughout the various a sections while preserving the identical melodies Number of Variations to Choose From Default 15 As the Melodist is determining what type of phrase to generate it will narrow the possibilities to the number of variations set in this variable Setting a higher number results in more interesting melodies but the chord progressions are more unusual Tempo Range Default from 110 to 180 bpm Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 179 The Tempo Range setting determines the tempo range that the tune will be created with it will be a random tempo in the range The auto tempo setting must be set on the Melodist Selection screen for the tempo range to work Transpose A2 Section Default 30 In songs with an AABA form it is comm
227. ng there Step edit Notes allows you to enter edit a melody in step time using an event list Quantize Melody opens the Quantize dialog Quantize Resolution per bar Starting at bar Chorus 1 Bars to quantize 999 Quantize durations 50 vi Quantize StartTimes vi Quantize Durations 0K Cancel Resolution Choose the division you would like the track quantized to Choosing 16 will Quantize to 16th notes Starting at Bar and Chorus Quantization will begin at the place you select and applied for the number of bars Bars to quantize Leave at 999 to quantize the entire track or specify 1 or more bars Quantize durations Choose 100 if you want the notes quantized exactly to the division Otherwise the notes will be moved the toward the target quantization Quantize Start Times By default this option is set to Yes If you don t want the beginnings of the notes quantized set it to No 240 Chapter 14 Reference Quantize Durations This quantizes the END of the notes By default this is set to Off Humanize w straight feel Humanize w swing feel Band in a Box uses intelligent humanization routines which can humanize a melody from one feel to another from one tempo to another and vary the amount of swing in 8th notes but not randomly The results are very musical with natural sounding MIDI melodies Humanize Melody Opens the Quantize to Ne
228. nies Use Passing Chords Melody Default 100 Band in a Box will sort out when to use passing harmonies based on factors like the duration of the note the next note the chord tone the velocity previous notes and other factors You don t need to be aware of any of this You can visually see when the harmony is using a passing chord The harmony display is usually blue but when there is a passing chord it displays as RED If you don t want passing chords set this value to 0 We usually leave it at 100 Lowest Harmony Note You can set a lowest note for the harmony to play When the melody is low harmonies begin to sound muddy so you can avoid the harmony being played below a certain note 172 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Overall Harmony Octave This is very useful setting It sets the overall octave of the harmony For example when we made the 5 part Trumpets harmony we wanted the harmony to always be played an octave higher than the recorded melody This is because the 5 part harmony is spread over 2 octaves and needs a high Volume Adjust of Entire Harmony You can set an overall adjust to the entire harmony so it will be quieter No harmony if duration less than If harmonies such as Garner Piano harmonize every note they produce unrealistic harmonies since a piano player like Garner wouldn t harmonize notes of a short duration You can specify a harmony to only occur for notes longer th
229. notation and the chordsheet views Drum Window launches the animated Drum Kit Guitar Window launches the on screen Guitar fretboard List Editor Window launches the List Edit utility for editing MIDI events The Event List Editor is not present in the OS X version though it should get added in the future Switch to Next Track Switch to Previous Track selects parts in the row of Notation buttons Sound Canvas Editor launches the built in SC Pro Sound Canvas Editor for the Roland Sound Canvas SC Pro is not present in the OS X version Guitar Tuner opens the built in Guitar Tuner utility program The Tuner is not present in the OS X version though it should get added in the future QuickTime Audio Mixer gives easy access to the system volume controls Chapter 14 Reference 253 Keystroke Commands Hot Keys It s often faster to use keystrokes instead of picking up the mouse We ve added many keystroke hot keys to mute instruments or to adjust volume panning reverb chorus or bank of instrument without using the mouse Keystroke List This is a list of keystroke hot keys These keys are also listed on the pull down menus beside the function Playing a Song 3 A Set the First bar of the Chorus B Copy to the Scrap 3 C Delete the Highlighted Chord Area D Set the Last Ending bar of the Chorus a E Display and edit Favorite Patches Dialog a F Display and edit General MIDI Patch Map
230. notes 137 favorite combos 43 favorite instruments 43 260 Index favorite songs favorite styles From button GarageBand GM menu grace notes Guitar display settings launching Toolbar window Guitar Chord Solo about Guitar enhancements fret position Guitar fretboard Guitar position controller Guitar Styles guitar channels information inversions patterns tracks voicings Guitar Tutor chord tutor fretboard Guitarist chord solo generate chord solo redo save solo Select Guitarist settings 47 47 70 120 73 21 136 195 194 195 194 120 123 243 194 80 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 198 199 198 194 120 121 124 124 121 121 Guitarist Editor chord embellishments chord types Guitarist Maker harmonize melody Harmony changing low root setting channels Harmony area Harmony Enhancements 181 184 183 181 28 66 16 89 47 103 convert harmony to notation 103 remove Hints configuration Hold button Hot Keys new on menus How to register humanize Humanize melody and solo IAC IAC port import chords part file redo section import MIDI chords instrument panel intelligent guitar parts intelligent guitar style 103 23 73 21 22 267 136 131 210 212 33 68 186 192 192 9 42 166 167 Inter Application Communication 210 Index interpret chords auto interpret custom settings Intros Jaguar Jazz down chords Jazz up chord
231. nstruments add their letters following the break Typing c bd will put a rest on all instruments EXCEPT the bass and drums C p This will put a held chord on all instruments except the piano Pushes Pushes in Styles Pushes also called anticipations are chords that are played before the beat For example in Jazz Swing the piano player often pushes a chord change by playing the chord an eighth note before the beat Styles can push any instrument so that the instrument plays before the chord begins This is very common in Jazz and other Pop music and gives the music a more natural sound You need not be concerned with pushes that are in the styles as they happen automatically You need only to be aware that the styles can push the instruments This makes styles sound much better and more syncopated Pushes in Songs Chords can be pushed by an 8 or 16 note For example you can specify a chord to occur a 16 note before the beat and all instruments including drums will play this You can also specify that a chord change should happen before the beat To do this you can either use keystrokes or the chord options dialog box To use keystrokes Type the caret symbol before the chord The caret symbol is located above the 6 on the keyboard Type a single caret to get a chord an eighth note before the beat e g NC Type a double caret to get a chord a sixteenth note before the beat e g NACT
232. nt Panel shows the current instrument for the selected part You can access your patches with ease through the patches popup menu To access this menu simply click on the instrument box you would like to change i e Piano Bass Sol etc move your mouse pointer over the instrument panel box i e Piano 1 Acoustic Piano and click anywhere on the instrument name Then select the new patch from the popup menu BABA 42 Chapter 5 The Main Screen The Favorite Instrument Panel allows you to assign up to 10 of your favorite instruments for each instrument part Selecting Favorite Instruments Patches To select a Favorite Instrument for a particular part you need to select the instrument part by clicking on the desired part Then click on one of the 10 Favorite buttons BABA AE The Favorite Instrument that was assigned to one of the numbers between 1 and 10 will appear in the Instrument Panel Mel013 Acoustic Fiano Selecting Favorite Combos To send one of the Favorite Combo patch changes you need to select the Combo part by clicking on the Combo button Then click on one of the 10 Favorite buttons BABA MEE The Favorite Combo that was assigned to one of the numbers between 1 and 10 will appear in the Instrument Panel Combo 1 patch changes sent This section allows you to adjust the settings for Reverb Chorus Panning Bank and Volume for each instrument part Descriptio
233. nterval This setting allows you to restrict the pattern to be played only if the next chord is a certain interval away For example you can record a bass pattern that is walking up a fourth and then assign an interval of Up 4th so that the pattern would only be played if you re going up a 4th Play Pattern Pushed how often Usual Setting 0 ticks to push pattern 120 ppq Usual Setting 0 Pushed patterns are patterns that are played before the chord begins Jazz styles typically are pushed patterns for the piano Patterns are recorded in the normal way non pushed and then you assign the of time and amount in ticks 120 ticks 1 beat to push the pattern Pushed patterns only play pushed in the song not in the StyleMaker Use Macro Notes Usual Setting No Piano Macros are special notes that you record When they are played back they are replaced by a function as listed below List of Piano Macro Notes same as Guitar String macro notes MIDI Note number 83 B Pop Chord Diatonic Below MIDI Note number 84 C Pop Chord MIDI Note number 85 C Pop Chord Diatonic Above MIDI Note number 88 E Jazz Chord Chromatic Below MIDI Note number 89 F Jazz Chord MIDI Note number 90 F Jazz Chord Chromatic Above Remember to get Macro Notes Working you must Hit the right note number you may be out by an octave Check the Use Macro Notes box Playback the Pattern by pressing the CHORD button Pressing the PLAY button gi
234. nu Descriptions File Menu New Open song lt F3 gt Open Filtered by Style Open Song with Melody Open Favorite Songs Open Song by Title Import Chords from MIDI File re make Song Titles list Save lt F2 gt Save song AS Save Standard MIDI File Save song with Patches rg File Utilities p Play Song HA Replay Already Constructed Song dR Notation Window N Page Setup Print WFP Lyric Window I New is used to blank the chordsheet and start a new song Open song is used to open an existing song Open Filtered by Style lists only the songs in a folder with current style Open Song with Melody lists only the songs in a folder with melodies mg Open Favorite Songs opens the dialog listing the last 150 songs played Open Song by Title opens the Song List with the full title file name and style of each song in the folder A Find function allows you to search the title list Chapter 14 Reference 213 for a word or phrase to find a title quickly For example type in Old folks and the search will find the song title Old Folks at Home as well as any other songs with Old folks in the title Import Chords from MIDI File uses the MIDI file chord wizard to interpret chords from any MIDI file and also read tracks to the Melody and Soloist tracks re make Song Titles list makes the list of song titles for the current folder It can be used to update the list when
235. o set this yourself This results in better looking notation You may change this setting but normally Band in a Box will determine the best tick offset automatically Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 101 Tip The notation of Jazz Swing music will often be improved by a Tick Offset setting of about minus 5 This is because Jazz music is typically played a little after the beat or in Jazz terms laid back Minimize Rests The Minimize Rests checkbox when checked will cause Band in a Box to display the music with minimal rests Use this setting if notes are displayed as shorter than you intended For example if eighth notes are displayed as sixteenth notes because you recorded them staccato Engraver Spacing This is an intelligent option that spaces the Notation to avoid overlapping notation and accounts for space required by accidentals rests etc It should normally be set to On The only reason to set it to Off would be to speed up the Notation redraws but then you will see a mathematical spacing which results in overlapped notes in some situations It is only operative in non editable Notation mode Clefs Split at The Clefs Split at setting determines the split point for placing notes on the Bass or Treble clef The default setting is C5 which is middle C For example you can use a higher split point such as C6 if you want some notes up toa G above middle C to be displayed on the bass
236. ocated patch bank on the right Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 21 Add a Melody Band in a Box is much more than an arranger and accompanist You can also record your live MIDI performance to the Melody track enter a Melody in the Notation note by note or use the Wizard to record from your computer keyboard Enable the Embellisher and the Melody will be embellished as it is played so that you hear a more lively and realistic Melody and it s different every time The Embellisher is only active while the music is playing it doesn t permanently affect the Melody track Harmonize the Melody Press the M button in the CMA CR song title line to add a harmony to the Melody track The Select Melody Harmony dialog box allows you to choose from any of the pre defined harmonies and even allows you to define your own Select Melody Harmony 1 Country Guitar 3 part 0 Memo 2 Nashville Saxes 3 Piano only 4 part voicing 3 Rhodes in 3rds Mute the Piano part 4 Nashville Piano 3Pt 5 Piano double octaves 6 Wes Montgomery 7 Jimmy Smith organ 8 Paul Shaffer 9 Nashville 3 voices es c 10 Singer s Unlimited Edit Note Off 11 trumpet trombone c 12 Clarinet Sax 3rds GoTo 13 Trumpet Sax 3rds 14 trumpet trombone Favs 15 3 part Japanese 16 Shearing Piano oK Cancel Play along with the Wizard The Wizard is an intelligent play along feature th
237. ody Soloist tracks Import Options v Import to Melody from channel s 4 v Import to Soloist from channel s 0 _ Write chord summary notes to Soloist Track v Include Continuous controllers and pitch bend v Include Patch changes include notes early by 120 PPQ i5 Defaults Pop w 7ths Jazz Standard Rock Pop no 7th Jazz Modern Pop Ballad Solo Pia Pop Sol Pia Jazz Chord Options Chord Resolution Include Slash Chords Some Slash Chords zi Walking Bass Fewest Chords Mi Allow Sus chords suspended Bass Part is mainly v Allow 7th seventh chords e g C7 l Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes l Lowest bass note is delayed Method Jazz Leadsheet 7 Chord Wizard MIDI file interpretation dialog Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 33 Select your MIDI file to import with the Open Change button The Chord Wizard will automatically detect the settings for your song choosing a Preset will help the Chord Wizard make the correct choices for the type of song you are importing Make Your Own Songs Now that you know how much fun it is to play music with Band in a Box you ll be pleased to see how easy it is to make songs of your own This section shows you how to make a new song with step by step instructions from start to finish Start with a clean sheet Use either the menu command File New or Edit Clear Lead sheet or the keystrokes Cmd N to blan
238. ody over them There are more than 100 Jazz Pop Rock Latin Country and Classical melody styles Adding Lyrics to your song Use the cursor arrows to move down and enter your lyrics a line at a time Two lines of lyrics are displayed while the song is playing and the lyrics are highlighted as the highlight cell moves across the chordsheet Congratulations Now you know how to produce a complete song arrangement in Band in a Box with a Melody Solo Harmonies and Lyrics either from scratch or from an imported MIDI file You can print out clean lead sheet notation complete with chord symbols And you can save your song in MIDI form for playback from your computer or over the Internet or to send as an e mail attachment You re on your way to making lots of great music with Band in a Box Have Fun Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 39 Chapter 5 The Main Screen Overview of the Main Screen aoe Hand in a Box Violet song MGU 3 28 HS Gass Fiara Crue Kg Fan carey ve ee A hilcall I Seedy Eee emf on fico cfc fc fe i J ec J Stop Jf Replay I Hold Jf From Jf Rec Y Lyrics I Notation YE Same VP MD Y STY OP Meldist Sele YP Com Y Print Jl El Violet Song F Memo Y CMY F ine hirriny 9 _ Emb h JASQUINT STY t 1 0 5 36 3 as aa E e roe hiriren 3 FMaj D7 Gr F6 Gr F6 BbMaj Gm G7 F Here is the main screen of B
239. of the song At 120 ppq resolution a quarter note equals 120 ticks and a bar of 4 4 time is 480 ticks This number includes the lead in bar of 480 ticks Bar Beat Number Tick The Bar Beat and Tick show the time that the note is played Ticks are the smallest unit equal to 1 120 of a quarter note Duration This is the length of time that the note is played 120 ticks of duration 1 beat quarter note Previous Next Event Use these arrow controls to move through the MIDI track one note at a time Insert Before After This allows you to insert an event before or after the currently displayed event Note You can get better results by using the Notation window to edit notes instead of this window To do this you open the Notation window and mouse click on a note while holding down the option key in Staff Roll or Editable notation mode Entering Notes Manually in the Notation Window You can enter melody notes directly to the track in the Notation window in either the Editable Notation Mode or the Staff Roll Mode Enter the Editable Notation mode from the Standard Notation screen with a single mouse click on the N button In the Editable Notation mode you can enter move and edit notes and rests using standard mouse techniques point and click drag and drop and Option Click to open the Note Edit dialog box Recording with the Wizard Feature This is a very helpful feature if you don t have a MIDI keyboar
240. of this dialog depends on what chords are present at the highlighted bar This bar number is shown in the dialog and may be changed In the example above the chord is an F7 chord so the substitutions shown are for an F7 chord The substitutions shown may work for up to 4 bars depending on the substitution In the examples above the substitutions work for 2 bars You can control what types of substitutions to see by using the Jazz Pop checkbox Some substitutions include more chords than the original some simplify the progression and these can be viewed using the checkboxes You can elect to exclude substitutions that have a chord on each beat The Types of Substitutions to include combo box will filter the substitutions to include only the best substitutions or all of them The reload Recompile button is only used if you have edited the chordsub txt file to add your own substitutions Once you see a substitution that you like you can enter it onto the worksheet by pressing the Do Substitutions now button or double clicking on the substitution line You can then move the current bar to the next part of the song that you need a substitution for and repeat the process You can undo the substitution by pressing the Restore or All button Auto Chord Substitution Dialog You can quickly auto generate substitutions for an entire song or portion of a song using the auto substitution dialog accessed from the User menu For
241. olos Set this option to On to permit the Soloist to play a solo over all the songs selected for Jukebox playback Tip We have created a special Jukebox directory of songs that showcase the many Soloists available Take a moment to hear this showcase by following these steps Change to this directory by loading opening a song from the SOLODEMO folder but instead of playing the song you have loaded press the Juke button Ensure that the Generate Solos checkbox is set selected checked If you enable Auto Choose Soloists the program will select an appropriate Soloist for each Jukebox song Change Soloist w each chorus instructs the program to choose different Soloists for each chorus of a song For example if Band in a Box encounters a three chorus Jazz tune during jukebox playback the program might Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 91 choose a Saxophone solo for the first chorus a Trumpet for the next and a Guitar or Piano for the last chorus When you select Play Juke Box the Select Soloist dialog will pop up with a suggestion to use a Soloist for the first song in the jukebox list This is normal Press OK to accept the Soloist suggestion The Jukebox will not bother you with the Select Soloist dialog again it will simply choose an appropriate Soloist for any given song in the Jukebox song list Preview Switch to next song after Bars Use this setting to preview the songs in a Jukebox
242. ome notes or menu Windows List Editor Window Ctrl Shift L you ll notice that the Melody track contains notes from Channel 4 which is what we specified in the Chord Wizard dialog Importing part of a MIDI file or redoing a section of the chordsheet rd Import Complete song Insert to BB starting atbar 1 How many bars to import 103 Normally we d want to import an entire MIDI file worth of chords But if you only want to import some bars you can deselect the Import Complete Song 192 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards checkbox and then specify where to start in the MIDI file i e the of lead in bars in MIDI file and what bar to start at in Band in a Box Insert to BB starting at bar and the of bars to import How many bars to import For example using the song Violet Song MID we could redo a section of the song using different settings for example a chord resolution of 1 beat instead of 2 beats If we were unhappy with the results at bar 7 and 8 we could redo this by making the settings as follows C Import Complete song Insert to BB starting at bar How many bars to import Other Settings for the Chord Wizard C OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file Band in a Box and PowerTracks Pro songs contain special events that write the exact chord names into the MIDI file So if the Chord Wizard sees these events it will use them instead of interpreting the chord
243. on B or go to Bar Settings in the Edit menu to open the dialog The tempo change you enter takes effect at the beginning of the bar and remains until a new tempo change at another bar is inserted Song Intros Choruses and Endings A typical song has the following elements Introduction Intro If present is typically 4 bars long Chorus es Typically 3 or 4 choruses in a 3 minute song Ending Typically a 2 bar ending following all of the choruses Note We use the term chorus as it is used in Jazz music A chorus therefore means once through the entire form of the song A typical length of a chorus is 32 bars A song may have the form AABA where the A sections are verses and the B section is the bridge This entire form AABA is considered one chorus Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 5I Adding An Intro You select the beginning and end bars of the chorus If you select a bar greater than 1 for the first bar of the chorus then Band in a Box knows that you want the previous bars for an intro Example 4 bar intro to a song Type in the 4 bars of intro chords starting at bar 1 of the chordsheet Then at bar 5 you will begin typing in the chords of the chorus Set the beginning of the chorus to bar 5 by selecting the Chorus begins at option on the Song menu and then clicking on the measure of the first bar of the chorus Auto Generate Intro Bars Band in a Box will automatically generate a chord progression as
244. on for the second a section to be transposed For example the first a section might be in the key of Eb and the second would be transposed up to the key of Gb Melodists store these settings and some Melodists are set to transpose the A2 sections This setting determines the chance that the song will be generated with a transpose The transpose will be usually 2 3 or 4 semitones The song will only be transposed if the A2 transpose setting isn t set to none on the Melodist selection screen Anticipations in Phrases Default 20 Melodic phrases often begin a little before the beat this is referred to as an anticipation This setting determines what of the phrases will be anticipated Always Use This Soloist 4 Jazz swing Vibes Since Melodists can also generate Solos a specific Soloist can be set in this setting If set to 0 no Soloist the program will intelligently pick a Soloist Melodists can be copied and pasted to quickly make new Melodists that are variations of each other Export Import You can export save and import load individual melodists to from M1 files This would be useful if you wanted to send a Melodist to a friend for example The entire Melodist file with 256 Melodists may be saved to a MEL file The usual file is DEFAULT MEL The DEFAULT MEL file is auto saved every time the OK button is pressed so you don t need to explicitly save by the Save As
245. ontrol what type of melody will be generated Here s an explanation of these options Unique Themes Default 100 178 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions This is normally left at 100 But if you want to force the Melodist to stick with the same theme throughout the song set this to a lower value say 80 It shouldn t be set much lower than 80 Unusual Placed Phrasing Default 0 The Melodist tries to make phrases that are appropriate for the position in the song For example the first 2 bars of the melody are appropriate for opening phrases But if you want to experiment with phrases that don t follow these rules set the Unusual Placed Phrasing to a value higher than 0 e g 30 Simple 1 and 2 Endings Default 80 This setting only applies to Melodists that are using the Jazz Swing MEL1 ST2 or Waltz MELWLZ1 ST2 databases This determines the of time that endings of the A sections in AABA forms will be simple endings 1 or 2 notes instead of complete phrases Usually AABA tunes end with simple phrases at the end of the A section so this option is normally left at 80 or higher Choose Unusual Chord Progressions Default 0 If set to a value other than zero the Melodist will generate a typical chord progressions For example instead of a Dm7 G7 Cmaj7 the Melodist might generate Dm7 Db7 Cmaj7 Am7 Force Long Phrases Default 20 This determines the of time that the Melodist will try to generate lo
246. oose the Show Styles Filter to display all styles or only styles that match the prototype partially or fully Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box 35 Select Style Prototype Style ZZBOSSA STY Category All A J ALL CK Z Jazz Pop Rock Country Folk Latin Waltzes Classical Ethnic Misc Utility W Fretboards Country Rock 31 Alt Rock 32 Chicago Blues World Styles 34 Requested Jazz Rock On 36 Styles AZAWINUL ZZBLUSHF ZZBLUSTR ZZBOSSA ZZBOUNCY ZZCHACHA ZZCONTRY ZZCOUN12 ZZETHNIC ZZFUNK ZZHEVROK ZZIRISH ZZJAZOLD ZZJAZWAL ZZJAZZ ZZJAZZSW ZZLITROK ZZMEDROK ZZMIAMIP ZZMILLYP ZZOLCTRY Preview Stop t 120 Update Reduce Expand 160 Zawinul Fusion p Prompt w preview 125 Blues Shuffle Style 150 Blues Straight Style 140 Bossa Nova style 5 instruments including 135 Bouncy Style guitar and strings Cin 125 Cha Cha Style BEJ 125 Country 4 4 Style 120 Country 12 8 feel 125 Ethnic Style 120 Funk Style 120 Heavy Rock Style 120 Irish Style 130 Original Jazz Swing Style 160 Jazz Waltz Style 160 Jazz Swing Style t 140 110 160 130 Jazz Swing Variation Styles Disk 0 110 Light Rock Style Examples 145 Medium Rock 120 Miami Sound Machine 9 Milly Pop 13 Old Country 12 8 feel Memo Girl From Ipanema Desafinado _ Play when chosen Preview on Double Click Re Build Print gt m_e Melody Patch r Show Styles Show All Styl
247. or mouse click on another measure and the chord s will be erased Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide a7 Insert or Delete Bars Inserting or deleting measures in the chordsheet saves a lot of copying or re typing of chords when changes are made to an arrangement The commands to insert or delete bars from the chordsheet are To insert bars choose Edit Insert Measure s or i and you can insert a given of bars To delete bars choose Edit Delete Measure s or d and you can delete a given of bars Breaks Rests Shots and Held Chords Breaks are points in a song when one or more of the instruments rests plays a shot or holds a chord Rests You can have any some or all instruments rest at any bar For example you could rest all instruments except the bass for the first 4 bars then add in the piano for 4 bars and then add in the entire band for the rest of the song You may optionally disable the rests in the middle or final choruses where people are likely taking solos and rests are not appropriate A chord is specified as a REST by adding 1 period after the chord C indicates a C chord that is a REST Shots You can make certain instruments play a shot where the chord is played and then a rest follows For example the song Rock Around The Clock has a shot on beat 1 followed by a rest for 2 bars A chord is specified as a SHOT by adding 2 periods after the chord C indicates a C chord t
248. or a song that you want to see the 2 bar ending printed The whole song could be printed if you ve played differently for each chorus Use the Edit Unfold Convert to I big chorus option to make each chorus different Include Lead In Bar If your song has a lead in pickup to bar 1 then make sure you ve checked the lead in Actually Band in a Box has set this for you by determining if there are any notes in the lead in measure You can over ride this automatic setting if necessary Staves per page This determines how many staves will be shown per page The title takes up 1 stave on page 1 so that if you set the staves to 10 you will get 9 staves the title on page 1 and 10 staves on page 2 3 etc Title Style Composer Tempo Copyright The title is written in a big font that is underlined and centered LIKE THIS There are a and A buttons at the right side of the Title field These change the case of the title A UPPER CASE a Lower Case If the title is long or you re using big margins then the font size will be reduced and the font won t be underlined for the title Titles are limited to 60 characters The name of the Style that is saved with the song is automatically entered Click on the T button to insert the current Band in a Box tempo or type a tempo into the Tempo field yourself The other fields are for Composer Copyright information You can get the symbol by pressing the b
249. ord was a C7 You should center the bass patterns around MIDI note 48 C3 Tip If you are uncertain what to play edit another style that comes with the program by pressing the LOAD button and selecting another style you can then play the bass patterns by pressing the PLAY button to see what patterns we used to make it and imitate them in your style After you have recorded the bass pattern a dialog box with options will appear This allows you to specify the conditions that must occur for this pattern to be played back in the song These are called masks Usually you can just accept all the defaults which allow the pattern to be played at any time Bass Pattern Options Bass Pattern Recorded Relative Weight 5 PlayBack Bar Mask YH PlayBack Beat Mask 0 Roman Num Mask i Chord Type Any Chord Interval Next Chord Upa Semitone Half Octave Range Full Qetave Play Pushed how often Ticks to push 120 ppa Ok To Use Macro Notes Relative Weight Usual Setting 5 Set this number higher lower if you want the pattern to be played more less often than the other patterns on the same row This number is also displayed on the main StyleMaker screen A setting of 9 always is a special setting that instructs the pattern to always be played instead of the other patterns on the same row These patterns always have other options set which specify the times that this pattern would be eligible to be played C
250. ording in it yet Let s use the Guitar Tutor to show us what guitar chords to play during this song To turn the Guitar Tutor on launch the Guitar window and press the Tutor button Guitar Tutor Enable Chord Tutor Display on fretboard Ww Play chords through MIDI Guitar Patch Type of chords to display When Guitar Chord Tutor is enabled guitar chords will display on fretboard and optionally will be heard through MIDI on the THRU part Show muted high note of 3 note comping Copy to Melody Track Copy to Soloist Track Cancel Set Enable Chord Tutor Display and Play Chords through MIDI Select the Walking Jazz 4 note chords tutor type and press OK You ll now hear and see guitar chords and patterns of chords played in a Jazz style along to the song In the example above the chord is an Eb7 chord and the tutor is showing a common Jazz voicing for an Eb7 chord Turn the tutor off by disabling the Enable Chord Tutor Display setting 200 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards Chord Substitution Wizard Reharmonizing a song with the Chord Substitution Wizard is a fun and educational way to perform or practice a familiar song in a brand new way This feature is very easy to use simply highlight an area of chords and select Chord Substitution The possible chord substitutions are instantly displayed for you For example if you had chords such as Dm7 G
251. ore bar 1 beat 1 of the Melody begins as it normally would in a 4 4 style Transform Waltz Melody to 4 4 De Strauss the Melody If you have a song with a 3 4 time signature you can now instantly hear it as a 4 4 feel Simply load the Waltz song and then change the style to a 4 4 style Band in a Box will prompt you to transform the melody to a 4 4 feel and will then will change the melody There s also a dedicated menu item for this Melody Edit Utilities Transform to 4 4 Band in a Box uses intelligent algorithms to transform the melody to the new time signature Note If loading from the StylePicker window you need to have Prompt w preview for the prompt option to appear Chapter 3 Summary of New Features 17 To use this feature load in any song in 3 4 time Then load in a 4 4 style If there s a Melody or Soloist present you ll be asked if it s OK to change the Melody from 3 4 to 4 4 If you click YES to that the transformation will occur and you can listen to the Melody in 4 4 time Answer Question OK to change Melody from Waltz to 4 4 If you click NO to the offer to transform the Melody you can still convert it later by choosing Melody Edit Utilities Transform 3 4 to 4 4 Note that if you choose the manual command the Melody prior to transformation should have 6 beats before bar beat 1 of the Melody begins as it normally would in a 3 4 style Bass player plays better St
252. orted data with your existing Melody track Record using The Melodist There s always the option to let Band in a Box do it all by writing an original melody with its Melodist feature It will do this over the chord changes you enter in the chordsheet or it will generate its own changes for whatever style you select from the Melodist dialog 130 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks This feature is useful for stimulating ideas for creating instant songs for sight reading exercises to demonstrate different musical styles or for background music Additional Options for Melody Soloist Track Manipulation of melodies is done with functions like insert delete beats time shift track copy melody from bar to bar etc Press Option C to Copy Chords and or Melody over a range of bars Time Shift Melody This will move slide the melody a certain number of ticks There are 120 ticks per quarter note For example to give the song a more laid back feel time shift it about 10 ticks ahead Intelligent Humanize of Melody and Soloist track Most quantize routines can leave the music sounding stiff and unmusical Some attempt to humanize a part by adding randomization which rarely has the desired effect since humans don t randomly change timing or volume Band in a Box uses intelligent humanization routines that can humanize a melody from one feel to another from one tempo to another and vary the amount of swing to 8th notes The
253. owever many MIDI files lack chord symbols so they become difficult to learn without the user having to figure out the chords in a time consuming process Now you can open up any MIDI file in Band in a Box and Band in a Box will automatically figure out the chords of the song for you It automatically analyzes the MIDI file figures out where the Bass Piano Melody and other tracks are and then figures out the chord changes for the song The chords are written onto the Band in a Box chordsheet like any other song This allows you to quickly learn how to play a song from a MIDI file just read it into Band in a Box and you ll see the chord symbols and then learn the melody You can also read tracks into the Melody and Soloist tracks You can import the chords from a MIDI file To do this first blank the chordsheet by choosing File New Then select the menu item File Import Chords from MIDI File or press the keystrokes Ctrl Option I This launches the Chord Wizard dialog Chord Wizard MIDI File name of lead in bars in MIDI file 2 v Import Complete song nsert to BB starting at bar 1 How many bars to import 32 Mi Auto interpret settings from MIDI file Part Options v Import Chords Bass part is on channel s 2 Chording track is on channel s 3 1 OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file v Open to Melody Soloist tracks Import Options vi Import to Melody from channel s 4 v Import to Soloist
254. ox OS9 booted from Mac Classic If they are present on your system they will appear in the Band in a Box MIDI Drivers dialog Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 85 Selecting a MIDI Driver To select a MIDI driver go to M Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime to open the MIDI Drivers dialog MIDI Drivers Band In A Box has detected the following MIDI Drivers Please choose which you would prefer to use QuickTime Music Instruments built in Mac sounds MacOS X CoreMIDI Cancel Choose the MIDI driver that you want to use then click on OK to close the dialog MIDI Settings The MIDI Settings dialog box lets you make settings for each part bass drums piano etc and also to set the Harmony channels MIDI Settings CHANNEL OCTAVE PATCH VOLUME REVERB CHORUS PAN Bass Piano Drums Guitar Soloist Strings Melody Thru M Piano Display MIDI syne Harmony M Color Notes W Overall Volume Changes M Allow Patch Changes rd Style Volume Changes MI Style GS Patch Changes C Extra Note Offs Concert Pitch Adjust o View GS Map Cancel 86 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide CHANNELS Range 0 to 16 If set to 0 part will be Off Some synths e g MT32 give higher priority to lower channel s so if you are running out of notes you should assign important parts e g Melody a lower channel than other parts e g Guitar OCTAVE This adjust
255. pations Mi Grace Notes W Doubled Notes Update Current Embellishment W Extra Notes i Defaults More Stats M Note turns Re Embellish NOW Permanent __ A Vibrato Gia EET PEAT E RET EEEE Mi Laid back feeling to Melody Restore Original Melody Track to use Melody on Undo Play Stop Pause W Live Auto embellish during every playback Live Auto embellish during every playback is the same setting that is on the main page checkbox If enabled embellishment will occur during every playback If disabled embellishment will not occur unless you choose the Re Embellish NOW Permanent button in the dialog Embellisher Presets Preset The presets allow you to choose a combination of common settings for the Embellisher quickly The Embellisher Memo describes the current embellishment with statistics counting the number of embellished notes 134 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks Memo Total Notes 481 Trumpet Octave adj 0 av pitch 67 ideal 70 Extra Notes 1 Turns 5 Doubled Notes 1 Grace Notes 5 Anticipated Notes 42 Reduced Antic 13 Vibrato Notes 27 Update Current Embellishment If the song is playing and the Embellisher is enabled you can update the embellishment by pressing this button This is useful if you ve changed settings and want to hear what the new embellishment sounds like Make Current Embellishment Permanent Normal
256. pen type of dialog The StylePicker can always show more than 685 files so it isn t an issue there Styles can also be selected by mouse clicking directly on the name of the style in the Title window The Choose a Style dialog box will appear Select Style cctotyps Style GARNER STY Category Styles Preview Stop t 190 Update Reduce Expand All A J BYRDDUO 140 Byrd Duo Bossa Guitar amp Bass D SD 24 C Prompt w preview ALL CK Z BYRDQRT 140 Byrd Quartet Bossa quartet SD 24 Jazz BYRDSOL 140 Byrd Solo Nylon Guitar Bossa SD 24 Pop Rock BYRDTRI 140 Byrd Trio Bossa Guitar Trio w SD 24 Duo Bossa Nylon Country Folk A CAMPGIT 135 Campfire swing Guitars SD 24 Guitar ala CByrd amp ac Latin CAMPST8 160 Campfire st 8 ac guitars SD 24 Bass only Guitar Uses Waltzes FREDDIE 175 Freddie solo FrGreen Rhy guitar SD 24 intelligent voicings Classical CHETBR 22 ChetBrushes UpTempo sw Travis g SD 24 using typical Bossa Ethnic Misc A1280RK 70 Orchestral 12 8 SD 11 syncopation T 130 Utility 128ROK1 70 12 8 Power Rock Ballad SD 36 W Fretboards 128ROK2 65 12 8 Loud Rock feel SD 36 Country Rock 31 12ST amp BAN 125 12 String Guitar amp Banjo SD 30 Alt Rock 32 3GIT_16 100 3 Guitars i6ths SD 19 Chicago Blues 60_ROK8 123 60 s Brit Rock 8 No Brushes SD 22 World Styles 34 60_STRUM 135 60 s Brit Strum guitars Pop Ro SD 22 t 140 120 160 Requested Jazz 60 ROK8 123 60 s Brit Rock 8 Bl
257. play in selected position and sizable guitar fretboard Guitar players will be able to read along to a Melody Solo simply by looking at the guitar fretboard An easy intuitive and fun way to learn guitar Launching the Guitar Window To launch the Guitar Window press the guitar button or Ge Ctrl Shift G or choose the menu item Windows Guitar Window Quick Tour of the Guitar Window Once launched you ll see the various areas of the Guitar window The top title bar states the key of the song is F the Soloist track is displayed and the guitar is at the 5 position The fretboard is displayed with the highest notes of the guitar at the top and the open position of the guitar on the left There are names for the open strings displayed on the left E B G D A E There are fret positions marked at the bottom of the fretboard You can mouse click on these positions to change the current fret position In the diagram above the current position is position 5 There are Note Names displayed They are displayed for two positions on the guitar fretboard One of the positions is the scale beginning with the third of the scale on the lowest string In the key of F this is the 5th position beginning on an A note the third of the scale Because it begins on the third of the scale this position is referred to as the Phrygian Position since an A Phrygian scale is the same as an F scale Similarly the other popular scale is the sc
258. press the SONG button to see a full list of the songs Press the Jukebox button to hear all of the styles demonstrated one after another There are 20 new About Time styles in Styles Set 38 11_8_EV STY 11_8_POP STY 13_8_POP STY 14 8 JAZ STY 15_16POP STY 19_16_44 STY 2416VISH STY 54_EVEN STY 54_FSTRK STY 54_SWING STY 58_28_ 38 STY 58_78POP STY 68 BOSSA STY 68_JAZZ1 STY 78_CTRY STY 78_POP STY 78_ROCK STY 98 4 S5 STY 98_JAZZ1 STY 98_ROCK STY 24 11 8 even 8ths style 11 8 meter Pop style 13 8 meter Pop style 14 8 Jazz style 15 16 meter Pop style 19 16 meter amp 16 16 meter style 24 16 Vishnu Jazz Rock Fusion style Even 5 4 meter style 5 4 fast 60s style Rock style 5 4 meter with Swing based 8th notes style Even 5 8 meter style 5 8_7 8 Pop style 6 8 Bossa style 6 8 meter Swing 8 Jazz style Country Pop style in 7 8 meter style Pop 7 8 meter style 7 8 Rock style 9 8 meter style Jazz Style in 9 8 meter 9 8 Rock style Chapter 3 Summary of New Features Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box You can arrange record save and print your own song ideas with Band in a Box Just type in the chords to any song choose a style and press Play to hear the band play a full arrangement Have some fun by changing to different styles For even more fun record a MIDI Melody or have Band in a Box write a Melody for you Add Harmony an automatically improvised Soloist an Int
259. r money will be refunded In no event will PG Music Inc be liable to you for any damages including but not limited to lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or the inability to use such program even if PG Music Inc or an authorized PG Music Inc dealer has been advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by any other party TRADEMARKS Band in a Box PG Music and PowerTracks Pro are the registered trademarks of PG Music Inc in the United States Canada and other countries Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Apple the Apple logo iMac Macintosh Mac Panther Power Mac QuickTime and True Type are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and should be noted as such PATENTS Band in a Box is protected under US Patent 5990407 Printed in Canada 2 PG Music Inc License Agreement Table of Contents PG Music Inc License Agreement 2 Chapter 1 Introduction 6 Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial 8 Step 1 Typing in the Chords erasoari aa 8 Step 2 CHOOSING A SOY le icdncSeacesvaceades succansicace suet tabengetdnenadelsnooedsideceonees 11 Stepo Play your song Nanni n E G 12 Chapter 3 Summary of New
260. r Window is the toolbar These are the Guitar Settings See below for details The Position button This toggles between the 2 popular positions displayed with note names When you open the Guitar Window the first thing you ll want to do is choose the track that you want to display Usually this will be a Melody track or a Soloist track In the illustration here the Melody track is the current track and it has a red rectangle around it to indicate this To get to the Soloist track click on the S button or use the keystrokes Ctrl FS Similarly you can display other tracks like Bass Piano etc Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 195 The Guitar Settings Dialog Guitar Settings Note Display Fretboard Octave W Show Notes at Aeolian Position wi Current Track wi Auto Set Octave vi Show Notes at Phrygian Position wi MIDI Thru wi Use Index Finger Position Multi Channel Mode SEVER OE Base Channel inl Auto Set Position Phrygian Position Fretboard Color iM Auto Switch Position Brown wi Show out of range notes Guitar Width def 550 934 m Show muted note of guitar style comping Black Guitar Height def 80 136 Use Inlays Set to Defaults Update M Send Notes to Editable Notation Window 100 150 200 300 a Output guitar track on 6 channels for this song oK Cancel J Note Display Ki Current Track R MIDI Thru Note Display
261. r note for at least 50 ticks 120 ticks 1 quarter note then a chord will get voiced 90 of the time Similar interpretations for notes occurring on Beat 2 3 and 4 You can see that the threshold is higher for notes on beat 2 and 4 which is how a guitar player makes chord solos Passing notes are defined as short duration notes that aren t on the beat and are followed by a note that is on the beat In the example above passing notes will never be voiced as chords since the tick threshold is set to zero There is a further threshold applied to whether or not a note is voiced to a chord These are durations in milliseconds 182 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Time threshold to get a chord ms Time to previous note 100 ms Time to the next note In the settings as illustrated if the note occurs less than 100ms after the previous note the note will not be voiced as a chord If the note is followed by another note within 80ms then the note will not be voiced as a chord Strumming Settings If the Guitar Chord were all played at the same time it would sound as if it was plucked Guitar playing is more typically a strum Strumming Speed of strummed chords 80 ms Delay start time of strum 0 Fi Plucked Strummed Strum Speed If you set the Speed of the strum to say 80ms then the guitar chord will be strummed over a period of 80ms Strum Delay If the Delay start time
262. r you ve played a chord MIDI file Chord Wizard This allows you to read in the chords from any MIDI file and write them onto the Band in a Box chordsheet First blank the song by choosing File New Choose File Import Chords from MIDI File or press Ctrl Option D You ll see this Chord Wizard dialog Chord Wizard MIDI File name Open Change F All Use Clipboard of lead in bars in MIDI file 2 Key Tempo 120 TimeSig 4 4 M import Complete song Presets nsert to BB starting at bar 1 Defaults P Pop w 7ths 9 Jazz Standard How many bars to import 32 Rock Pop no 7th Jazz Modern M Auto interpret settings from MIDI file Pop Ballad Solo Pia Pop Sol Pia Jazz Part Options Chord Options import Chords Chord Resolution Bass part is on channel s 2 Include Slash Chords Some Slash Chords v Chording track is on channel s 3 Bass Part is mainly Walking Bass Fewest Chords Y OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file F Allow Sus chords suspended v Open to Melody Soloist tracks M Allow 7th seventh chords e g C7 Import Options l Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes M import to Melody from channel s 4 T Lowest bass note is delayed v Import to Soloist from channel s 8 Method Jazz Leadsheet v Write chord summary notes to Soloist Track v Include Continuous controllers and pitch bend ena INTERPRET CHORDS NOW C OK
263. rd Soloist From Bar records at the current location of the highlight cell Step edit Notes allows you to enter edit a solo in step time from an event list Quantize Soloist opens the Quantize dialog The Humanize feature is an advanced version of this function Humanize w straight feel Humanize w swing feel Band in a Box uses intelligent humanization routines which can humanize a Soloist from one feel to another from one tempo to another and vary the amount of swing in 8th notes but not randomly The results are very musical with natural sounding MIDI solos Humanize Soloist opens the Soloist Quantize to New Tempo or Feel dialog The humanize effect is broken down into 5 main categories Tempo Lateness 8th Note Spacing Legato and Feel Transpose Soloist allows you to transpose the Soloist track without affecting the other tracks in the song Copy Ist chorus to all song stretches the Soloist track out over the entire song i e first last and middle choruses Kill entire Soloist erases the soloist track and any data that was contained therein Kill Soloist Choruses eliminates the Soloist from the First Chorus Middle Choruses or Last Chorus as selected from a list box Adjust Level of Soloist allows you to increase or decrease the volume velocity of the Soloist track without affecting the other tracks TimeShift Soloist Part ticks allows you to move the Soloist forward or backwards i
264. rd Substitutions Thruout Form Change Instrument Set Number of Variations to Choose From CMAnAEAE Tempo Range 1230 to e ASTY J I Clear Transpose A2 section STY is Swing amp th notes Anticipation in Phrases Legato Boost W Generate 64 bar form Always Use This Soloist 4 Jazz Swing Vibes b Melody Note Range SS to 79 Increase lateness by 120 ppa g 0 Increase Sth note spacing by 120 ppa 0 0 Increase velocity by 127 127 Copy Paste Export import Cea GED Ccance This dialog has settings that allow you to create a Melodist Num 18 Swing 64 bar ColeP bal Title Swing 64 bar ColeP Memo Swing 64 bar ColeP autoloads SINATRASTY 176 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions The Num selection box allows you to select the Melodist that you d like to edit The top area of the Melodist Maker screen allows you to set the Title of the Melodist and supply a Memo Melodist is Even l6th notes Y Choose ST2 Database ST2 style MELPOP1 S 8T2 9 Default STZ is Even 16th notes The ST2 area allows you to select the associated ST2 database for the Melodist Here are some ST2 Melodist databases MELI ST2 Jazz Swing 8 notes MELPOP1 ST2 Pop Ballads 16 notes MELWLZ1 ST2 Waltzes 8 notes MELROK1 ST2 Rock 8 notes Note Soloist databases also have extensions of ST2 but they are not compatible with Melodists Melodist databases can be easily
265. rd Wizard results interpreting from Violet Song MID Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 191 So that we can see how well the Chord Wizard did we can compare it to the correct chords of the song input by a musician listening to the song You can see these by loading in the song Violet Song MGU LEI F6 The correct chords for the song Violet Song MID As you can see by comparing the two sets of chords the Chord Wizard got almost all of the chords correct in this example The Chord Wizard purposely avoids chords like C13 it will put a simpler C7 instead since this is more like a typical lead sheet If you ve read in the entire MIDI file you have 103 bars of chords on the Chord sheet This actually contains 3 choruses of the song You might want to reduce that to a single chorus by setting the chorus end of the song to bar 36 and then erasing the excess bars after bar 36 by choosing Edit Erase Examining the song that has been interpreted by the Chord Wizard You ll notice that the title Violet Song key F and tempo 120 have been set to the values found in the file Part markers are not set the Chord Wizard doesn t try to guess where part markers might be occurring You need to put the part markers in yourself You also need to choose the style to use a Jazz Swing style in this case If you examine the Melody track by opening the Editable Notation window and option clicking on s
266. rd display when in the Notation window or print out so they look best in the Notation window Tip Print out a song in Nashville Notation or Roman Numeral notation Then learn the song this way i e 17 4maj7 3 6 You ll then discover that it is much easier to play the song in any key Part Markers Part Markers are placed on the chordsheet to indicate a new part of the song They are used to change substyles or insert drum fills FE E These are part markers They typically occur every 8 bars or so but may be placed at the beginning of any bar Placing Part Markers Move the highlight cell to the bar that you want the part marker at Then press the letter p on the computer keyboard Repeatedly pressing the letter p will toggle between the a and b part markers or no part marker Or you can position the mouse arrow directly over the bar line or existing part marker Repeatedly click the mouse button to toggle between a b and no part marker Changing Substyles aa m The part markers also represent the two available substyles variations for each style the a substyle and the b substyle Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 63 The song continues to play in one substyle until it encounters a new part marker There will always be a part marker at bar so that Band in a Box knows what substyle to begin with Substyle a is usually used for the Verses of the song Substyle
267. rds amp Melodies in succession Generate Solos only over generated chord progressions Generate Solos over the same chord progression to practice blues soloing for example Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features Automatic Intros The Melodist will automatically generate an introduction for the songs it creates It is also possible to generate an introduction for any song from the Edit Intro Bars Auto Generate menu option Ctrl Shift B P Generate Chords for Intro or Remove Intro This will create a chord progression that Chord Types gets inserted as an intro to the song Intro Length bars 4 Bars Medium Tempos Y Press the Re Generate button to auto Starting chord after intro is F6 generate chords for an intro Pedal Bass lt o Pedal Bass gt j in the key of Remove Intro Mi Use Maj instead of Maj6 Re Generate Intro Chords This will create a chord progression that gets inserted as an intro to the song based on the optional settings you choose Chord Types can be Jazz or Pop Intro Length can be 2 4 or 8 bars to suit the tempo of the song Starting Chord after intro is lets the intro lead in to the song correctly Pedal Bass has a list of pedal bass options based in the key entered in the box Press the Re Generate Intro Chords button to auto generate chords for an intro Press the Remove Intro button to remove the intro from the song Automatic Song Titl
268. results are very musical with natural sounding melodies Let s look at some of the parameters found under the Humanize menu items In this example MEL Humanize Melody was selected This opens the Quantize to New Tempo or Feel dialog box Quantize to New Tempo or Feel Old Tempo 120 New Tempo 120 wi Melody Track ie not a solo Change Lateness from 3 Change 8th note spacing from 65 Increase Legato by 0 Current Feel Straight amp ths a Desired Feel Straight amp ths Quantize to Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 131 We have broken down the Humanize effect into 5 main categories 1 Tempo 2 Lateness 3 8th note spacing 4 Legato 5 Feel The best way to learn how these parameters combine is to try them You can always press Undo button if you don t like the results For example try changing the tempo of a song to see the changes that this will make to the 8th note spacing and lateness Tip Usually when a musician plays at faster tempos he she plays the swing 8th notes closer together and a little later These categories are very straightforward and you should have no trouble achieving the desired results Remember to apply such parameters as Legato and Lateness sparingly Insert Beats Delete Beats in Melody For example to insert 2 bars in the melody at bar 5 Choose MEL Insert Beats In Melody and select bar 5 and select 8 beats 2 bars to insert Additional Copy function for Chord
269. rmony w song _ Save Current Thru Harmony w song C Save Soloist w song Wi Save current Melody and Soloist patches with every song Cancel If you would like to save certain patches with a song type in the number of the instrument patch that you would like Leave the other instruments at 0 for no patch change Fill Patches To fill the patch boxes with your current patch settings press the Fill Patches button This saves you having to type in the patches to save with songs Forgot the number of the patch you wanted No problem Just click on the View Patches button and up pops your numbered patch list Tip Remember that as with all other Band in a Box patch functions you use the General MIDI s for the instrument regardless of the synth you are using Example If you want to save Clarinet Polka with a melody patch of Clarinet then type 72 for the melody patch To look up the numbers of the various instruments click on View Patches Leave the rest of the instruments at Patch 0 for no patch change unless you want to specify a particular instrument You are also given a choice as to which instruments you would like to save checkbox to the left of the patch and whether you would like to save the Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 75 Melody and Thru harmony assignments and the Soloist selected to play on the song You can also save the instruments as On or Off for each song For example
270. ro and print out a lead sheet and play along Loading and Playing Songs To play an existing Band in a Box song here s all you need to do f Open Open any song file with the familiar file dialog Start song playback Stop song playback Hold Pause the song with the Hold button resume by pressing it again From Jump to any bar in the song Press the From button to choose which chorus and bar number to jump to F l Song 4 The Song button opens a list of all of the songs in the current directory Select Song by Title 214 songs Freddie sty style demo 1 Joplin Demo User Rhumba Demo 3 Country 12 8 Demo Rock Ballad Demo New Age 1 Demo Lite Rock 2 Demo Adeste Fideles African Style Demo Amazing Grace arpeggio demo moonlight sonata Battle Hymn of the Republic Beautiful Dreamer Beautiful River Blue Caberet Triplet Demo Song Blues Demo Song Blues Demo Song Blues Shuffle 2 Demo Song C Blues Pop C Blues Pop DEMO SONG FOR BLUHILL STYLE Bob Ballad DEMO Bossa Demo 1 Bossa Demo 2 Bossa Demo 3 Folder Rebuild List v Play when selected Chapter 4 Guided Tour of Band in a Box File Name Freddie MGU 1 Joplin Demo SCU 2 Rhumba Demo SCU 3 Countr 4 Rock Ballad Demo SGU 5 New Age 1 Demo SGU 6 Lite Rock 2 Demo SGU Adeste Fideles MG9 African Demo SCU Amazing Grace MGH Arpeggio Demo SGU Auld Lang Syne MG1 Aura Lee MG9 Baked Potato MG1 Battle
271. rom the Melody track preparing it for a new track or data Swap Melody and Soloist Track This performs a double copy move so that the data that was in the Melody track is transferred to the Soloist track and visa versa This is also known as track bouncing Melodist Generate Chords and Mel launches the Melodist feature Melody Maker These sub menu items allow you to edit Melodist files using the Melody Maker Track Type Normally you d leave the track type set to Single But you can set it to Guitar Channels 11 to 16 will display on the guitar as strings 11 to 16 TAB will show the notation will be up an octave and the MIDI file will contain the channels preserved Multi All channels are preserved and output on the channels This would be useful for importing an entire MIDI file and playing it from the Melody channel using a silent style Piano In this mode channels 8 and 9 are treated as the left and right hand of a piano part Note When saving a MIDI file and the track type is Guitar any notes on the guitar channels 11 to 16 are preserved so that any fret positions are preserved Channels 11 to 16 correspond to strings 1 to 6 so that a G5 note on Channel 11 would be shown on the high E string at the third fret Embellish Melody during playback This toggles the Melody Embellisher feature on or off Embellish Melody Dialog The Melody Embellisher dialog opens allowing you to c
272. rs Auto Generate R Clear LeadSheet Insert measure s a6 Delete measure s aD Shrink reduce duration of chords by 1 2 Expand durations of chords by 2 Unfold Convert to 1 big chorus Transpose Blank Lyrics Preferences Preferences 7 Slide Tracks Chord Settings Bar Settings Song Memo Enter Lyrics at Current Bar Copy Lyrics to Clipboard Move Lyrics up down Row s Edit Chord Shortcut txt Refresh Chord Shortcuts Edit Undo and Edit Redo allow you to undo or redo most operations Edit Cut functions like a delete command It removes bars of chords from a song Edit Copy and Edit Paste are to copy chords from one part of the song to another Copying a section of chords can be done in the same manner as copying text in a word processor 216 Chapter 14 Reference Copy From To Copy Rests Erase From To One of the best ways to copy chords is the Copy From To command or pressing Option C which will launch the Copy Chords and or Melody dialog The Copy Rests command will similarly bring up a dialog to allow copying of rests The Erase From To command launches the Erase Chords and or Melody dialog These dialogs allow you to specify the number of bars to copy or erase the location to copy to and the option to copy or erase the Chords Melody and or Soloist Intro Bars Auto Generate This command will launch the Generate Chords for Intro or Remove
273. rument to change each chorus for example from vibes to guitar to piano You can over ride the settings of the current Melodist and choose your own patch harmony and change instrument settings in these controls 112 Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features Melodist Juke Box The Melodist Jukebox will continuously generate new songs and play them in jukebox fashion You can set the range W Change Melodists of Melodists to include in the jukebox From Te 50 using the From To settings or keep the Jukebox on the same Melodist by de selecting Change Melodists To Launch the Melodist Jukebox press Juke Songs Now option j Write to Track Melody Normally you d want the Melodist to be written to the Melody track If you d prefer the Melody to be written to the Soloist track e g for a counter melody then set the Write to Track setting to Soloist Juke Songs Now The favorites button allows you to pick a Melodist that you ve used recently Editing Melodists Melodist Maker If you d like to create your own Melodists or permanently change the settings of existing ae Melodists press the Edit button to launch the K Edit F Melodist Maker which is described elsewhere in i detail Using the Melodist Generating Complete Songs Here are some ways that you can use the Melodist by generating complete songs The most obvious use of the Melodist is that you can generate an entir
274. rums 54 13 52 10 87 74 74 63 66 132 117 30 4 30 20 73 73 65 1 1 65 156 158 163 158 161 156 Index Alternate notes Entering Notes Late Triplets Making Patterns Screen Tempo Changes Timebase Editing existing styles Embellish Patterns Half Octave Range Importing Patterns 158 Interval to Next Chord 158 Macro Notes Bass Macro Notes Piano Making new styles Overview Patch Changes Pattern Weight of 9 Patterns Erasing Lengths Piano Guitar Strings Playback Bar Mask155 158 Playback Beat Mask Pushed Patterns Pushing Patterns Relative Weight 155 157 Roman Numeral Mask 158 Selecting a Style to Edit Time Signatures Transpose Down Limits Voice Leading Riff based 154 154 156 152 153 153 153 148 162 161 165 162 159 162 152 144 164 150 148 147 159 161 161 159 164 160 161 149 148 162 163 163 265 Smooth 163 StylePicker 11 26 35 filter 19 Styles about 1 load previous 18 215 Selecting 70 Styles list bbm Ist 19 Styles Set 38 About Time 24 substitutions 202 SubStyles Changing 63 tempo 13 37 Tempo Change at bar 66 Text hints 23 third party styles 19 Ticks 130 Title window 47 Tool Bar 45 track type 130 266 Trademarks 2 tritone substitution 201 turns 137 Tutorial CoreMIDI and QuickTime 206 Unfold 84 vibrato 137 Video memos 20 Virtual Ports 210 Rax 210 voicings 167 199 Volum
275. s Fewest Chords 1 OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file Allow Sus chords suspended Mi Open to Melody Soloist tracks Allow 7th seventh chords e g C7 Import Options l Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes W import to Melody from channel s 4 M Lowest bass note is delayed v Import to Soloist from channel s ooo Method Write chord summary notes to Soloist Track v Include Continuous controllers and pitch bend EEn INTERPRET CHORDS NOW COK Cancel include notes early by 120 PPQ 15 It has automatically determined that the Violet Song MID file of lead in bars in MIDI file gt has 2 bars of lead in How many bars to import 103 has 103 bars of chords Key Tempo 120 TimeSig 4 in the key of F with a 4 4 time signature and a tempo of 120 Bass part is on channel s The Bass part is found on channel 2 188 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards Chording track is on channel s 3 6 7 The chording comping parts are found on Channels 3 6 and 7 Ei Import to Melody from channel s 4 The Melody is found on Channel 4 Ki Import to Soloist from channel s 0 There are no other parts like the Melody that should be put on the Soloist track Presets for Chord Options Now after loading in the MIDI files you d normally have a look at these settings to see if they seem reasonable for your MIDI file If they are not you can change the settings For example
276. s jukebox Jukebox JukeBox Hide Titles Options key Kill Intro Kill Melodist Kill Soloist License loading songs styles loading songs local off Local OFF Local On automatic Local ON Looping lyrics Main screen synth window Main Screen chordsheet status bar title window 187 187 52 6 210 70 70 31 91 24 90 91 91 13 34 112 112 112 47 47 70 10 82 223 21 82 21 94 39 40 40 40 40 261 toolbar 40 Choose Unusual Chord Melodies Progressions 179 Recording 125 Chord Substitutions Throughout l the Form 179 Melodist 32 Dialog 176 64 bar form 110 Force Long Phrases 179 A2 Transpose 110 l Mix Minor and Major Chord Allow Style Changes 109 Progressions 179 Auto Tempo 110 Number of Variations 179 Auto Titles 109 Simple 1 and 2 endings 179 Defaults 110 Tempo Range 179 Favorites 113 Transpose A2 Section 180 Form 110 Unique Themes 178 Generate Less than a Complete Unusual Placed Phrasing 179 Song 114 Melody Generating Complete Songs 113 Step Edit 127 Go To 112 Melody Embellisher 48 132 Insert Bass Pedals 109 advanced settings 138 JukeBox 114 a l anticipations 136 Kill Intro 112 i auto embellish 134 Kill Melody 112 i button 133 Kill Soloist 112 checkbox 133 Memo 112 l dialog 133 Minor Key 111 doubled notes 136 Number of Choruses 110 extra notes 137 Preset Buttons 110 grace notes 136 Replace Thru Form 112 humanize 136 Selection Dialog 107 m
277. s since they are likely to be completely accurate If you d prefer the Chord Wizard to ignore these chord events you set the OK to use PG Music Chord names from MIDI file to false Note If you set this to TRUE then the Chord Wizard won t be working it won t be interpreting chords since it relies instead on the chord names being present in the MIDI file Write chord summary notes to Soloist Track The setting for Write Chord Summary Notes to Soloist Track is only used for diagnostic or special purposes If set the Soloist track will contain a special track that has a chord written every 2 beats or whatever the setting for chord resolution is that contains every note found for the chord This shows you the type of logic that the Chord Wizard was basing its decisions on If you encounter a song that gives incorrect results for the chords you can try this setting and then examine the Soloist track to see the actual notes of the chords MI Include Continuous controllers and pitch bend Mi Include Patch changes You can optionally include controllers pitch bend and patch changes from the MIDI file Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 193 The Guitarist Guitar Fretboard Window This is a window for Guitar and Bass Players The onscreen fretboard displays any Band in a Box track on Guitar or Bass This Guitar window has features such as auto setting of correct positions notes named on screen auto octave adjust to
278. s Melody This allows you to Copy Chords and or Melody for a range of bars Press the Copy button to launch the dialog box or select the Copy From To option from the Edit menu or press option c Copy Chords and or Melody rd Copy Chords W Copy Melody Copy From Bar 1 Copy Soloist Bars to Copy 8 amp 8 Chorus Copy To Bar 1 Cancel Melody Embellisher When musicians see a lead sheet that has a melody written out they would almost never play it exactly as written They would change the timing to add 132 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks syncopation change durations to achieve staccato or legato playing add grace notes slurs extra notes vibrato and other effects Now you can have Band in a Box do these automatically using the Melody Embellisher If you enable the Embellisher any melody will be embellished as it is played so that you hear a livelier and more realistic melody and it s different every time e The Melody Embellisher feature is turned on and off by the Ki Emb Embellisher checkbox on the main screen The Melody Embellisher settings are accessed during playback with _ the embellisher grace note button on the main screen or from the MEL Embellish Melody during playback menu item The Melody Embellisher only functions during playback If enabled the melody that plays will be embellished You ll see the embellished melody on the notation as the melody plays so you can se
279. s in a cell In the example below we would type Ab9 G9 to get the 2 chords in the cell on beat 3 and 4 of bar 2 1a C6 Am7 2 Dm7 Ab9 G9 3 C6 E 4 A 9 The sequence of keystrokes to enter all these chords above would be c6 gt am7 gt dm7 gt ab9 g9 gt c6 e gt gt a739 The gt indicates cursor key to the right We are able to type A7 9 as a739 because Band in a Box knows to use the uppercase of the 3 which is Tip The fastest way to type in chords is to use your left hand to type in the chords Your right hand stays on the cursor keys or mouse to advance the highlight cell to the next bar beat after you ve typed in the chords 56 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Shortcut Chords If you enter a lot of songs you ll appreciate these shortcut keys J Maj7 H m7b5 H stands for Half diminished D dim S Sus Example To type CMaj7 just type CJ at will be entered as CMaj7 Add your own chord shortcuts Have you found a chord that Band in a Box doesn t recognize If so add it to your chord shortcuts file and Band in a Box will allow you to type in that chord in the future You can also define chord shortcuts one letter abbreviations for longer chord names J for Maj etc To add your own chords and shortcuts make a text file called shortcut txt in your Band in a Box folder Note that this file doesn t ship with Band in a Box if it did it would overwrite your file Shortcuts supplied by
280. s the octave of the part Range is 2 to 2 usually set to 0 Bass is usually set to 1 for General MIDI instruments PATCH Range 0 to 127 These are General MIDI patch numbers You do not type in the patch numbers of your synthesizer The patch map handles mapping of the General MIDI patch numbers to your non GM synthesizer s patch numbers VOLUME Range 0 to 127 Typical volume setting is 90 REVERB Range 0 to 127 Typical setting 40 CHORUS Range of 0 to 127 Typical setting 0 PAN Panning refers to the left right stereo placement Range is 63 hard left to 64 hard right A setting of 0 is centered Piano Display Default Uncheck this box if you don t want to see notes played on the onscreen piano keyboard Color Notes Default The notes that play on the onscreen piano are usually in different colors for each part Bass Aqua Piano Blue Guitar Green letter G Strings Pink letter S Melody Red letter M Solo Red letter S Uncheck this box to show them all in black and white Allow Patch Changes Default Do not check this box if you want to disable All Patch changes If you haven t made a patch map you should disable this Style GS Patch Changes Default Styles frequently come with patch changes If you want to disable these uncheck this box MIDI sync Default To synchronize Band in a Box with an external sequencer check this box Overall Volume Changes Def
281. se clicking on the Piano button Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 159 SSS 95555 155555955 ee ee O O If you re making a simple piano pattern you ll only need to record pattern s on the A 8 beat row the top row These patterns will get chosen for every chord regardless of the length But if you want the style to play different patterns when the song is encountering chords that last 1 2 3 or 4 beats you should record separate patterns on these rows Recording Piano Patterns Move to the top row of the piano area in column 1 Press the REC button This will begin the recording of the piano pattern You will hear a 2 bar lead in and then you record a 2 bar piano pattern For your piano pattern you will play a pattern based on a C7 chord You can use all 12 notes but should just play the pattern as you would if the chord was a C7 Tip If you are uncertain what to play press the LOAD button and edit another style that comes with the program you can then play the piano patterns by the pressing the PLAY button to see what patterns we used to make it and imitate them in your style After you have recorded the piano pattern a dialog box with options will appear This allows you to specify the conditions that must occur for this pattern to be played back in the song These are called masks Usually you can just accept all the defaults which allow the pattern to be played at any time Piano Pattern Recorded
282. se up another 2 channels on dedicated Soloist Harmony channels So if you want to hear a Soloist with harmony use the THRU Harmony settings In other Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features 117 words wherever a THRU harmony is selected the Soloist part will use the THRU Harmony settings 2 We have designed the Soloist not to repeat any solo ideas so that the solos are always fresh with new ideas forming and playing all the time As a result we have included a Refresh Soloist menu item under the SOL menu that when selected will allow the Soloist to think about all of its musical notions again Choosing the Refresh Soloist option Shift F7 is like telling the soloist It s OK you can play whatever you like even if it s something that you played 5 minutes ago 3 The Soloist menu contains many options It has all of the same editing options found in the Melody menu so you can treat the Soloist track as a 2nd melody track Even if you don t plan to use the Automatic Soloist feature you can just use the Soloist track as a 2nd track for counter melodies overdubs etc The result two melody tracks two solo tracks or one melody and one solo track all at your disposal for any song without having to resort to an outboard sequencer Solo Modes Solo Mode As well as the normal mode of soloing for a Normal number of choruses while the melody is silent the Soloist has several other modes For example Fills will nood
283. select the part by clicking on the desired part to change Click on the Instrument Panel box You will then see a menu of 128 instrument names This list is the General MIDI patch list Scroll down the list to find the patch that you want Piano 05 Rhodes Electric Piangpe DIB io Or click on the numbered buttons below the Instrument Panel box to choose from the 10 most common instruments chosen for that particular part If you have a General MIDI module or any of the units that have a patch file for higher banks PAT file listed for them then press the button on the main screen to choose the PAT file from the Synthkits folder This is an especially useful feature if you have a synthesizer or sound source that has patches on higher banks beyond the basic 128 General MIDI instruments The window that appears when you click on this button looks like this Patches on Higher Banks GS PAT Variations of M include Family Detuned EP 1 C aA Detuned EP 2 Coupled Hps Patch MSB Bank LSB Bank GM Acoustic Grand Piano GM Bright Acoustic Piano 8 0 GM Electric Grand Piano Ctrl 0 Ctrl 32 GM Honky tonk Piano GM Rhodes Piano GM Chorused Piano GM Harpsichord Mi Use 1 based patch ing Roland GM Clavinet Send Patch Open PAT Search Edit Update This will provide you with a list of all the patches available to you by name on the left and where the patch is l
284. set Soloist style can be selected or your own Soloist can be defined Start a Soloists File allows you to make and edit Soloist styles saved under the filename of your choice See Soloist Edit dialog for additional details on importing exporting saving Soloists Edit a Soloists File opens a file dialog where you can select any Soloist file SOL to edit If you have not created any of your own Soloist files or if you want to edit the one you are using use the Edit Current Soloist File command 244 Chapter 14 Reference Band in a Box comes with over 100 Soloists built in If you want to make your own or modify an existing Soloist use the Soloist Maker edit module The Soloist Maker allows you to define the parameters essential to a soloist s playing such as instrument range i e tenor saxophone extra legato playing playing more on top of the beat than most jazz musicians and playing straighter 8th notes than usual swing 8th notes In addition you can set phrasing options such as how long the phrase should be and how much space to leave between phrases You can also set how outside the playing should be Edit Current Soloists file opens the Select Soloist dialog with the currently installed Soloists file Refresh Soloist allows the Soloist full access to all solo ideas contained in its database Use to refresh after several Soloists have been made OK to Load Soloists w song Enable this option if you
285. so it plays a little ahead of the rest of the band This has the effect of making the bass player drive the band and is useful in Jazz styles to make the music sound more exciting Allow Any Slides If you want the slides to occur then check this box Humanize Slides If this box is checked the slides will be randomized to slide the track a different amount for each note The amount varies from 0 ticks to the slide setting for the instrument A track that always plays notes early by a certain amount tends to sound out of time whereas randomizing the slide makes the track sounds more human Song Memo A song memo of up to 2000 characters may be added Clicking on the memo button located to the right of the song title launches the Song Memo dialog where you can type in a short memo about the song style etc The keystrokes Option M will also launch the Song Memo Enter Copy Move Lyrics These features enable the typing editing and exporting of song lyrics 84 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Edit Chord Shortcut txt This will edit the file SHORTCUT TXT using Teach Text This is the chord shortcuts file Make sure to save the file after editing Changes won t take effect until you choose Edit Refresh Chord Shortcuts If you find a chord that Band in a Box won t accept like Csus2 when it expects C2 instead you can enter this on a single line without the quotes sus2 2 Then Band in a Box will enter the chor
286. splay This is an animated display of a complete GM drum kit To launch the Guitar window press the Guitar button or Control Shift G or choose the menu item Notation Guitar Window This launches the Generate Chords for Intro or Remove Intro dialog to create a chord progression that is inserted as an intro to the song fg Click on the Song Title button to create a new title for the current song The title will appear in the Title Window area of the screen Press the PG button to get to the www pgmusic com web site This uses your Internet Explorer or Netscape program as the browser Click on the Event List Editor button to launch the List Edit dialog which lets you edit the individual MIDI events on a track from a list The Event List Editor is not present in the OS X version though it should get added in the future TE Click on the Tuner Button to launch the Guitar Tuner Plug your guitar into the microphone or line in and this plug in will tune your guitar Also works with the microphone input for any other instrument The Tuner is not present in the OS X version though it should get added in the future The note button opens the Notation window to view and print notation for any part There are also Editable Notation and Staff Roll Notation views The speaker button opens the Audio Levels dialog where master volume settings can be adjusted Not present in the OS X version The grace note button opens the Me
287. st 3 choruses have a much higher range of soloing Let s redo that part of the solo using a higher fret position We ll press the Ch Solo button again de select the auto set position button and choose the 12 position Since we only want to regenerate this for the choruses 4 to 6 we set the range to Part of Song and the range to start at chorus 4 bar 1 and range of 96 bars This will rewrite the solo by first removing the existing guitar chord solo if any and then generating a new one Technical Note Since some of the guitarists can be assigned to strum the chords in a delayed fashion if you repeatedly re generate the solo the melody will become more and more delayed The solution s would be to choose Edit Undo Solo prior to re generating the solo or picking a Guitarist that doesn t delay the strum The Strum delay status is indicated on the Info panel of the Select Guitarist screen Saving the Guitar Chord Solo Once you have generated a Guitar chord solo it becomes part of the notation track You can edit it like any other part by deleting inserting notes etc The solo will be saved with the song MGU and exported to a MIDI file with the string positions intact because we use channels 11 to 16 for the Guitar part You can remove the solo at any time even after the solo has been saved reloaded by choosing MEL Remove Harmony or guitar solo from Melody Track Editing Guitarists Guitarists can be cu
288. stomized using Edit Guitarist Maker the Guitarist Maker which is described elsewhere in detail and is launched by the Edit button in the Select Guitarist dialog 124 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks Overview Band in a Box has a built in sequencer allowing you to record and edit up to two MIDI tracks One track is the Melody track the other is the Soloist track and they are identical in function Most often melodies are recorded but the two sequencer tracks can be used for any type of MIDI recording overdubs extra parts or 2 part melodies MIDI can be recorded into Band in a Box in a number of ways From a MIDI keyboard or MIDI controller connected to your computer Inthe Notation window using your mouse With the Wizard feature using your QWERTY keyboard Real Time Recording If you want to record using your MIDI controller keyboard guitar wind click on the Rec button or type the letter r or choose Record Melody from the MEL menu or go to Edit Soloist Track Record Soloist in the SOL menu The Record Track dialog box will appear i Record Track Record From Start of Song From Bar 1 Chorus 1 gm th a C Filter Cancel Choose where you want to start recording your track from the start of the song Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 125 ata specified bar at the tag from the end of the track If you select Overdub Underlying Notes
289. struments a Strings Melody OT Music Instruments 7 Thru OT Music Instruments GS Inst OT Music Instruments CoreMIDI Help Band in a Box will receive record from a keyboard connected to the MIDI interface but playback and keyboard MIDI Thru will go to the QuickTime Music synthesizer Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X 209 Inter Application Communication via Virtual Ports compatible with Jaguar and Panther Select Ports Instruments MIDI In Part amp Bass BIAB Virtual Qutput f lt set all ports to this Piano BIAB Virtual GQutput Drums BIAB Virtual Output Guitar BIAB Virtual Output Soloist BIAB Virtual Output Strings BIAB Virtual Output Melody BIAB Virtual Output Thru BIAB Virtual Output GS Inst BIAB Virtual Output CoreMIDI Help F Cancel The Band in a Box Virtual Output allows MIDI Output to be piped into another MIDI Audio application Here is an example of controlling the Rax real time Audio Unit host Rax can be downloaded from http www grantedsw com Connecting to Rax with Virtual Output After setting Band in a Box to transmit via BIAB Virtual Output launch Rax and open its Preferences dialog amp Preferences General MIDI Device BIAB Virtual Output DMS Jv8 amp 80 KX 88 MTPII All RAT TU Meast T MIDI Inputs pongge MIDI Clock None _ Block duplicate note messages 210 Chapter 13 Cor
290. succession Aside from the compositional values of the Melodist the features can be used as a powerful practicing aid improving sight reading by reading the melodies generated in various keys using the Notation window and ear training by playing along with the chord progressions in the generated songs Launching the Melodist To launch the Melodist press the Melodist button on the main screen or use the Shift F5 hot key Generate Chords and or Melody Dialog Generate Chords and or Melody Create CAM in a style similar to Chords and or Melody 1 Pop l ths Pad Bell Mi Generate Chords M Auto Titles 2 Pop 16ths KennyG Sopr Sax Pop L6ths LMays w soloist wv Generate Intro __ Kill Intro Pop Loths Calliope Lead Pop L6ths Atmosphere Pop 16ths Pad Bell M Generate Melody Kill Mel Whole Song Pop L6ths Voice 8vb Pop L6ths Phil C M Solo in Middle Ch Part of Song POP 16 Always transpose A Pop 16ths Vibes Allow Style Changes Sa Range Swing Vibes 2 Swing Jazz Trumpet All Bar Swing Wes Groove Chords Melody Chords amp Mel Chorus Swing Tenor octave below ee a Swing Garner Bars Swing Sths Sinatra Form AABA 32 Bars Y choruses 3 Swing Jazz Quintet Vv Insert Bass Pedals Kill Pedal Generate Defaults Tempo 95 F AutoTempo Melodist Juke Bux r z A2 transpose Section Plus bd v Juke Songs Now Search Memo Database MELPOP1 ST v Change Melodists GoTo
291. t has a melody init Any changes to the harmony will be heard on the melody as soon as you press the Update button You can also play along as the song is playing and hear the new harmony on the Thru channel The best way If you don t want to have a song playing and want to hear the harmony then set the Test Chord to a certain chord Then you can play on the MIDI keyboard with no song playing and hear your harmony This allows you to examine exactly what notes BB is using to make your harmony Additional Harmony Settings are accessed by pressing the MORE button which brings up the following dialog box Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 171 Additional Harmony Options Use Clase Harmony Use Passing Chords melody Lowest Harmony Note Overall Harmony Octave Volume Adjust of Entire Harmony No harmony if duration less than W OK to make new harmony with chord Use Guitar Harmony Voicings Use Close Harmony This only applies to 2 and 3 part harmonies If set to 0 then it will use only close harmonies mainly 3rds for 2 part harmonies If set to 1 it will use mostly 3rds with some 6ths for 2 part harmonies If set to 99 it will use mostly 6ths with some 3rds for 2 part harmonies If set to 100 then it will use only wide harmonies i e mainly 6th for 2 part harmonies If set to between 2 and 98 it will vary between close and open harmonies for 2 and 3 part harmo
292. t on especially if you name some chords as C9 instead of C7 in situations where the melody clashes with the embellishment as discussed above You would need to uncheck it for any song that you don t want it on Tag Settings A tag or coda is a group of bars that are played in the last chorus of a song If you check the Tag Exists field then the tag will play during the last chorus of the song The tag begins after the bar you specify as Tag Jump After Bar The song then jumps to the Tag Begin at Bar and plays until Tag Ends After Bar At the end of the tag the song then plays a 2 bar ending as usual Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Default 54 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide You can disable the ending for a certain song You can disable the endings for all songs by clearing the checkmark for the Allow Any Endings setting in the Edit Preferences menu item Start the 2 bar ending early The usual Band in a Box ending is 2 bars appended to the end of the song This new option gives you an alternative to end the song on the last bar of the song Band in a Box will still play an ending on the chord that you specify and the ending will occur as a 2 bar phrase beginning 2 bars before the end of the form This results in more natural endings for many songs For example the song Old Folks At Home is a 32 bar chorus song from bar to bar 32 It ends with the last melody note on bar 31 with the
293. t will play in the new style we are trying out Mute Melody during middle choruses This gives the Soloist s a chance to play on a given song during the middle choruses Toggle this option On if you would like the melody to be muted during these choruses Kill Melody in Middle choruses This command will permanently erase the middle choruses of the Melody Force song to choruses Toggle this option On if you would like a given song to have a preferred number of choruses Auto Generate Song Title Band in a Box will generate an infinite variety of titles for your songs Jazz Up the Chords This will Jazz Up the chords by changing chords like C and Cmaj to 7 and 6 chords Song embellishment will be turned on for the song Select the type of 7ths from the list box then click on the OK Jazz UP button Jazz Down the Chords This will Jazz Down the chords by changing chords with 7ths e g C7 to triads e g C and 9ths and 13ths to 7 chords Song embellishment is turned off Press OK Jazz Down to proceed Chord Substitution Dialog choose your own This allows you to see a list of possible chord substitutions for the current chord progression Auto Generate Chord Substitutions This will automatically pick chord substitutions for all or part of the song Chord Builder Allows you to build up chords using mouse clicks You can enter chords by ear without having to know the a
294. tar Position Controller C Write Soloist part on channel 5 Mi Write Harmony to MIDI file v MIDI file Harmony sep tracks Write Guitar part on 6 channels The pushes in Band in a Box are the chords that get played before the beat Typically pushes are played a little louder than other patterns You can leave this setting at 0 or set it to between 0 and 10 Show Chords with push rest chars The push character is the caret symbol So a C chord with a push is displayed as A Ge The rest character is a period So a C chord with a rest is displayed as C on chordsheet If you prefer to not see these characters displayed then set this to false These characters won t show up on the printout regardless of this setting Show Rests in color If checked pushes are displayed in GREEN and rests are displayed in RED This only applies to the Chord Sheet not the notation Allow any Rests You can disable the rests feature You might want to do this if you ve got a song with a lot of rests in it and are then having difficulty recording a melody because you don t hear the drums providing the beat due to the drums resting Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 77 If so you can temporarily disable the rests so that you can record and listen to the drums Allow any Pushes If for some reason you don t want a style or a song to have pushes you can uncheck this box Allow Style Pushes If for some reason you don t want
295. tar window to set the Output guitar tracks on 6 channels for this song to be true This has been done for the Nashville Solos files like NGOOI MGU available as an add on to Band in a Box When this option is set the patch changes panning and so on will be sent on all 6 MIDI channels bars to offset from start If you want to start reading from the beginning of the MIDI file select O as the offset If you want to be read starting at bar 32 for example select an offset of 32 bars How many bars to import Leave this setting at the default of 1000 to read in the entire file unless it s longer than 1000 bars or set it to the number of bars that you are interested in if you don t want the whole file blank b to insert at beginning This will insert blank bars into the Melody track Remember that Band in a Box normally has a 2 bar lead in count If your MIDI file has no lead in then you ll need to set this to 2 to compensate for the 2 bars of lead in Include notes early by 120 ppq If you re reading in a MIDI file starting at bar 5 it would be annoying to have a note that was played tick earlier than bar 5 left out of the MIDI file that is read in To include it you can set this and the note will be read in Include continuous controllers and pitch bend Patch changes Select the items you want to include when the track is imported Merge with existing data on Track You can choose to merge the imp
296. that if you type a C7 chord the piano player may play a C13 or aC7b9 This makes the arrangement sound more authentic Tip If you are hearing flat 9 and flat 13 embellishments on a C7 chord that is clashing with the melody you should rename the chord C9 or C13 which will ensure natural 9 and 13 embellishments To disable the embellishment for a certain song uncheck this option There are very few situations that you wouldn t want it on especially if you name some chords as C9 instead of C7 in situations where the melody clashes with the embellishment as discussed above You would need to uncheck it for any song that you don t want it on Tag Settings A tag or coda is a group of bars that are played in the last chorus of a song If you check the Tag Exists field then the tag will play during the last chorus of the song The tag begins after the bar you specify as Tag Jump After Bar The song then jumps to the Tag Begin at Bar and plays until Tag Ends After Bar At the end of the tag the song then plays a 2 bar ending as usual Chapter 14 Reference Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Default You can disable the ending for a certain song You can disable the endings for all songs by clearing the checkmark for the Allow Any Endings setting in the Edit Preferences menu item Start the 2 bar ending early The usual Band in a Box ending is 2 bars appended to the end of the song This opt
297. the beginning and the end of the Chorus The number 3 to the right of the brackets is the number of times the Chorus repeats In the example above the Chorus starts at bar 1 ends on bar 32 and is going to play 3 times You can change these settings to play more choruses or make the Chorus start later for example in the case where you want an intro to play Setting the Key In the example above the key is set to C However you can set this to any key In our first view of the chordsheet the blues song was in the key of F If you do change the key Band in a Box will offer to transpose the chordsheet for you This is especially useful when loading in new songs and transposing them to other keys If you ve entered a progression that you intend for a particular key and then choose the key afterward you should say no when asked to transpose the chordsheet Setting the Tempo If you know the tempo value of your song you can enter it in the tempo box The song example above has a tempo of 120 There is an even faster way to enter a tempo Locate the minus key and the equals key in the number row of your computer keyboard they are usually next to each other If you tap the key 4 times at your tempo Band in a Box will set the tempo automatically for you If you tap the key four times Band in a Box will set the tempo and begin song playback Press Play When you re ready just press the Play button or the F4 function k
298. this type jazz Leadsheet Method You can also set the primary style of the song to Jazz or Pop using the Lead sheet Method combo box Using the Chord Options Presets to make settings for Violet Song MID 190 Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards For the song Violet Song MID we know that this is a Jazz Swing type of song so we press the preset called Jazz Standard By doing this we see that the chord options have then been set to Chord Resolution of 2 beats no slash chords walking bass sus chords 7 chords and Jazz lead sheet These settings look OK for our Jazz song if we wanted to customize it for example to allow slash chords we could do it at this point So to recap using the Chord Wizard is a 3 step process We loaded in the song Violet Song MID Pressing the preset button called Jazz Standard we then looked at the Chord Options settings for the various channels and they looked OK so we didn t make any changes Then we looked at the Chord Options and they looked OK so we didn t make any changes there We then press the INTERPRET s CHORDS NOW button this gets the Chord Wizard to interpret the chords and write them to the chordsheet Once we ve pressed the INTERPRET CHORDS NOW button we can see the results by looking at the chordsheet Here are the chords that were interpreted FMaj7 D7 G7 F6 G7 F6 BbMaj7 Gm7 G7 F6 G7 F6 G7 F6 BbMaj7 Gm7 G7 Cho
299. tings Filter for Recording Return to Factory Settings What add ons do have MIDI Settings This dialog box allows you to setup settings for each part Bass Drums Piano etc You can also set the Harmony channels by pressing the Harmony button inside this dialog box Chapter 14 Reference 231 CHANNEL OCTAVE PATCH YOLUME REVERE CHORUS PAN Bass Piano Drums Guitar Soloist Strings Melody Thru EEE W Piano Display CI MIDI sync ral Color Notes ral Overall Volume Changes MI Allow Patch Changes i Style Volume Changes W Style GS Patch Changes Extra Note Offs Concert Pitch Adjust 0 View GS Map Boost THRU velocity by 0 oK Cancel Open Current OMS Studio Setup FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band In A Box OS9 booted from Mac Classic If using OMS this will take you to the Studio setup This will be grayed out if OMS is not active on your system OMS MIDI Setup Opens the OMS MIDI setup dialog if OMS is installed This will be grayed out if OMS is not active on your system OMS Parameters choose ports Select MIDI Input and Output ports for OMS This will be grayed out if OMS is not active on your system Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime Opens the MIDI Drivers dialog where you can choose from the installed drivers 232 Chapter 14 Reference MIDI Drivers Band In A Box has detected the following MIDI Drivers
300. to drop a note The mouse cursor will change to a busy cursor to indicate an invalid location If you try to drop a note in an invalid location nothing will happen Moving a note in time If you want to change the start time of a note drag the note with the left mouse button to the new location This is a simple way to move the note Alternatively you could edit the note numerically with an option click on the note Changing the pitch of a note Similarly you can drag the note vertically to change the note value and release it when you re on the note you want Hold down the shift control or key to have the note inserted as a sharp flat or natural respectively Editing a note s values Click on a note while holding the option key This brings up the Note Edit dialog box that lets you change any values about the note in numerical data Note Edit 120 ticks 1 beat Channel 1 Time 5 3 BO Bar Beat Tick Note Obs Velocity ag StaticTxt 4 29 Duration Beat Tick 120 ticks 1 beat Delete OK Cancel Staff Roll Notation Mode f W Y Click on the Notation Mode button again to enter Staff Roll mode It will look like this Abe Gb F Velocity Lines Duration Lines 98 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing This mode is similar to the Editable Notation mode except the beats begin right on the bar line You can also see the durations of the notes visually represented by horizontal blue lines
301. track is blank or shows a previous song until the song has been played once Exploring the Notation I Current Time position This vertical line called the time bar indicates the current time position You can click anywhere on the Current Time line to set a new position This is useful to set a different location to type in chords or to play from a different location The clef is displayed and the key signature of the song If you want some extra space for the notation you can press the options button and set Show Key Signature to No and this key signature won t be displayed Setting the Key Signature The key signature of the song is set by the Key Signature area which is outside the Notation window and is under the Title of the song You ll get a popup menu that allows you to choose a key and optionally transpose the song Typing chords in Notation Chords can be typed in the Notation window and entered at the current position of the time bar The chords that are typed in the Notation window will also show up on the chordsheet Chords Notes la 2 This is Bar 1 Chorus 2 The box ts highlited because there is a part marker present a Chapter 7 Notation and Printing 95 As you can see the Notation window contains the notes and chords of the song The bar numbers are also present with the chorus number in brackets If there is a part marker present at the bar the bar number will be displaye
302. tronome To Set Ten TE o Set Tempo Drums Melody Guitar 0 Thru Clear Settings Harmony Changes at this Bar Melody Harmony No change in harmony v at Beat 1 Thru Harmony No change in harmony jat Beat 1 Cancel 64 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide When making any changes to a measure using the Edit Bar Settings dialog box Band in a Box will place a colored indicator box around the measure number of the measure that had been edited Change the Number of beats bar The initial time signature of the song is determined by the style e g Jazz 4 4 Waltz 3 4 In certain songs you will want to insert time signature changes at a certain bar For example you might want a single bar of 2 4 or 8 bars of 3 4 time etc This option allows a change of time signature during a song The change takes place at the beginning of the bar and continues until a new time signature change is specified You can select beats per bar from 1 to 4 beats per bar A setting of 0 beats bar is used for no change of time signature Examples A song in 4 4 time with a single bar of 6 4 time Since the maximum beats per bar is 4 we will split the 6 4 bars into 2 bars a 4 4 bar and a 2 4 bar Insert a beats per bar 2 at the beginning of the 2 4 bar and then restore the time signature to 4 4 by assigning beats per bar 4 for the next bar A song in 5 4 time throughout To do this we will alternately create a 3 4 bar 2 4 bars On od
303. ts turn local on Local refers to sounds generated by playing on an external MIDI keyboard if set to off Band in a Box will play the keyboard via the THRU part if set to ON both Band in a Box and the keyboard might be playing the same THRU part The GS Menu has been re designed with many items added and a separate pull down menu added for the Master Volume Adjust options Reset Sound Canvas to Factory Reset Sound Canvas And Send BB Master Volume uses MIDI messages instead of GS GM Sysex aster Combo Volume Adjust v Roland GS Master Volume Message General MIDI Master Volume Message Reverb Type Chorus Type Reduce Master Volume by 5 Ctrl Cmd A Increase Master Volume by 5 Ctrl Cmd S Set Master Volume Ctrl Cmd D Assign Part Chan Patch Bank Send General MIDI Mode ON Send GS mode On Roland Reduce all Part Volumes by 5 Ctrl Cmd Shift Q Send XG Mode On Yamaha Increase all Part Volumes by 5 Ctrl Cmd Shift W lt new item gt Set all Part Volumes to Ctrl Cmd Shift E Master Volume type Roland Auto Send GM mode at start Auto Send GS mode at start Auto Send XG Mode at start Reduce current Part s Volume by 5 Ctrl Shift Q Increase Current Part s Volume by 5 Ctrl Shift w Set current Part s Volume Ctrl Alt Shift R Use MIDI messages instead of GS XG Sysex Panic send all MIDI note offs Turn Local OFF external MIDI keyboard v Turn Local ON external MIDI keyboard v When program
304. ttern played on 7th of 8 7 15 23 pattern played on 8th of 8 8 16 24 Special bar masks 1 PRE FILL special value refers to the bar before a fill 2 FILL refers to the bar of a fill this allows you to put in piano fills for example 3 POST FILL refers to the bar after a fill same as the first bar after a part marker Playback Beat Mask Usual Setting 0 Set the beat mask to a beat from 1 4 if you want the pattern to only be played on certain beat numbers 1 Beat 1 2 Beat 2 3 Beat 3 4 Beat 4 oo a ee A ae ee a Roman Numerals Usual Setting 0 If you have a pattern that should only be played on the I chord or the IV chord of the key you can use these Roman Numeral Masks This setting is rarely used Chord Type Usual Setting Any Chord This setting is very useful This allows you to record patterns that will only work on certain types of chords For example you can record a specific riff that will only work on a minor 7th chord You then play the pattern on a Cmin 7 not a C7 There are chord types for most types of chords Half Octave Range Usual Setting Full Octave This is a new setting in the StyleMaker Usually a pattern will be picked on any of the 12 roots You can select a smaller range either A to D or Eb to Ab In Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 161 this case the pattern would only be picked if the chord in the song is in that range Interval Chord Usual Setting Any I
305. ttings that the Chord Wizard has found in the MIDI file for the key signature and channels used for the song Let s work with an example song called Violet Song MID This should be included in your Songs folder For this example we re going to interpret the chords of this MIDI file and read them into Band in a Box Start with a blank chordsheet by choosing File New Chapter 12 Tutors and Wizards 187 Choose the MIDI file Chord Wizard dialog by choosing File Import Chords from MIDI File Fil i Z ill haiie Press the Open Change button to select the MIDI file and then choose the file that you d like to import In this case it is called Violet Song MID Once you load in the file you ll notice that the Chord Wizard has analyzed the MIDI file and made these determinations for you Chord Wizard MIDI Filename Violet song mid Open Change M All Use Clipboard of lead in bars in MIDI file 2 Key Tempo 120 TimeSig 4 4 M import Complete song Presets Insert to BB starting at bar 1 Defaults 5 _Pop w 7ths _ w 7ths Jazz Standard _ Standard How many bars to import 103 a aean M Auto interpret settings from MIDI file Pop Ballad Solo Pia Pop Sol Pia Jazz Part Options Chord Options import Chords Chord Resolution Bass part is on channel s 2 Include Slash Chords Some Slash Chords bd Chording track is on channel s 3 6 7 Bass Part is mainly Walking Bas
306. u may prefer to watch the on screen guitar instead of the notation Generate Less than a Complete Song Here are ways that you can use the Melodist short of generating a full song Auto generate regenerate remove an intro for an existing song You can learn from the intelligent chord progressions that are generated to lead in to the first chord of the song Auto generate pedal bass patterns over existing songs to add tension release effect to your Band in a Box arrangements Generate chords only and then compose your own melody by playing or singing along with the chord progression This can help composers to write new songs by starting them off with a chord progression that they might not ordinarily use And if you re stuck at a certain bar see what BB will generate regenerate as a melody for that section Generate chords only and practice playing your musical instrument along with the chord progressions Print out the generated lead sheet of chords so that you can see the chords easily on the music stand Working with new chord progressions is useful to get out of a rut in your practicing by playing new chord progressions You can also improve your harmony ear training by figuring out the chords as they are being played without looking at the chord symbol display Generate Melodies only over existing chord progressions Using Melodist Jukebox Use the versatile Melodist Jukebox feature to 114 Generate Songs Cho
307. ues Train SD 22 Styles Disk 24 Rock On 36 60S44ROK 140 60 s Brit 4 4 Pop Rock SD 22 ee 6 SBLUES 118 60 s Brit Rock Honky tonk Blues SD 22 6 SPOP16 114 60 s Brit Pop 16 SD 22 6OSRKBAL 16 77 60 s Brit Rock Ballad SD 22 46 8_FAST 8 95 6 8 Fast Tempo SD 8 v Memo Meditation Wave 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 _ Play when chosen Preview on Double Click Re Build Print Search Open J Melody Patch L E Selected Style Defaults to Current Style E v Prototype Style Defaults to Current Style v Auto Change MEL SOL Soloist patch Acoustic Piano v Cancel Choose a Built In style or click on the User Song Style button to choose from the file dialog Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 71 Style Aliases Let s say you have a new style for Jazz called Dizzy You can create an alias so that when Band in a Box looks for a Jazz Swing style it will load in Dizzy instead so you don t have to change all your songs that were made with the old style And when you find a new favorite style just change the alias Aliases are accessed by the M Style Aliases menu item Style Aliases List of Style Aliases Original Style Substitution 2fJAFZ STY gt J_DIZZY 5TY 0 PLIAZZ STY _DIZZY 5TY no alias defined no alias defined Choose K Choose no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined no alias defined
308. unch the Preview Chord Builder or Chord Substitution functions from this window Bar Settings This command opens the Edit Bar Settings dialog where you can change meter tempo patches styles and or harmonies at the current bar Song Memo A song memo of up to 2000 characters may be added When a song has a memo associated with it a little red square is visible around the memo button located to the right of the song title Clicking on the memo button launches the Song Memo dialog where you can type in a short memo about the song style etc Enter Lyrics at Current Bar opens the lyric entry window for the current location in the song Copy Lyrics to Clipboard puts a copy of the lyrics in the clipboard Move Lyrics up down Row s allows previously entered lyrics to be shifted up or down in a range of 24 rows Edit Chord Shortcut txt will edit the file SHORTCUT TXT using Teach Text This is the chord shortcuts file Refresh Chord Shortcuts saves changes to the SHORTCUT TXT file Changes must be saved with this command or they will be lost Chapter 14 Reference 225 Song Menu Title Key Tempo Embel Chorus begins at 1 Chorus ends after 32 Total choruses 3 wv Vary Middle Style v Overall loop Additional 5o0ng Settings Play Stop Hold Pause lt Backspace gt Play From Bar Play From Current Go Open and Play Juke Box Play Previous Juke Song Next Juke Song y Wizard Playa
309. unt in addition of low root harmony setting to Harmony Edit dialog Strauss in a Box to automatically transform any 4 4 song to a Waltz 3 4 feel De Strauss to transform any song with a 3 4 time signature to a 4 4 feel StylePicker Dialog enhancements bass player plays better Sths over some Jazz chords support for audio and video memos for songs options to set the note density in the Soloist and much more 6 Chapter 1 Introduction And much more People familiar with the previous versions of Band in a Box will be pleased to know that we have kept the same functionality of our previous releases The new features are optional and don t interfere with familiar methods of using the program All songs styles etc are completely compatible with previous versions so that you can upgrade without losing any of your existing work Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial Creating music with Band in a Box is as easy as 1 2 3 In this tutorial you ll see just how easy it is to get Band in a Box making music for you Step 1 Typing in the Chords There are numerous ways of entering chords into Band in a Box We ll discuss five fast ways of entering chords 1 Using the Computer Keyboard 2 Playing directly on a MIDI Controller Keyboard 3 Using the Chord Builder 4 Importing Chords from a MIDI file 5 Loading an Existing Band in a Box Format Song On the main screen of the program you l
310. ustomize the settings of the Embellisher choose an embellisher type from presets and make a particular Embellishment permanent 242 Chapter 14 Reference Melody Embellisher M Live Auto embellish during every playback Settings Preset vi Humanize Vels Durs timing Memo Total Notes 448 Trumpet Octave adj 0 av pitch 67 ideal 70 Extra Notes 0 Turns 10 Doubled Notes 10 Grace Notes 17 Anticipated Notes 33 Less Anticipations Reduced Antic 3 Vibrato Notes 34 rd Adjust Octave Mi Anticipations wi Grace Notes M Doubled Notes Update Current Embellishment 3 Mi Extra Notes Defaults J More Stats Mi Note turns Re Embellish NOW Permanent 3 M Vibrato Make Current Embellishment Permanent Mi Laid back feeling to Melody Restore Original Melody Track to use Melody v Undo Play Stop Pause Cancel Convert Harmony to Melody Track Converts a single line Melody track to include the current harmony selection Remove Harmony or guitar solo from Melody Track Removes a harmony from a track providing that the harmony was put there by Band in a Box in the first place using the Convert Harmony to Melody Track command Generate Guitar Chord Solo Opens the Select Guitarist dialog for generating a guitar chord solo Rechannel to Guitar Display This takes a melody and converts it to Guitar Channels 11 to 16 When it encounters a
311. ut the count in If there is a Melody pickup then the 2 bar lead in will remain in the file Include Controllers Reverb Chorus pan This will include the reverb chorus and panning settings Include Forced Channel Meta Event This will include the forced channel META event It is recognized by PowerTracks Pro Audio and other PG Music programs only Write Chords Part Markers META event Writes the chords and part markers to the MIDI file Include Guitar Position Controller This will insert a controller 84 which PG Music uses to indicate the fret position Since some synths also use this for Portamento Control you should use this setting with caution Write Soloist Part on channel 5 Normally the program writes the Soloist part on channel 8 Since that could also mean the left hand of a piano track using the convention of channel 8 9 for piano this option allows you to write it on channel 5 instead Write Harmony to MIDI file If checked the harmony will be written to the MIDI file If not just the melody will be written to the MIDI file MIDI file Harmony sep tracks 80 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide If checked the harmony will be written to the MIDI file on separate tracks for each voice You could use this to print out individual parts to your printer for example Write Guitar part on 6 channels If set to YES the styles that are Intelligent Guitar Styles will result in a MIDI file that has the Guitar part writte
312. utton Left Margin Right Margin The left and right page margins are set in inches For example you could set the margin to 1 25 inches Music Font Size You can choose any size font you want for lead sheet printout To change the font size for printout insert the font point size you would like in the Music Font Size box The larger the number the bigger the font The default is 24 Setup This launches the setup dialog box for your printer 106 Chapter 7 Notation and Printing Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features Automatic Songs The Melodist Feel like composing a brand new song With Band in a Box you can compose a new song in the style of your choice complete with intro chords melody arrangement and improvisations all created by the program All you have to do is pick from one of the Melodists and press OK the program then automatically generates the intro chords melody and arrangement in the chosen style It even auto generates a title for you to complete your song You can go from nothing to a completed song in less than 1 second Once the song is generated the chords and melody may be edited modified printed and saved as a MIDI file as with any other song And you can auto regenerate any part of the song to modify the composition to your taste The Melodist will also generate a melody over an existing chord progression A Melodist Jukebox mode creates and performs new compositions in
313. very time The Embellisher is only active while the music is playing it doesn t permanently affect the Melody track There is an option to make the Embellishment permanent so that if you like a certain embellishment you can add it to the Melody track This is especially useful to spice up songs that have been entered in step time with robotic velocities and durations of notes Using the Embellisher makes it sound like a person was playing instead of a computer Chordsheet Area Chord Entry The basic way of entering a song in Band in a Box is by typing in the chords to the song using the computer keyboard Chords are typed in using standard chord symbols Like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13 9 E Another way of entering chords is through MIDI chord recognition Play any chord on your MIDI keyboard and Band in a Box will recognize it instantly and insert it onto the chordsheet This allows you to enter an entire song without having to type in any of the chords To use this feature select the Insert current MIDI chord from the M menu Ctrl Return is the keystroke combination for this function 48 Chapter 5 The Main Screen The chord you choose will be automatically inserted into your song chordsheet or notation view at the current cursor location Then Band in a Box is ready for the next chord You can insert up to two chords per bar in this fashion User Settings for the Main Screen You can choose different colors for the chords
314. ves you an as played playback with the strange sounding high macro notes Transpose Root Pattern Usual Setting No This is a rarely used setting It only is relevant when voice leading is set to smooth see below It determines where the center of the pattern is considered to be If checked the center of the pattern will be moved to the song s key Embellish Pattern Usual Setting No If checked the pattern will be embellished This is useful in Jazz styles Transpose Down Limit Usual Setting 6 This setting is quite useful It controls the range that the pattern will be played over For example if the transpose down range is set to 2 the pattern 162 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions recorded in C will be transposed a maximum of 2 semitones down and therefore up to 10 semitones up to play all 12 possible roots of the chords Type Of Voice Leading Usual Setting Transpose Only Transpose Only C7 chord based Smooth voice leading Riff based The easiest type of voice leading is transpose only If the notes C E G Bb were played as a C7 pattern the Band in a Box would transpose that voicing to a F7 chord as F A C Eb which is fine but not very smooth A more pleasant setting would be smooth voice leading then the F7 would be voiced automatically as C Eb F A Riff based voicing is used when you have recorded a pattern with a melodic riff init This setting ensures that Band in a Box will not try to transform any o
315. vibrato the vibrato will start after this many ticks Adjust Octave Method If the octave is to be adjusted it will either only adjust it if the notes are outside the playable range or always adjust it to the best octave according to the setting you make here Dynamic Range Refers to the range of velocities used for the humanization Useful range 30 to 50 Legato Settings Refers to the amount of legato for the notes Useful range 55 to 75 138 Chapter 9 Recording Tracks Chapter 10 Built in Drums Animated Drum Kit This sizable window is a cool animated 3D display of a complete drum kit with all 61 Drum sounds displayed on their instruments Watch the various drum instruments being played or play along record on any of the drum instruments by using QWERTY keys or a mouse Very educational and lots of fun To launch the Drum Kit window click the Drums button or choose the Windows Drum Window option Then the Drums Kit window will display an animated display of a complete GM drum kit You can do several things with the Drums Window Watch the Drum part being played on the Drums Window in real time Play along with the drums in real time by mouse clicking on the Drum Instrument or using QWERTY keys the key names to use are listed on the Drums Window Record a drum part into Band in a Box To do this simply press RECORD in Band in a Box and play along Note If you want to record a drum part to the
316. w Tempo or Feel dialog The humanize effect is broken down into 5 main categories Tempo Lateness 8th Note Spacing Legato and Feel Transpose Melody Allows you to transpose the melody track without affecting the other tracks in the song Copy Ist chorus to all song This stretches the melody track out over the entire song i e first last and middle choruses Kill entire melody Erases the melody track and any data that was contained therein Kill Melody Choruses Eliminates the Melody from the First Chorus Middle Choruses or Last Chorus as selected from a list box Adjust Level of Melody Allows you to increase or decrease the volume velocity of the Melody track without affecting the other tracks TimeShift Melody ticks Allows you to move the Melody forwards or backwards in small increments relative to the rest of the song tracks Measured in ticks or parts per quarter PPQ Insert Beats In Melody Allows you to insert a blank beat or beats into the song relative to the current time signature Delete Beats in Melody Allows you to delete a beat or beats from the song relative to the current time signature Copy to Soloist Track Copies the entire contents of the Melody track to the Soloist Track Useful for a temporary holding area for your Melody or bouncing tracks Chapter 14 Reference 241 Move to Soloist Track Copies the entire contents of the Melody track and erases the original data f
317. w any chord sounds by selecting it in the chordsheet and pressing Shift Return or use the Chord Builder feature to audition different chords until you find the one that sounds best to you In other words you can enter chords by ear without having to know the actual chord names or any music theory This feature also illustrates the differences between various chord types 66 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Previewing Chords This feature allows you to hear chords as you to type them in When you are entering chords onto the Chord sheet or notation window after you type a chord name press Shift Return This enters the chord onto the chord sheet and then plays the chord for you using the patches on the Piano part and Bass part You can also listen to a chord that has already been entered by just pressing Shift Return after moving to that bar with the chord If there is no chord entered at that bar you will hear the last chord that was entered You can also preview chords from the Chord Options dialog Press Option Z to launch the dialog and then press the Preview button to hear the current chord in the Chord Options dialog Chord Settings onl i Fy 4 Preview Builder Fe Update Chord Subs Pushes Rests aS No Push Rest Type J Push by 1 16 All Instruments Push by 1 8 All Except Chord Builder This feature allows you to hear and build chords up by clicking on t
318. w we know what the rows are for they are for patterns of different lengths and different substyles A and B The columns across the screen are used to contain multiple variations of similar sounding patterns The program will randomly pick between the similar patterns on playback The number that is Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 147 recorded and displayed on the screen refers to the weight assigned to that pattern Normally if you have three similar patterns with equal weight they will be picked equally but if you assign lower or higher weights in the range 0 8 you can fine tune how often patterns are played Note Normally weights are in the range 0 8 A weight of 9 may also be assigned when you have a pattern that only occurs under certain conditions but you want to ensure that whenever that condition occurs that the pattern will always be picked The Bass and Piano Guitar Strings patterns are always recorded in two bar chunks regardless of the chord duration If a shorter chord duration is entered the remainder of the pattern is ignored Patterns are also entered for the A and B substyles Drum patterns are not of variable duration like the Bass and Piano patterns The Drum patterns are always one bar long Longer patterns than one bar may be chained together using bar masks see below When you record a new pattern Bass Piano or Drums a dialog box will be displayed with several options all set to defaults o
319. w with a default setting of 120 beats per minute Click with the mouse to adjust the tempo in increments of 5 beats per minute Clicking on the top of the numbers increases the tempo setting clicking on the bottom decreases it The tempo can also be typed into the Main Settings dialog which opens from the menu Song Title Key Tempo Embel or with the keystrokes Cmd K You can click 4 times on the metronome in this dialog to set your tempo Tap the Tempo Not sure of the tempo for your song Tap it in real time on either the key or the key on your computer keyboard Four taps on the minus key sets the tempo four taps on the equal key sets the tempo and starts the song playing Finishing the Song Arrangement Use the powerful musical intelligence of features like the Harmonies and the Soloist to add the final touches to your song The Edit Bar Settings dialog F5 function key lets you fine tune your arrangement by changing patches styles harmonies tempo and meter anywhere in the song Edit Bar Settings beats this bar 0 Change Style to J i Tempo Change 0 STY f Clear Relative Tempo Change Q W Send patches with style change Bass Soloist 0 ot en Click On Piano 0 Strings Metronome 0 inez To Set Tempo Drums Melody Guitar Q Thru Clear Settings Harmony Changes at this Bar Melody Harmony No change in harmony vjat Beat 1 Thru Harmony No change in harmony vjat
320. want Soloists to be automatically loaded with a song that was saved with Soloist information Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Enable this option to permit the Soloist to utilize the Harmony features This will allow the Soloist to make a harmonized solo with the harmony of your choice See the Select Soloist dialog for additional details Edit Soloist Track is a sub menu of editing options Import Soloist from MIDI File Import Soloist from Clipboard Record Soloist Record Soloist From Bar Step Edit Notes Quantize Soloist Humanize w Straight Feel Humanize w Swing Feel Humanize Soloist Transpose Soloist Copy lst Chorus to Entire Song Kill Entire Soloist Kill Soloist Choruses Adjust Level of Soloist Time Shift Soloist ticks Insert Beats In Soloist Delete Beats in Soloist Copy to Melody Track Move To Melody Track Swap Melody and Soloist Track Convert Harmony to Soloist Track Remove Harmony or Guit Solo from Soloist Track Generate Guitar Chord Solo Rechannel to Guitar Display Utilities 180 Chapter 14 Reference 245 246 Import Soloist from MIDI File allows you to import MIDI data from a file MID into the Soloist track Import Soloist from Clipboard allows you to import MIDI data that has been pasted into the clipboard e g from a sequencer such as PowerTracks Record Soloist records a MIDI part to the Soloist track instead of recording to the Melody track Reco
321. word home but Band in a Box normally plays a 2 bar ending starting at the end of bar 32 and going for 2 bars more For a song like this it is more natural to end the song at the end of bar 32 Start the 2 bar ending early To set this in Band in a Box choose the Song Additional Song Settings item and set Start the ending 2 bars early to true The Chordsheet The chordsheet is a spreadsheet where the numbered cells represent bars of music The chord changes for the song are shown in the corresponding bars Band in a Box chordsheet area As well as entering the chords for your song the chordsheet is where you put in style variations fills and breaks Band in a Box gives you lots of easy ways to enter song information into the chordsheet but first we ll go over the basics Typing Chords The basic way of entering a song in Band in a Box is by typing the chords for the song into the chordsheet The location of the black highlight cell determines C where chords are entered Use either the mouse or the cursor arrow keys on the computer keyboard to Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide 35 move the chord highlight cell around the chordsheet Click on any bar to position the highlight cell then type in the chords for that bar The highlight cell covers two beats or half a bar in 4 4 time Two chord names can be typed into the highlight cell separated by a comma e g C C dim so up to four chords per bar
322. ws you to use existing string patterns For example the Miami Pop style has a nice strings part Let s import the Miami Pop strings into our style Choose the LOAD button Select the ZZMIAMLSTY style from the file dialog Select the Strings button to display the String patterns for this style Select an 8 beat String pattern to copy and press the COPY button Choose the LOAD button Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 151 Select the ZZLITROK STY style Press the OPEN button to open this style Choose an empty 8 beat b String pattern because that is where the String pattern was recorded in and press the PASTE button Press the SAVE button to save the Lite Rock style with Strings The strings will play in the b substyle only because that s how they were made in the Miami Pop style You could now import the Guitar from the ZZCONTRY STY for example using the steps above It is quite easy to quickly add instruments to styles by importing instruments from other styles Let s Record some new bass patterns Note If you are not able to play patterns in real time live then you shouldn t record these Bass Piano Guitar or Strings patterns You cannot enter them in step time Only Drum patterns may be entered in step time If you can t enter them in real time import an instrument from existing styles as described above Recording a Bass Pattern Move the highlighted c
323. y Channels dialog box Harmony 3 Harmony Channels Melody Harmony 6 Melody Harmony C Thru Harmony B Thru Harmony C Update hs i 88 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Setting the Harmony Channels Melody Harmony Channel A Always uses the Melody channel Melody Harmony Channel B Default 11 Melody Harmony Channel C Default 12 Thru Harmony Channel A Always uses the Thru channel Thru Harmony Channel B Default 13 Thru Harmony Channel C Default 14 Band in a Box already uses 7 channels Bass Drums Piano Guitar Strings Melody and Thru channels Adding these 4 harmony channels produces potentially 11 channels of information If you have a modern module that receives on all channels then you can use these defaults Older modules capable of playing only 8 parts at once like an MT32 or a Korg M1 won t be able to take advantage of the harmony using different instruments In this case you should set the harmony channels as follows Melody Harmony Channel A Uses the Melody Channel no need to set Melody Harmony Channel B Need to Set equal to Melody Channel Melody Harmony Channel C Need to Set equal to Melody Channel Thru Harmony Channel A Uses the Thru Channel no need to set Thru Harmony Channel B Need to Set equal to Thru Channel Thru Harmony Channel C Need to Set equal to Thru Channel If you do this then you don t need to do any other modifications to your Band in a Box setup because it is not usin
324. ymbal on beat 1 This pattern will always be played when the song 1s at the first bar of a new part which is the bar after a drum fill Pl al You can examine the options for any pattern by selecting the pattern by mouse clicking on it and then clicking on the EDIT button Move around the screen to different patterns by either using the cursor keys or mouse clicking on the desired pattern Let s examine the Drum pattern by pressing the REC button This opens the Drum Editor window This screen allows you to create or Edit drum patterns in step time There are 16 columns representing 1 bar of 16th notes The numbers on this screen represent velocities from 0 to 127 Using the bottom row of the computer keyboard 1 e the XCVBNM keys is the fastest way to put in commonly used velocities or by selecting the various commonly used velocity buttons at the bottom right of the Drum Pattern Entry screen You can also just type in the number that you want Try typing in some new drum notes Press the PLAY button to audition them Let s create a new drum fill Move to an empty location on the Fills line Press REC to open the Drum Pattern Entry screen Type a drum pattern in the drum grid Save the pattern by pressing EXIT to exit the Drum Editor 150 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Accept the generic settings in the Drum Pattern Recorded dialog box You will see your new pattern on the Fills li
325. you can see what keys to hit without having to mouse over the instrument The drums can be moved off screen without snapping back to the middle To display the QWERTY keys on the notes select the option in the Drums Window Settings dialog to Display QWERTY Chars on Drums Multi note instruments send different notes depending on where you click on the instrument For instance the Kick Drum can send three different notes Ac Bass Drum MIDI note 35 Bass Drum 1 MIDI note 36 and Square Kick MIDI Note 32 140 Chapter 10 Built in Drums The hint line at the top of the window describes the current control under the mouse cursor Use the hint line to learn the mouse responsive areas of each drum instrument Multi Note Drums Instruments Kick Drum Ac Bass Drum Bass Drum 1 Square Kick Snare Acoustic Snare Side Stick HiHat Closed Pedal Open Floor Tom Low High Electronic Pad Multi zoned for Hi Q Slap Electric Snare High Conga Mute Open Surdo Mute Open Cuica Mute Open Metronome Bell Click Whistle Long Short Triangle Mute Open Guiro Long Short Scratch Push Pull Computer QWERTY Drum Key velocity H F 3 k i L Hl ei Velocity Emphasis a i Stick E a a E if Emphasis Play Stop Chapter 10 Built in Drums 141 Numeric Keypad Drum Keys Strike computer keys to play drums Drums are grouped on the computer keyboard by category The kick
326. you could have a song with no piano part Usually these settings are set to On as you would normally like all members of your band to participate Other parameters that may be saved volume reverb etc are shown on the left side of the window Storing Volume Panning Reverb and or Bank Settings You can optionally save these kinds of settings with your songs You can make for example a song with the piano a little quieter than usual add reverb to the melody patch or pan the bass to one side etc Simply choose the parameters you wish to be saved with a song and press the Save Song button when you are satisfied with your selections Saving a MIDI file Your song can be saved as a Standard MIDI file with the MID button in the toolbar or with the menu command File Save Standard MIDI File or with the keystrokes Option S The file can be saved to disk or to the clipboard Choose which tracks get written to the MIDI File By muting tracks with Option Click on the track name at the top of the screen you can decide which tracks get written to the MIDI file Any track that is muted is excluded from the MIDI file See the Edit Preferences dialog for MIDI file options For example if you don t want to create a MIDI file containing the first 2 bars of the 1 2 1 2 3 4 count in you can select this option and the MIDI file will begin directly at bar 1 without the count in If there is a Melody pickup then the 2 b
327. you will use Channel A for all the voices If your harmony uses Flute and Bass then you could use Flute on Channel A and Bass on Channel B Let s make the Harmony called Shearing Quintet This is illustrated above The Shearing Quintet was a famous Jazz quintet with a distinctive sound that consisted of Piano playing a 4 part harmony with the melody doubled one octave below Vibes doubling the melody Electric Guitar doubling the melody one octave below OK we ll make this harmony by using Piano as Channel A Vibes as Channel B Guitar as Channel C Let s start with the Piano Let s hear our Shearing harmony playing as we develop it To do this we need a song with a melody to be playing before we enter the Harmony Maker So let s 168 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions exit the Harmony Maker and start a song with a melody playing like Old Folks at Home mgu Now go back into the Harmony Maker Voices Voice You ll see the voices down the left side of the dialog box MW mel Mel is the melody mi 2 Voice 2 is a chord tone below the melody mi3 Voice 3 is 2 chord tones below the melody 4 Voice 4 is 3 chord tones below the melody amp Voice 5 rarely used is an additional chord tone usually Mi Mel2 the 9 or 11 in the scale A Mel3 Mel2 and Mel3 are used to double the melody For the Shearing Quintet harmony The Piano is 4 part harmony so it will use voice 1 2 3 and 4 on Channel A The Vibes wi

PG Music Band in a Box - 2012 (Macintosh) User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents